ProDesign Amtech

Amtech Group
ProDesign (IEC)
Software for the Building Services Industry

 Copyright Amtech Group 1992‐2014

Amtech Group
Bank House
171 Midsummer Boulevard
Central Milton Keynes
Buckinghamshire
England
MK9 1EB
Tel: 01908 608833
Fax : 01908 234355
Email : [email protected]
Web Site: www.amtech.co.uk

Windows™ is a registered trademark of the Microsoft ® Corporation

Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent an assurance of liability on the part of
Amtech Group. Amtech reserves the right to enhance or add new features which may not always be reflected in the manual
supplied.
The software described in this document is furnished under a licence agreement and may be used or copied only in accordance with
the terms of the agreement.
It is against the law to copy the software except as specifically allowed in the licence agreement. No part of this manual may be
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any
purpose, without the express permission of Amtech Group.
 1992 ‐2014 Amtech Group

Contents
Amtech System Requirements 1
Installation 3
Activating your Amtech software 5
Automatic Updates 9
Availability of Web Updates ....................................................................................................... 9
Applying a Web Update ........................................................................................................... 11
Checking your version of software ........................................................................................... 12
Tutorial 13
Drawing a Single‐line Diagram ................................................................................................. 13
Menu Bar ................................................................................................................... 18
Toolbars ..................................................................................................................... 18
Placing Drawing Components .................................................................................................. 20
Source. ....................................................................................................................... 21
Switchboard ............................................................................................................... 21
Busbar ........................................................................................................................ 22
Distribution Board. .................................................................................................... 22
Consumer Unit. .......................................................................................................... 22
Loads .......................................................................................................................... 22
Cables ......................................................................................................................... 23
Save ............................................................................................................................ 24
Editing cable references. ........................................................................................... 24
Input of Distribution System Details ........................................................................................ 26
Source Dialog ............................................................................................................. 26
Busbars Dialog ........................................................................................................... 26
Cables Dialog .............................................................................................................. 27
Load Dialog ................................................................................................................ 28
Motor Loads ............................................................................................................... 28
Boards Dialog ............................................................................................................. 29
Calculation. ................................................................................................................ 31
Menus and Toolbars 33

File Menu ................................................................................................................................. 34
Draw Menu .............................................................................................................................. 36
Edit Menu ................................................................................................................................. 37
View Menu ............................................................................................................................... 38
Preferences Menu .................................................................................................................... 39
Amtech Group Contents  i

Drawing Sub Menu .................................................................................................... 39
System Sub‐Menu ...................................................................................................... 40
Calculations Sub‐menu .............................................................................................. 41
Reports Sub‐menu ..................................................................................................... 42
Graphical Tooltip Sub‐menu ...................................................................................... 42
Protective Devices Sub‐menu .................................................................................... 42
Lock Project ................................................................................................................ 42
Use Start‐up Screen ................................................................................................... 42
Open Data Entry on Start‐Up ..................................................................................... 42
Print Note Icons ......................................................................................................... 43
Calculation Menu ..................................................................................................................... 43
Reports Menu .......................................................................................................................... 44
Window Menu ......................................................................................................................... 45
Support Menu .......................................................................................................................... 45
Help Menu ................................................................................................................................ 46
Standard Toolbar ...................................................................................................................... 46
Construct Toolbar ..................................................................................................................... 47
View Toolbar ............................................................................................................................ 48
Annotate Toolbar ..................................................................................................................... 49
Calculate Toolbar ..................................................................................................................... 50
Settings Toolbar ....................................................................................................................... 50
User Type ................................................................................................................................. 51
The Project Drawing 53

Starting your project ................................................................................................................ 53
The Drawing Window ............................................................................................................... 53
Multiple Projects ........................................................................................................ 53
The Drawing Window Features.................................................................................. 54
Project Drawing Defaults ......................................................................................................... 57
Drawing The Network .............................................................................................................. 58
Annotation ............................................................................................................................... 68
Automatic annotation ................................................................................................ 68
Symbol Library ........................................................................................................... 71
Default Symbols ......................................................................................................... 72
Editing The Drawing ................................................................................................................. 72
Selecting Drawing Objects ......................................................................................... 72
Cut .............................................................................................................................. 72
Copy Function ............................................................................................................ 73
Paste .......................................................................................................................... 73
Delete ......................................................................................................................... 73
Undo .......................................................................................................................... 73
Redo ........................................................................................................................... 73
Moving Components .................................................................................................. 74
Persistent Connection ................................................................................................ 74
Logo .......................................................................................................................................... 75
Logo Editor ................................................................................................................. 76
Replacing the Logo Image File ................................................................................... 77

ii  Amtech System Requirements Amtech Group

Colour Configuration ................................................................................................................ 77
Changing a Colour Setting .......................................................................................... 78
Changing Phase Markings .......................................................................................... 78
Saving a Colour Configuration Template ................................................................... 78
Find Function ........................................................................................................................... 79
Graphical Tooltip ...................................................................................................................... 80
Component Properties ............................................................................................................. 80
Printing the Drawing ................................................................................................................ 81
Project Settings 83

Project Templates .................................................................................................................... 83
Lock Project .............................................................................................................................. 84
Fix Design ................................................................................................................................. 85
Reopen Last Project at Start‐up ............................................................................................... 86
Component Templates ............................................................................................................. 86
Defining the Component Template for a Cable ......................................................... 86
Applying Component Templates ............................................................................... 87
Setting Component Templates as a Default .............................................................. 87
Component Template Selection During Drawing Construction ................................. 88
Voltage Drop Settings .............................................................................................................. 88
Source Dialog ............................................................................................................. 88
Voltage Drop Settings Dialog ..................................................................................... 88
Overload Settings ..................................................................................................................... 90
Discrimination Settings ............................................................................................................ 91
Discrimination Settings Dialog ................................................................................... 91
Diversity Settings...................................................................................................................... 93
Minimum Cable sizes ............................................................................................................... 98
Maximum Separate CPC Sizes .................................................................................................. 99
Project Revision ...................................................................................................................... 100
Earth Fault Protection Propagation ....................................................................................... 101
Distribution System Settings 103

Sources of Supply ................................................................................................................... 103
Source of Supply Settings ........................................................................................ 104
Transformer Settings ............................................................................................... 109
Generator Settings ................................................................................................... 110
TT Supply Settings .................................................................................................... 111
REC Supply Settings ................................................................................................. 114
UPS as Source of Supply........................................................................................... 114
Boards .................................................................................................................................... 115
Switchboard Settings ............................................................................................... 115
Distribution Boards Settings .................................................................................... 120
Consumer Unit Settings ........................................................................................... 126
Conductors ............................................................................................................................. 134
Centre Feed Unit ...................................................................................................... 153
Tap Off Unit ............................................................................................................. 153
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) ...................................................................................... 155
Connection points .................................................................................................... 155
Amtech Group Contents  iii

Operating Modes ..................................................................................................... 155
UPS Settings ............................................................................................................. 156
Load Data Entry: Dialogs ........................................................................................................ 160
Non‐motor Load Settings ......................................................................................... 162
Motor Load Settings ................................................................................................ 164
Motor Starter ......................................................................................................................... 164
Street Lighting Settings .......................................................................................................... 168
Junction Box ........................................................................................................................... 170
Power Factor Correction ........................................................................................................ 170
Load data Entry: Spread Control ............................................................................................ 172
Data Entry Spread Control 173

Data Table .............................................................................................................................. 174
Data Entry .............................................................................................................................. 174
Selecting Cables ..................................................................................................................... 174
Settings Applied to Multiple Components ............................................................................. 175
Reference Tab ........................................................................................................................ 176
Toolbar ................................................................................................................................... 176
Graph View 181

Displaying the Graph View ..................................................................................................... 181
Selecting Graph Views ............................................................................................. 181
Setting Devices ......................................................................................................... 181
Closing the Graph View ............................................................................................ 182
ProDesign Graphical Discrimination ....................................................................................... 182
ProDesign Graphical Energy Let‐through ............................................................................... 183
‘Overcurrent + Energy/Current’ View ...................................................................... 184
‘Earth Fault+Energy/Current’ View .......................................................................... 185
Withstand Data Panel .............................................................................................. 187
Cable Withstand Data Calculations .......................................................................... 187
Graph Navigation Tool ............................................................................................. 188
Calculations 189
Check Network Logic .............................................................................................................. 189
Calculating The Project........................................................................................................... 190
Errors and Warnings Dialog .................................................................................................... 190
Error and Warning messages ................................................................................... 190
Error Messages ........................................................................................................ 192
Warning Messages ................................................................................................... 199
Notes ........................................................................................................................ 200
Cable Sizing ............................................................................................................................ 201
General .................................................................................................................... 201
Installed in Air .......................................................................................................... 201
Installed in Ground .................................................................................................. 205
Motor Circuits .......................................................................................................... 206
User Defined Rating ................................................................................................. 207
Busbar Sizing .......................................................................................................................... 207
Busbar Data .............................................................................................................. 207
iv  Amtech System Requirements Amtech Group

Sizing Calculations .................................................................................................... 208
Voltage Drop Requirements ................................................................................................... 208
Voltage Drop Calculations ....................................................................................... 208
Voltage Drop Limits ................................................................................................. 209
Compliance With Voltage Drop Limits ..................................................................... 209
Phase Fault Calculations ........................................................................................................ 212
Calculation Method ................................................................................................. 212
Breaking Capacity Check .......................................................................................... 213
Line Conductor Adiabatic Check .............................................................................. 215
Busbar Fault Rating .................................................................................................. 215
Earth Fault Calculations ......................................................................................................... 216
Purpose of Earth Fault Calculations ......................................................................... 216
Earth Fault Current .................................................................................................. 216
Earth Fault Loop Impedance .................................................................................... 216
Earth Fault Disconnection ........................................................................................ 217
Earthing Arrangements ............................................................................................ 218
Maximum Earth Fault Loop Impedance ................................................................... 219
Checking Earth Fault Loop Impedance .................................................................... 220
Additional Protection ............................................................................................... 220
Disconnection using earth fault protection ............................................................. 220
Earth Fault Adiabatic Calculation ............................................................................. 221
Impedance Matrices .............................................................................................................. 222
Zbus Viewer ............................................................................................................. 223
Harmonics .............................................................................................................................. 226
Multi‐core Cables and Busbars ................................................................................ 226
Harmonic Current and Neutral Protection .............................................................. 226
Accumulation of Harmonic Loads ............................................................................ 227
Diversity ................................................................................................................................. 228
Transformer Load Check ........................................................................................................ 229
Generator Load Check ............................................................................................................ 230
Defined Load Threshold ......................................................................................................... 230
Discrimination ........................................................................................................................ 231
Energy‐based Discrimination Check ........................................................................ 231
Time‐Current Discrimination Check ......................................................................... 232
Discrimination Check Dialog .................................................................................... 233
Displaying device characteristics ........................................................................................... 234
Protect Export – Circuit Selector .............................................................................. 234
Source Calculations ................................................................................................................ 235
REC Supply Fault Level Calculator ............................................................................ 235
TT Calculation Requirements ................................................................................... 236
TT Supply Fault Level Calculator .............................................................................. 236
Identical Parallel Supplies ........................................................................................ 238
Reports 241
Errors and Warning Report .................................................................................................... 241
Quick Results .......................................................................................................................... 242
Displaying Quick Results .......................................................................................... 242
Field Chooser ........................................................................................................... 244
Amtech Group Contents  v

Display Results ....................................................................................................................... 245
Setting Display Results ............................................................................................. 245
Reports Wizard ....................................................................................................................... 248
Producing Reports ................................................................................................... 248
Viewing and Printing Reports .................................................................................. 249
Creating a Report Template ..................................................................................... 249
Changing the field order .......................................................................................... 250
Full Reports ............................................................................................................................ 251
Autodesk Revit Interface 287

Configuring the Revit/ProDesign interface ............................................................................ 288
Exporting from Revit to ProDesign ......................................................................................... 290
Export from Revit ..................................................................................................... 290
Importing from Revit into ProDesign ....................................................................... 291
Returning the ProDesign design to Revit ............................................................................... 292
Exporting new circuits from Revit to an existing ProDesign project ...................................... 293
Frequently Asked Questions 295
Amtech Group Limited End-User Licence Agreement 303
Amtech Training 309
Amtech PremierCare 311
Glossary of Terms 313
Index 321

vi  Amtech System Requirements Amtech Group

Amtech System Requirements
These specifications refer to the minimum specifications across the range of Amtech software applications.
Computer (desktop or laptop)
Minimum PC and system requirements are:
 Intel Pentium 4 (2.0 GHz processor)
 1GB RAM (recommended 2GB)
 1.5GB free hard disk space
 DVD drive
 Mouse
 Monitor: 1024x768 resolution – min 256 colours (recommended 1280x1024)

Operating Systems
The following operating systems are supported on a desktop or laptop:
 Microsoft Windows XP SP3 or above ‐ Home or Pro (32 bit)
 Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium SP2 or above (32 and 64 bit)
 Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium or above (32 and 64 bit)
 Microsoft Windows 8 Pro or above (32 and 64 bit)
 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 or 2008 (FastTest/GasCert network installation)

Prerequisites
 An NTFS file system must by used (not FAT32)
 The Amtech product suite cannot be installed to a compressed drive
 All antivirus and firewall security software must be disabled prior to the installation
We recommend applying the latest Microsoft operating system Service Packs and patches before installing Amtech software.

Amtech Group Amtech System Requirements  1

Installation
First, ensure that Microsoft ® Windows™ is already installed on your system.
You need your latest Amtech disk and licence number. Your licence number is given on the Delivery Note included with the
software.
To install:
 Ensure that you are a local machine administrator
 Close all open applications and the Office Toolbar, if running, before starting the installation.
 Insert the Amtech Electrical Design Suite disk into your PC.
 Setup should start automatically. If not do the following:
 From the Start button on the Task Bar select Run.
 In the Open data entry box type D:\setup (Where D: is your optical drive letter. If your optical drive has a different
drive letter type that in instead.) Press ENTER or click on OK to start the installation.

Setup will run from the disk. Follow on‐screen instructions.
Amtech Group Installation  3

Activating your Amtech software
Amtech software is sold as a single user, single installation licence unless otherwise specified in your licence agreement. The
software may be installed and Activated on a single computer. Multi‐user licence agreements will allow the software to be installed
and Activated on the specified number of computers.
The software is protected and requires Activation before unrestricted use. Before Activation there will be full functionality but the
message “DEMONSTRATION ONLY” will be printed on all documents.
You will receive reminders to Activate the software, however after 30 days the software must be activated.
Please Note:
Amtech Mobile programs, i.e. FastTest Mobile and GasCert Mobile do not require activating.
How do I Activate my Amtech software?
Activating your new software is a two step process
Step 1 ‐ Send your ‘Request Code’ to Amtech
The preferred method of Activation is to use the ‘REQUEST ACTIVATION CODE’ button which sends your ‘Request Code’ to Amtech
electronically. An email auto‐responder will check to ensure that your company is the registered purchaser of the software and that
there is a user licence available. The auto‐responder operates 24 hours a day seven days per week, giving prompt response any time
of day.
The Activate dialog box may appear at start‐up and various other times indicating how many days you have left.
If the dialog box doesn’t appear automatically then it can be accessed by going to the ‘Support’ menu and selecting ‘Activate
program’
Amtech Group Activating your Amtech software  5

Click on the ‘REQUEST ACTIVATION CODE’ button.
On pressing the ‘Confirm’ button an activation request will be sent via the internet.
The e‐mail response from Amtech will be sent to the address entered on the Activation Request dialog.
Users who are unable to activate electronically may call the Amtech Activation Hotline on 0871 220 8880 (during office hours only).
The number is displayed on the activation dialog box. An Amtech representative will undertake the security checks manually then, if
appropriate, authorise and issue an unlock code.
Please note that this manual activation process may take several minutes. We strongly suggest that you use the email method if
possible as the process of dictating and recording a long code by phone is open to transcription errors.
Please do not contact Amtech Support or Amtech Sales regarding activation or de‐activation as they are unable to process these
requests.
Telephone calls are recorded to help prevent fraud.

Step 2 ‐ Receive your ‘Activation Code’ and Activate your software.
Check your email inbox. When you receive your ‘Activation code’ from Amtech you must enter this into the lower box. Use copy and
paste functions if possible to eliminate transcription errors.
If you have received your Activation code by phone enter it into the lower box. Be sure to type it accurately. The majority of the
support problems relating to Activation are due to incorrectly recorded or mis‐typed Activation codes.

Then click on the ‘Activate Now’ button to complete the process.

How to Copy and Paste
Click and hold the left mouse button. Drag the cursor over the text to be copied to highlight it. Release left button. Place the cusor on
the highlighted text and right click. Select copy from the drop down menu.
Place the cursor in the location you wish to copy to. Right click and select paste. The copied text will be inserted.
Do I have to activate all my Amtech programs separately?
No. You only have to activate 1 program in a suite of software. For example, if you have installed Amtech Office you will only need to
perform activation in one of the programs (it doesn't matter which) in order to activate the full suite.
If, however you have more than one suite of software you will need to activate each suite, e.g. Amtech Office and ProDesign 200.
Deactivating your Amtech software
From time to time, a Software Deactivation may be required (for example, when transferring your Software from one machine to
another (Single User Licence)).
6  Activating your Amtech software Amtech Group

If this is the situation, please follow the procedure outlined below:
 Make sure the Data is backed up from the original machine.
 Install the Software onto the new machine (but do not attempt Activation at this point).
 Transfer the backed up data from the original machine to the new.
 Open the software and use File – Restore to restore the data from the original machine.
 Contact the Activations Team on 0871 220 8880. They will assist you in Deactivating the software on your old
machine.
This will allow you to Reactivate the software on the new machine.

Federation Against Software Theft (FAST)
Amtech is a member of the Federation Against Software Theft (FAST). Further information is available on their website:
http://www.fast.org.uk/
Amtech Group Activating your Amtech software  7

Automatic Updates
This feature can automatically check whether a web update is available for your Amtech software (excluding Amtech Mobile
software). It will then offer to automatically download and install it.
The Amtech Automatic Update feature is available in all Amtech desktop products.
Program Updates dialog
The Check for Updates dialog allows you to control when the Automatic Update feature operates.
To access this dialog, simply go to the Support Menu and Select ‘Check For Updates’.
Your Amtech software will automatically check for updates every time it is launched unless you choose one of the other options.
 If you select the ‘Manually’ option updates will not be automatically checked.
 You can click the ‘Check Now’ button at any time to force the update procedure to start.
 The ‘Only show critical updates’ tick box controls whether text‐only messages will be displayed. If ticked, messages
such as ‘New Service Pack CD is available’ will not be displayed. Downloadable web patches will be reported
irrespective of the state of this option.
Availability of Web Updates

In order to be able to receive an Amtech Web update you must have:
 A current PremierCare agreement for the specific Amtech application
 Registered your Amtech software
 Registered your Amtech products on our website, www.amtech.co.uk
 Internet Access
Amtech Group Automatic Updates  9

PremierCare Status
Web updates are available to registered PremierCare members only. You can inspect your PremierCare status in the applications
‘About’ dialog found in the ‘Help’ menu.
Please contact our PremierCare renewal team on 01908 608833 if your PremierCare has expired.
N.B. If your Amtech program is unable to connect to the Amtech website the PremierCare status area will be blank.
Registration
Your software must be registered with us before updates will be made available to you.
 If you purchased your software directly from Amtech then it will be already registered.
 However, if you purchased from a third‐party registration may be required. Please phone Amtech Registration and
Activation on 0871 220 8880 (10p/min) for further details.
N.B. Your software will be registered with us if it is already activated.
Register Products on our website
You must register your Amtech products on our website www.amtech.co.uk Go to the Premier Care members area of the website,
log in and register your products.
Internet Access
You must, of course, have internet access to obtain a web update. We recommend a broadband internet connection is used.
10  Automatic Updates Amtech Group

Applying a Web Update

When a web update is available for your Amtech software the following type of dialog will appear:
Please note:
Some Web Updates may affect more than one application. For example, ProDesign and Protect might be updated by a single patch.
Download Now
Clicking ‘Download’ will download the update onto your computer if you have:
 A current PremierCare agreement for the specific Amtech application
 Registered your Amtech software
 Registered your Amtech products on our website www.amtech.co.uk
 Internet Access

Amtech Group Automatic Updates  11

Install Now
Clicking ‘Install Now’ will start the update installation process. You Amtech program will close and the installation screens will
appear. Please follow the on‐screen prompts.
After the installation has finished your Amtech program will re‐start automatically.
Remind me
Clicking ‘Remind me’ will close the ‘Update available’ dialog. It will reappear next time the program checks for updates (or when you
click the ‘Check Now’ button on the ‘Check for Updates’ dialog).
Dismiss
Clicking ‘Dismiss’ will cause the message to disappear. The message will not re‐appear automatically in the future. However, critical
updates (such as program updates) can still be accessed by clicking the ‘Check Now’ button on the ‘Check for Updates’ dialog.
Checking your version of software

You can check which version of Amtech software you are running in the ‘Help’ ‘About’ dialog.
The program’s version number is accompanied by the Service Pack and patch number. This information may be required by Amtech
Support during a technical enquiry.
12  Automatic Updates Amtech Group

Tutorial
This tutorial is designed to guide a user with no previous experience of ProDesign through the basic steps involved in designing a
simple distribution system.
Later chapters will describe the full range of program features, look in detail at areas not fully explored by this tutorial, describe
many more features and show how extensive and complex designs can be achieved.
The tutorial takes the user through four key design steps:
 draw the single line diagram;
 define the circuit components (cables types, protective devices etc.)
 calculate the system to give correct cable sizes etc.;
 produce reports describing the conditions and components for the designed system.
Drawing a Single‐line Diagram
On starting ProDesign, you will be presented with the following options screen:
This dialog gives you the option of opening an existing project or starting with a blank default project or using a template. There is
also a ‘Use Set‐up Wizard’ option.
The Set‐up Wizard helps you to configure the basic layout and settings for your new ProDesign project.
For the purpose of this Tutorial you should select ‘Use Set‐up Wizard’.
Set‐up Wizard Step 1 – Drawing Orientation
ProDesign can be used to create electrical schematics where the source of supply is represented at either the top or bottom of the
drawing area. However, you must declare which drawing orientation you will be using BEFORE you start placing any drawing
components.
Amtech Group Tutorial  13

Please ensure that the ‘Source Feeds from Top of Drawing’ option is selected.
N.B. The drawing orientation can be changed later if required in the ProDesign ‘Preferences’, ‘Drawing’ menu.

Set‐up Wizard – Step 2 – Drawing
The second set‐up wizard step controls the drawing ‘paper’ size and the other project drawing parameters.
Various standard paper sizes can be selected from the drop down list labelled ‘Size’. It is also possible to User Define a paper size.
For the purpose of this Tutorial please select ‘A3’ paper size.
14  Tutorial Amtech Group

N.B.
The paper size selected here does not necessarily determine the paper size used for the schematic printout. This is determined by
the paper size selection made on your printer driver at the time of printing.
Snap to Grid
The ‘Snap to Grid’ option determines whether annotation text and other secondary drawing items such as dashed lines and
annotation arrows will be forced to lie on grid points.
For the purpose of this Tutorial the ‘Snap to Grid’ option should be ticked.
N.B.
The primary electrical drawing symbols (such as Source, Cable, Board and Load) will always snap to the grid, irrespective of the
setting made here.
Orthogonal Cable/Busbar
When the ‘Orthogonal Cable/Busbar’ option is ticked all cable and busbar bends will be forced to 90 degrees.
For the purpose of this Tutorial please ensure that this option is ticked.
Persistent Connection
When the ‘Persistent Connection’ option is ticked cables and busbars will remain connected even if the items they are connected to
are moved.
For example, if a Board is moved ProDesign will preserve the connection of the incoming and outgoing ways.
For the purpose of the Tutorial this option should be ticked.
Set‐up Wizard – Step 3 – Annotation
When an electrical component is placed on the drawing it will automatically be allocated a reference. This reference will be displayed
alongside the component.
This third set‐up wizard step allows you to determine which font settings will be used for this annotation text.
For the purpose of this Tutorial please use the default ‘Arial’, ‘Regular’, ’14pt’ settings.
Set‐up Wizard – Step 4 – Symbols
ProDesign offers a variety of Load and Motor symbol options. This fourth set‐up step enables you to select the one you wish to use.
For the purpose of this Tutorial please use the default symbols (left‐most options for both Load and Motor).

Set‐up Wizard – Step 5 – Colour
ProDesign enables you to define the colour scheme used on your schematic. This set‐up tab allows you to select configure your own
colour scheme or choose a pre‐created one.
For the purpose of this Tutorial you should use the default ‘L1, L2, L3’ colour template (harmonised phase colours).
Set‐up Wizard – Step 6 – Diversity
ProDesign offers various methods of applying Diversity to you electrical designs. One of these methods is ‘Table H2’. This Table H2
method refers to the diversity tables in ‘IEE ‘Guidance Note 1: Selection and Erection of Equipment’ document (also ‘IEE On‐site
Guide: Appendix ,Table 1B’).

If the system being designed falls within one of the Premises Types listed then you can, if you wish, enable the Table H2 diversity
feature.
For the purpose of this Tutorial please leave the ‘Enable Table H2’ option un‐selected.

N.B.
You can determine on a board by board basis which form of Diversity is to be used. If you wish to use ‘Table H2’ then you will need to
make this selection on each Board and Consumer Unit within the project.

Set‐up Wizard – Step 7 – Minimum Cable Sizes
This final set‐up wizard step allows you to specify the minimum sizes that you wish ProDesign to consider when automatically
calculating cable sizes.

By default the minimum settings comply with the requirements of BS 7671: 2008 (2011), i.e.:
 Copper conductors: 1.5 mm2; except Lighting circuits, 1 mm2;
 Aluminium conductors: 16 mm2.
The minimum sizes for any of the load types can be increased above the default values. Click on a load type to select it and then use
the list box at the top of one of the columns to change the setting.
For the purpose of this Tutorial please leave this setting at the default settings (shown on the above image).
Starting your project
Having configured the basic project settings you should click ‘Done’.
This will open a blank drawing area which uses the defined settings.
The Drawing Area shows the top left hand corner of a sheet of paper upon which the single‐line diagram representing the network to
be designed will be drawn. The remaining area of the sheet can be viewed using the surrounding scroll bars.
The Drawing Area is divided into a grid indicated by dots showing the intersections of the grid lines. In the default condition, Snap to
Grid, symbols placed on the Drawing Area will be constrained to the grid. Above the Drawing Area are the Menu Bar and Tool Bars.
Menu Bar
The Menu Bar provides access to program commands, most of which are also available through keyboard shortcuts and Toolbars.
Toolbars
There are seven Toolbars: Standard, Construct, Annotate, View, Calculate, Settings, Templates.
The Toolbars contains buttons, operated by mouse click, that provide short cuts for carrying out various tasks.
The Toolbars can be dragged to the top, sides or the bottom of the drawing area. To drag a Toolbar from its starting location at the
top of the drawing, click and drag on the bar at the left of the Toolbar.
The five most useful toolbars for the purposes of the tutorial are described below:

Standard Toolbar
The Standard Toolbar contains, from left to right, the following buttons:
New, Open, Save, Save All, Print Preview, Print, Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete, Undo, Re‐do, About, Manual, Context Help, Amtech
Website.
Construct Toolbar
The Construct Toolbar contains, from left to right, the following buttons:
Source, Transformer, Generator, UPS, Switchboard, Distribution Board, Cable, Busbar, Busbar End Feed, Busbar Centre Feed, Busbar
Tap‐off, Street Lighting Column, Load, Motor Load.
The Construct toolbar contains the buttons for all the components used to draw the distribution system single‐line diagram.
In addition to providing a visual representation of the electrical network, the components drawn with these buttons are 'intelligent',
i.e., the software recognises them as part of the distribution network when calculating. Double‐clicking on any of these components
gives access to a dialog where the user can input information relating to that element.
Annotate Toolbar
The Annotate Toolbar contains, from left to right, the following buttons:
Text, Font, Draw Broken Line, Draw Solid Line, Draw Circle, Draw Arrow, Draw Rectangle (Broken Line), Draw Rectangle (Solid Line),
Symbol Library, Note, Text Box.
View Toolbar
The View toolbar contains, from left to right, the following buttons:
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Normal (1:1), Zoom Previous, Zoom Window, Zoom Extents, Edit, Grid Visible/Not Visible, Draw
Orthogonal Cables, Company Logo on Drawing Visible/Not Visible.
Calculate Toolbar
The Calculate toolbar contains, from left to right, the following buttons:
Calculate, Calculate Discrimination, View Graph, Protect Discrimination Study, Template Settings, Custom Reports, Re‐run Last
Report.

Symbol Library
The Symbol Library can be accessed by clicking on the Symbol Library button on the Annotate Toolbar. For example:
Note: these symbols are used to enhance the single‐line diagram but should not be used to form part of the network. It is best to use
these symbols after the basic single‐line diagram has been completed. The Annotate Toolbar (see above) also contains some useful
drawing components.

Placing Drawing Components
The first part of the tutorial covers the construction of the project single‐line diagram. The diagram being constructed is shown
below; this can be referred to from time to time while working through the tutorial.

All the buttons referred to in this tutorial are found on the Construct toolbar:

The single‐line diagram for the finished project should look similar to the drawing shown below:
Source.
There are four source types available; Source, Transformer, Generator and UPS:
.
If the network is not supplied from a transformer, generator or UPS, the 'Source' symbol should be used.
To begin the single‐line drawing, using the mouse, click the Source button in the Design Toolbar, then move the mouse
pointer into the drawing area.
Within the drawing area the mouse pointer will now appear as a cross‐hair with a source symbol bound to it, representing the source
of supply for the system.
Move the cross‐hair to a central point near the top of the drawing area (a grey line will appear on the drawing denoting the lower
limit of the area in which the Source can be placed) and click to place the source.
The first element of the single‐line diagram, the source of supply has now been drawn.
Note the blue cross at the base of the symbol to denote that the source does not yet have anything connected to it. (If the cross is
not visible, select Unconnected Ends from the View menu.)
As with all other drawing objects, after clicking to place the source, further sources could be added by continuing to click the mouse.
Additional sources are not required in this case, so to begin placement of the Switchboard, simply click the Switchboard button as
described below.
Hover, having placed the Source symbol, if you need to move it:
 ensure the Mouse pointer appears as an arrow (if not, right‐click an empty space on the drawing, or click the Edit
button on the View Toolbar);
 click and drag the symbol to a new position;
 move the mouse away and click again to confirm the new symbol position.
Any of the drawing components described below can be moved in the same way.
Similarly, to delete any component, click on it to select it and then simply press the Delete button on the keyboard.
For more details see: Drawing The Network
Switchboard
The next step is to draw a Switchboard which will subsequently be connected to the supply source by a main cable.
The Switchboard is drawn in a similar manner to that described for the Source above.
Click the Main Switchboard button in the Toolbar .

When the mouse pointer is moved into the drawing area it appears as a cross‐hair with a horizontal bar bound to it
.
Position the bar at least six grid spaces vertically below the Source symbol and click once again to place the Main Switchboard
symbol.
Busbar
To draw the busbar, click the End Feed button . Place the End Feed symbol at least six grid spaces below the Main
Switchboard and then click to locate it. Click on the Tap‐off button , place the symbol about a dozen grid spaces to the right of
the End Feed and click to locate it. Repeat this to place a further tap‐off to the right of the first one.
Select the busbar by clicking on the Busbar button . To draw the busbar, click the mouse pointer on the right border of the
End Feed, move the pointer to the left border of the first tap‐off TO‐1 and click again. Repeat to connect the second tap‐off TO‐2.
The busbar should now be complete.
Distribution Board.
The next step is to place a Distribution Board which will later be connected to tap‐off TO‐1 via a sub‐main cable.
Click on the Distribution Board button .
Move the mouse pointer into the Drawing Area. Locate the board rectangle at least six clear grid spaces below the previously placed
busbar tap‐off TO‐1, then click to place the Distribution Board.
Consumer Unit.
The next step is to place a Consumer Unit which will later be connected to tap‐off TO‐2 via a sub‐main cable.
Click on the Consumer Unit button .
Move the mouse pointer into the Drawing Area. Locate the board rectangle at least six clear grid spaces below the previously placed
busbar tap‐off TO‐2, then click to place the Consumer Unit.
Loads
The final components to be drawn are a general load and one motor load to Distribution Board DB1and a general load to Consumer
Unit CU‐1.
Click on the Load button in the Design Toolbar. Locate the symbol at least eight grid spaces below Distribution Board DB‐1.
Repeat below Consumer Unit CU‐1.
The motor circuit will be arranged with a motor starter at the Distribution Board, then a cable, then a motor load. To place the motor
starter, click on the Starter button in the Design Toolbar. Place the Starter to the right of the Distribution Board:


Click on the Motor button , then locate the symbol at least six clear spaces directly below the starter symbol and then click the
left‐hand mouse button to place the motor load.
Cables
Having placed the main components of this simplified distribution system, the only remaining drawing task is to draw the
interconnecting cables.
Click on the Cable symbol in the Design Toolbar.
Move the mouse pointer into the Drawing Area, it will appear as a cross .
To draw a cable between the Source and the Switchboard, place the intersection of the mouse pointer cross on the base of the
Source symbol and click , move vertically down and click on the top border of the Switchboard symbol.
Do not try to connect cables within the Switchboard, e.g., to the solid black line. Make supply connections to the upper border, load
connections to the lower border (Setting: Source Feeds From Top).
The cable will now be drawn and the cross symbol will re‐appear ready to draw the next cable.
When the connections to the Switchboard are complete, internal switched connections are automatically created:
Continue, as described above, to connect from the Switchboard to the end feed, from tap‐off to Distribution Board, from tap‐off to
Consumer Unit, and then from the Distribution Board and Consumer Unit to the three loads.
The cables drawn above are all straight lines. To draw a cable with bends, proceed as described below. (You can try this now in an
empty area of the drawing. Remember that you can easily delete any attempts by selecting the item no longer required and pressing
the Delete key on the keyboard.)
TIP
It is easier to draw cables with bends when Orthogonal Cables is selected which restricts bends to right‐angles. To select Orthogonal
Cables, click on the fifth button from the left on the Design Toolbar or select Options/Orthogonal Cable from the menu.
Select Cable from the Design Toolbar and then:
 Position the intersection of the mouse pointer cross at the cable start point and click;
 Move vertically down and click to define the position of the first bend;
 Move horizontally and click again, this time to define the position of the second bend;
 Finally to finish the cable, move vertically down to the finish point, click and then right click to finish. (Note: the final
right click is not necessary when drawing the end of the cable to meet another network element, such as a load.)
Note: when drawing cables, take care to observe the following:
 Work away from the source; Source to Main Board, Main Board to Tap‐off etc.;
 Ensure that both ends of an interconnecting cable actually touch the relevant symbols at the start and end of the
cable (If View | Show Unconnected Ends is selected, unconnected cable ends will be marked by red and blue
crosses);
 The vertical sides of Boards and Loads should not be used to make connections.

On completion of this section of the tutorial, your single‐line diagram should look like the one shown at the beginning of the tutorial.
If the diagram is correct, the project should be saved, always good practice, to avoid losing all the work done so far.

Save
To save a project, use the Save button on the Standard Toolbar.
Editing cable references.
Each cable on the drawing has two parts, the text describing the cable reference and the cable itself. These can be selected
separately and edited accordingly.
In this section the cable references will be edited. At present all cable references are default values applied by ProDesign, i.e.,
Cbl_SM‐1, Cbl_SM‐2, etc., in the order in which they were drawn.
To change the name of Cbl_SM‐1:
EITHER:
 Double‐click on the text ‘Cbl_SM‐1’ (not the cable itself);
 The Text dialog will be displayed and the new name can be typed in the Enter Text box:
OR:
 Double‐click on the cable;
 The Cable dialog will be displayed and the new name can be typed in the Reference box:

It is also possible to edit cable references in the Cable Data Entry Spread Control which can be displayed by selecting Cable Data
Entry in the Edit menu.
The names of the rest of the cables and all the other components of the system should now be edited in the same manner so that
the labels agree with those in the drawing below.

Where necessary, the positions of the items of text can be adjusted to agree with the diagram shown above. The following two
features will be of assistance in making these adjustments:
 Vertical text – check the Vertical box in the Text dialog.
 Snap to Grid – click on Preferences | Snap to Grid to uncheck Snap to Grid. Text can now be dragged to locations
between the grid positions.
The drawing section of the tutorial is now complete.

Input of Distribution System Details
Introduction
So far the single‐line diagram has been produced. Obviously, most projects would be much more extensive than this but the present
diagram contains sufficient components to demonstrate the key features of ProDesign, so the next stage, entering the data required
to define the system, can now be done.
This section will demonstrate how the components placed on the drawing so far are ‘intelligent’ , i.e., have associated dialogs that
can be used to describe the settings for each component.
Input of Distribution System Data
Once a system diagram has been drawn and labelled, the design would normally be completed by inserting the correct system data
such as supply voltage details, load details and cable types.
Each of the data dialogs should now be visited so that the data can be viewed. It would be useful at this stage to investigate and
become familiar with the various settings that can be made, although, for this simple tutorial exercise it will not be necessary to
make any specific settings. When leaving a dialog, changes made are saved by clicking on OK; clicking Cancel means any changes that
have been made will be ignored.
Source Dialog
The dialog for each circuit component is accessed by double‐clicking on that component.
Double‐clicking on the Source symbol causes the Source of Supply dialog to be displayed:
The dialog contains data about the source that can be edited by the user, described in detail in later chapters. You may wish to
experiment by changing various values but at present the default conditions are adequate and should be accepted by clicking on the
‘Cancel’ button when leaving the dialog.
For more information see: Source of Supply Settings
Busbars Dialog
Double‐clicking on a busbar (away from the area around its text label) causes the Busbar dialog to be displayed:

Where the busbar has a number of sections, clicking on any section displays the same Busbar dialog with details common to the
entire busbar with one exception: the Section Length refers to the individual length of the section that has been double‐clicked on.
You may wish to browse the busbar setting parameters but default conditions will be adequate for the purposes of the tutorial and
should be accepted by clicking on the Cancel button to leave the Busbar dialog and return to the drawing window.
For more Information see: Busbars Settings
Cables Dialog
Double‐clicking on a cable (away from the area around its text label) causes the Cable dialog to be displayed:

The dialog is divided into five tabs, each dealing with data for different subjects: the cable itself, its CPC, the circuit protection,
voltage drop and comments.
You may wish to browse the wide range of parameters available but, as before, default conditions are generally adequate for the
purposes of the tutorial and should be accepted by clicking on the Cancel button when leaving the dialog.
Cable data can also be reviewed and edited in the Cable Data Entry Spread Control (select Cable Data Entry in the Edit menu). This
avoids the need to navigate around the diagram to a particular cable and double‐clicking it to access the dialog. Also, changes can be
made groups of cables, not just individual cables. However, when first learning to use the software, it is best to use the dialogs where
a better appreciation of the interaction between settings will be gained before making extensive use of the spread control.
For more information see: Data Entry Spread Control

Load Dialog
Double‐clicking on a load causes the Load Details dialog to be displayed:
Within this dialog the type of load, its load current and power factor, harmonic content, earth fault disconnection time, and diversity
setting can be defined. Also, the text reference used to name the load can be edited. Again, the default settings will suffice for this
tutorial.
For more information see: Loads
Motor Loads
Most motor load circuits will include a motor starter and both the Motor Starter and the Load Details dialogs should be visited when
making settings for motors.
Motor Starter
The Motor Starter dialog contains the setting for the motor overload located in the starter. It is important to make the correct
setting as the sizing of the cable for the circuit is based on this setting.

Also included are the Circuit Protection tab containing the setting details for the circuit protective device, and the Motor Details tab
which contains the same motor settings that appear in the Motor Details Dialog (see below).
Motor Details
The Motor Details dialog contains similar settings to those described above in the Load Details dialog. Additionally, there are motor
settings that define the following: Rating in kW, No. of Poles, Efficiency. There are also setting for the assessment of voltage drop on
starting, and for the position of the motor starter in the circuit.
Boards Dialog
So far three loads have been defined in the system by including them in the drawing and then editing the cable and load details as
required. Another method, also available, is particularly useful where a large number of loads have to be connected to final
distribution boards.
Using board ‘DB 1’ as an example:
 double‐click on the board away from the text reference, the dialog Distribution Board will be displayed;
 click on the Circuit Diagram button , the Circuit Diagram will be displayed:

 The Circuit Diagram shows the load circuits already defined on the drawing as connected to Ways 1, 2 and 3. The
upper half of the box contains general distribution board data. The lower portion includes a Way diagram which can
be used to define single phase and three phase loads as required; the default capacity is 10‐way.

To define a further load from ‘DB 1’:
 Right‐click the Red phase connection on Way 4 to display a floating menu [1];
 From the menu select Add / Edit, the Final Circuit dialog will be displayed. The dialog contains all the data required
to define a final circuit including a tab containing the load details;
 To define a final circuit enter the correct data and click OK. The dialog is closed and the view returns to the Circuit
Diagram.
 If a single‐phase load was selected, the circuit would be shown connected to the Red phase [2] that was initially
clicked on. If a three phase load was selected, the circuit would be shown occupying all three phase of Way 4 [3].
 Using the commands on the floating menu [4], circuits can be edited, cut, copied pasted and deleted.
Having defined this load and investigated the Distribution Board dialog, click on ‘OK’ to close the dialog.

NOTE: loads defined in the Circuit Diagram are not shown on the drawing but are included in the network and all the network
calculations. If you need to show a load on the drawing you must draw the load and its connecting cable on the drawing.
The project system has now been drawn and defined. Save your work once again.
For more information see: Boards

Calculation.
A calculation can be performed on a design at any stage. If the circuit logic is incorrect or is non‐compliant with BS 7671:2008 (2011)
in some way, relevant messages will be displayed.
Calculation proceeds in two stages. First, a logic check is carried out to ensure that all cables are correctly connected. If an error is
found the calculation terminates and the problem cable or busbar flashes. Second, on successful completion of the logic check,
calculations are carried out to ensure that all circuits comply with the relevant sections of BS 7671. Non‐compliant issues will result
in messages displayed in the Errors/Warnings dialog.
You should now calculate your network by clicking on the ‘Calculate’ button on the Design Toolbar.
If the calculation process has found any problems the Errors/Warnings dialog will be displayed, listing the details.
You can now browse the reports by selecting any of the items from the Reports menu.
A separate check can be made on Discrimination by clicking the Discrimination Check button . Any discrimination problems will
be highlighted by messages in the Errors/Warnings dialog. The Energy‐based and Time‐Current discrimination reports can then be
previewed.
For more information see: Calculations

Menus and Toolbars
The position and appearance of each toolbar can be tailored to your requirements using the ‘Customize Toolbar’ feature. This is
accessed by right‐clicking on the toolbar that you wish to change.

Each toolbar can be displayed using either small or large fonts. Button labels can also be displayed, either below or to the right of the
button.
The position of each toolbar can be altered by clicking on the left‐hand edge of the toolbar and then dragging it to the required
position.

Amtech Group Menus and Toolbars  33

File Menu
The File Menu includes commands to: open, save and e‐mail project files, print project drawings, e‐mail projects, export project
details and close ProDesign. (Keyboard shortcuts, where available, are shown in square brackets after the relevant command
description).
New
Displays the Select Template Project dialog [Ctrl+N]. A previously saved project can be selected and opened as a template or, clicking
cancel opens a new blank project. See also: Managing Projects | Templates.
Open
Displays the File/Open dialog [Ctrl+O]. Allows an existing project to be opened.
Convert 16th Edition Project
Used to open and convert ProDesign files created in versions previous to the 17th Edition version (BS 7671:2008).
Close
Closes the project in the active window. See Window menu for details on how to manage multiple projects in multiple windows.
Save
Saves the project in the active window to disk [Ctrl+S].
Save As
Displays the File/Save As dialog. Saves the project in the active window with a new name and/or to a different location.
Save All
Saves all currently open projects to disk.
34  Menus and Toolbars Amtech Group

Save Schematic
Saves the single‐line diagram as a bitmap image file.
Print All
Displays the Print dialog to allow the entire project drawing to be printed. See also: The Project Drawing | Printing the Drawing.
Print Current View
Displays the Print dialog to allow the portion of the project drawing visible in the current view to be printed.
Print Preview
Displays a view of the project drawing as it will be printed with the current settings.
Import
Allows import of single‐line diagram from FastTest or elcoCAD.
Export
DXF ‐ Saves the current project drawing in .DXF file format.
FastTest ‐ Exports ProDesign project data to FastTest.
Autodesk Revit
Enable ProDesign/Revit link – Initialises the ProDesign interface functions in Autodesk Revit
Import from Revit – Import a design created in Autodesk Revit
Return design to Revit – saves calculated project parameters into a file which can be imported back into the originating Autodesk
Revit design.
Send To
Launches the default Email application and creates a new Email message with the file for the project in the active window attached.
Mail Recipient: The ‘To’ field is blank.
Mail Amtech Support: The ‘To’ field contains the Amtech Support Email address. This allows a query to be Emailed to Amtech
Support together with the project file. The registration file AMTECH.INI is also Emailed. This facility should only be used after
contacting Amtech Support first. Note: the project data file can often be large. See also: Introduction | Contacting Amtech | Emails.
Attachments
Documentation files (e.g. images, pdf files) can be attached to components such as loads, boards and cables. The ’Pack’ option copies
selected attachments into a single zip file which can then be simply copied along with the project file. This makes it easier to transfer
projects and their attachments between computers.
The ‘Unpack’ option will allow a packed set of attachment files to be unpacked ready for use.
Recently Used Files
A list of the last four project filenames used. Clicking on a filename opens the project in the active window.
Exit
Closes all open projects and then closes ProDesign. Prompts will be displayed to save any unsaved projects before closing.

Draw Menu
The Draw menu contains items used to draw the project network and to annotate the drawing. The buttons on the toolbars are a
more convenient way to access these items.
See also: Drawing a Project.
Source, Supply Transformer … Power Factor Correction
Click on any of these items to select a tool to draw the network being designed.
Symbol
Displays the Symbol Library menu containing tools to annotate the completed network drawing.
Text, Line … Arrow
Click on any of these items to select an object to annotate the drawing.

Notes
Click on this item to place a yellow text note on the schematic.
Edit Menu
The Edit Menu includes editing commands for the project drawing. These editing commands are more conveniently executed using
the buttons on the toolbars or the keyboard shortcuts. (Keyboard shortcuts, where available, are shown in square brackets after the
relevant command description).
Cancel
Cancels the current action on the drawing, e.g., selecting or moving, returns to Edit mode [Esc].
Undo
Undo the last action [Ctrl+Z].
Redo
Redo the last undo.
Cut
Removes the currently selected drawing item(s) and saves them to the ProDesign clipboard [Ctrl+X]. NOTE: Items on the ProDesign
clipboard are not accessible from the Windows clipboard and vice‐versa.
Copy
Saves the selected drawing item(s) to the ProDesign clipboard [Ctrl+C].
Paste
Pastes the item(s) saved on the ProDesign clipboard into the drawing [Ctrl+V].

Delete
Deletes the selected drawing item(s) [Del].
Find
Displays the Find Item dialog. The Find function centres a selected network object on the drawing.
Data Entry
Displays a spreadsheet type dialog at the base of the drawing that allows rapid changes to the settings of single cables, loads/motors
or groups of cables loads/motors.
Set Cable Size
Displays a list of the selected cables and their size setting. The user can then modify individual cable size settings without entering
the cable dialogs.
Motor Starting Volt Drop
Launches a dialog which allows you to select which motors on your project will be assessed for voltage drop on starting.
Project Revision
Displays the Project Details dialog containing text that can be used to identify and trace printed reports relating to the project.
Properties
Displays the associated dialog for a network object selected on the drawing.
View Menu
The commands in the View menu control the appearance of the drawing area on the screen. (Keyboard shortcuts, where available,
are shown in square brackets after the relevant command description).
Zoom
Zoom level for the drawing view can be selected using the various settings.
Use Colour
When de‐selected all components will appear in a single colour (usually black).
Grid
Display or hide the drawing grid. When the grid is selected, the dots or lines that mark the intersections of the grid are displayed. See
also Preferences | Snap To Grid.
Show Logo
Display or hide logo on drawing. See also Drawing a Project | Logo Editor.
Show Unconnected Ends
Display or hide red crosses that appear to indicate that a network drawing object is unconnected.

Show Errors/Warnings
When selected calculation errors and warnings are flagged on the schematic as red and yellow triangles.
Refresh
Activates the screen Redraw [F5].
Preferences Menu
The preferences menu contains the following sub‐menus. These sub‐menus contain the settings that control the layout, appearance,
configuration and calculation of the project and the associated drawing.
Drawing Sub Menu
Drawing Size
Allows the size of the on‐screen drawing to be selected from a list of standard paper sizes or a user‐defined height (mm) and width
(mm). The scale of the printed drawing will be dependent on this setting and the size of paper the drawing is printed on; e.g.,
drawing size = A3, printer paper = A4, scale of printed drawing = 1:2. See also: Printing | Project Drawing.
Default Symbol Representation
Displays the Default Symbol dialog allowing the desired appearance of Loads and Motors on the drawing to be selected.
Colour Configuration
Displays the Colour Configuration dialog allowing the colours for drawing objects to be set, also to set phase markings. See also
Drawing a Project | Phase Markings

Font
Displays the Font dialog, allowing selection of the default font style for text on the drawing.
Source Feeds From Top
Sets the Source location at the top of the drawing. Sources must be placed within the top third of the drawing area.
Source Feeds From Bottom
Sets the Source location at the bottom of the drawing. Sources must be placed within the lower third of the drawing area.
Snap to Grid
Allows Snap To Grid to be switched on or off. With Snap To Grid on, all drawing items can only be located to align with the grid.
When switched off, items can be located at any position.
Note: Snap To Grid is always applied to network components such as Sources, Cables, Busbars, etc., regardless of the setting.
Grid Spacing
Displays the Grid Spacing dialog. Allows the grid spacing to be set at ` or 10 mm, or a user‐defined spacing – preferably at the
beginning of a project. The scrolling sensitivity can also be set.
When selected cables and busbars can be drawn in horizontal and vertical directions only.
In Persistent Connection mode cable and busbar connections to components are maintained when components such as boards are
repositioned on the drawing.
Annotation
Displays the Annotation Display Settings dialog. Allows the user to select whether the id number or name is displayed on the
schematic and the orientation that the text will be displayed in. I.e., Source, Cable etc., Id number to be switched off, i.e., not
displayed on drawing.
Component Numbering
Displays the component numbering dialog box. Here it is possible to set up the format of the Id number that the system
automatically gives the components when they are first drawn.
System Sub‐Menu
Automatic Save
Displays the Auto Save settings dialog used to set the automatic save interval and the location in which the Auto Save backup file is
to be stored.
Disable Undo/Redo
Disabling the Undo/Redo function will increase the speed of operation of ProDesign when large projects are being edited. However,
when disabled it is not possible to undo any changes made to the project.

Calculations Sub‐menu
Discrimination Settings
Displays the discrimination settings dialog.
Minimum Cable Sizes
Displays the Minimum Cable Sizes dialog. Allows the minimum cable sizes to be set for use in the current project. See also: Setting
Defaults | Minimum Cable Sizes.
Maximum CPC Sizes
Displays the Maximum Separate CPC Sizes dialog. Provides settings to limit the number of sizes a separate CPC with size set to Auto
will be increased to meet disconnection requirements.
Diversity Settings
Displays the Diversity Settings dialog. Allows settings to be made for diversity at final circuits, consumer units and distribution
boards. See Setting Defaults | Diversity.
Voltage Drop
Displays the Voltage Drop Settings dialog.
Defined Load Threshold
Displays a dialog where the load threshold, as a percentage of the Defined Load setting in the Diversity tab, can be set separately for:
Switchboards, Distribution Boards and Consumer Units. Where a threshold is exceeded, a Note is displayed in the Errors/Warnings
dialog.
Switching Scenarios
The user can save the state of all the switches in the project, or apply a project state that has been saved earlier.
Show Calculation Notes
This settings controls whether any Calculation ‘Notes’ will be reported at the end of the calculation (e.g. notification of cables
upsized due to voltage drop).
Show Network Statistics
When this option is ticked ProDesign will display a count of the components in the project with a valid connection to the network
connected to the Active source, at the start of the calculation process.
Prompt to Calculate
To ensure that reports always reflect the current state of a project, each time a change is made recalculation by ProDesign is
essential before any reports can be produced. Normally, when a report is requested following a change, a prompt message is

displayed. If Prompt to Calculate is unchecked the calculation will commence automatically without the prompt message being
displayed.
Component Template
Displays the Component Template dialog. Allows settings templates to be defined by the user for any network components.
Voltage Drop
Displays the Voltage Drop Settings menu. Allows the global voltage drop limits for the project to be set.
Reports Sub‐menu
Print Full Pathname on Report
Select to include the full pathname of the project file in the footer of reports (e.g., C:\Building Designs\Superstores\Project 1.pds.
When not selected, the file name only will appear (e.g., Project 1.pds)
Economy Printing
When selected all reports will be printed using minimum ink/toner. The reports will simply use blank text on a white background. No
shaded areas will appear on the reports other than those on your company logo.
Graphical Tooltip Sub‐menu

Preferences
Displays the Tooltip Preferences dialog containing settings to customise the parameters displayed in the Graphical Tooltip that is
displayed when the mouse is hovered over a network component.
Hide
Allows Graphical Tooltips to be displayed or hidden.
Protective Devices Sub‐menu

Preferred Manufacturers
Displays the Preferred Manufacturers dialog where some or all of the protective device manufacturers can be selected for inclusion
in the Protective Device Selector.
Overload Adjustment
Displays the Overload Adjustment dialog where the default overload setting method can be selected to be Auto or Maximum.
Lock Project
Displays the Lock Project dialog to allow the project to be locked against inadvertent or unauthorised changes. See also: Managing
Projects | Locking Projects.
Use Start‐up Screen
Sets whether the ProDesign Start‐up Options screen will appear when ProDesign is launched.
Open Data Entry on Start‐Up
When selected the Data Entry panel is displayed in the lower part of the window when ProDesign is launched.

Print Note Icons
Sets whether the icons on the drawing indicating the location of Notes are to be visible on the drawing printout.

Calculation Menu
The Calculation menu contains features that assist with the completion of a network design. See also: Calculations.
Check Network Logic
Runs a check that examines network interconnections and identifies incorrect or incomplete structures. See also: Calculation | Logic
Check.
View Impedance Matrices
Available in ProDesign versions 100 and above. Opens the Zbus viewer dialog which displays the individual component impedances
and the fault calculation impedances matrices. The matrices and impedances can be exported to Microsoft Excel.
Calculate
Performs the Network Logic check and then performs all calculations on the entire network. See also: Calculation | Project
Calculation.
Fix Design / Unfix Design
Fix Design calculates the project and sets all ‘Auto’ sized conductors and protective devices to their calculated values.
Unfix Design restores the ‘Auto’ setting for all components previously set to ‘Auto’. See also: Managing Projects | Fix Design.
Check Discrimination
Discrimination Check starts the ProDesign discrimination check feature. The dialog containing the settings for the discrimination
check can be displayed by clicking the Preferences | Calculations | Discrimination Settings menu item.
Earth Fault Protection Propagation
When selected the presence of upstream earth fault protection will affect the calculation of downstream circuits.
Protection Study
Starts Amtech Protect to enable a time/current discrimination study to be made. A cable, busbar, motor or load must be selected
before clicking the button. Protect will display the protective device characteristic curves for all circuits along the route back to the
Source from the highlighted component. See also: Calculation | Discrimination.

View Graph
View Graph displays the tripping characteristic of the currently selected circuit. In addition to the currently selected device, the
characteristics for the following will also be displayed: the next device upstream (towards the supply source) and the next device
downstream with the highest effective rating (nominal rating multiplied by any overload settings).
Also, when a load is selected, the tripping characteristics for all the circuits on a route back to the active source are displayed when
Adjust Settings is selected.
Quick Results
Displays Quick Results for the cables and busbars connected to the currently selected network components.

Reports Menu
The Reports Menu lists all the printed reports that can be viewed or printed. Clicking an item displays a dialog where a selection can
be made of the relevant items for which reports are to be produced.
See also: Reports.

Window Menu
The Window menu contains commands used to control the size, position and number of windows to be displayed on the screen.
Cascade
Overlaps the currently open windows with their title bars visible.
Tile Horizontally
Displays all currently open windows one above the other, without overlaps.
Tile Vertically
Displays all currently open windows one beside the other, without overlaps.
Close
Closes the current window.
Close All
Closes all open windows.
Support Menu
The Support menu contains commands for program activation and updates, and access to support facilities.
Activate Program
Launches the Program Activation box.
See also: Getting Started | Program Installation | Activation.
Check for Updates
Launches the Amtech Auto Update feature.
Amtech Website
Provides a shortcut to the Amtech website homepage.
Amtech Technical Support
Provides a shortcut to the Amtech Premier Care support page.

Amtech Assistance

Contact Amtech
Displays a box listing Amtech contact details.
See also: Getting Started | Contacting Amtech.
Help Menu
The Help menu provides access to features designed to assist the user in providing information about ProDesign. See also:
Introduction | Contacting Amtech | Getting Help.
Help Topics
Displays the Help window showing the topics covered listed in the Contents tab.
Frequently Asked Questions
Provides a link to the FAQs page on the Amtech website. See also: See also: Introduction | Contacting Amtech | FAQs.
View Manual
Displays The ProDesign manual. Requires Adobe Acrobat to be installed (can be installed from same Amtech CD used to install
ProDesign.
Model Calculations
Displays a document describing in detail the calculation procedures used in the Model Calculation Project stored in the Projects
folder.
What’s This?
Provides a pointer for Context Help. Use the pointer to click on a Menu or Toolbar item to display a Help text box.
About ProDesign
Displays the System Information dialog. Shows details of the program version number, licence number, system information etc.
Standard Toolbar
The Standard toolbar contains, from left to right, the following buttons:
New
Opens a new blank project in a new window.
Open
Displays the File/Open dialog [Ctrl+O]. Allows an existing project to be opened.

Save
Saves the project in the active window to disk [Ctrl+S].
Save As
Saves the project in the active window with a new filename or in a new location.
Print Preview
Displays a view of the project drawing as it will be printed with the current settings.
Print
Displays the Print dialog to allow the project drawing to be printed. See also: Printing | Project Drawing.
Cut
Removes the currently selected drawing item(s) and saves them to the ProDesign clipboard [Ctrl+X].
NOTE: Items on the ProDesign clipboard are not accessible from the Windows clipboard and vice‐versa.
Copy
Saves the selected drawing item(s) to the ProDesign clipboard [Ctrl+C].
Paste
Pastes the item(s) saved on the ProDesign clipboard into the drawing [Ctrl+V].
Delete
Deletes the selected drawing item(s) [Del].
Undo
Undo the last action [Ctrl+Z].
Redo
Redo the last undo.
About
Displays the system information About box containing information on ProDesign, such as version number, licence number etc.;
Manual
Displays the ProDesign manual in Acrobat PDF format. (Requires Adobe Acrobat Reader to be installed).
Context Help
Provides a pointer for Context Help. Use the pointer to click on a Menu or Toolbar item to display a Help text box.
Amtech Website
Link to Amtech website.
Construct Toolbar

Drawing Tool Selection
The Construct toolbar contains buttons for selecting drawing tools used to draw the components of the distribution system single‐
line diagram.

i.e., the software recognises them as part of the distribution network when calculating.
From left to right, the buttons are for the following drawing tools:
Source, Transformer, Generator, UPS, Switchboard, Distribution Board, Consumer Unit, Cable, Busbar, Busbar End Feed, Busbar
Centre Feed, Busbar Tap‐off, Street Lighting Column, Load, Motor Load, Starter, Junction Box and Power Factor Correction.
Component Template Selection
Clicking the arrow on the right side of a button displays a list of templates currently defined for the component type represented by
the button. Click on a template to select it from the list. The currently selected template is shown in the UserFile toolbar. The
example below shows the selection of a template named ‘Final Circuits’ for the Cable component. Once the selection has been made
the Final Circuit template will be applied to all cables added to the drawing until a different template is selected.

View Toolbar
The View toolbar contains buttons for functions that control the appearance of the drawing area on the screen. They are, from left
to right:
Zoom In
Increases the scale of the drawing view by one step. Note: this can also be performed by holding down the ‘Ctrl’ button while moving
the mouse wheel forward.
Zoom Out
Decreases the scale of the drawing view by one step. Note: this can also be performed by holding down the ‘Ctrl’ button while
moving the mouse wheel backward.
Zoom Normal
Zooms the view into a nominal 1:1 view.
Zoom Previous
Reverts to the previous zoom setting.
Zoom Window
Zooms to fill the screen with a defined area of the drawing window. Click, then drag, then click again to draw a rectangle defining the
area.
Zoom Extents
Zooms to fit the whole project drawing area to the screen.
Edit
Click this button to put the drawing pointer in Edit Mode. In edit mode, the pointer has the standard arrow appearance and can be
used to select items (single‐click) or access dialogs (double‐click). Also a group of drawing objects can be selected; click, then drag,
then click again to draw a rectangle in which all components partially or entirely contained are selected.

Show Grid
Display or hide the drawing grid. When the grid is selected, the dots/lines that mark the intersections of the grid are displayed. See
also Preferences | Snap To Grid.
When selected, cables and busbars can be drawn in horizontal and vertical orientations with right‐angle bends only.
Show Logo
Display or hide logo on drawing. See also Drawing a Project | Logo Editor.

Annotate Toolbar
The Annotate toolbar contains buttons for annotation tools that can be used to enhance a completed network drawing. (See also
Drawing a Project | Annotation). They are, from left to right:
Text
Provides tool to place text on drawing. Click tool on location for text and type and edit text in Text dialog.
Font
Displays the Font dialog, allowing modification of the current drawing font.
Dashed Line
Selects the Dashed Line drawing tool.
Solid Line
Selects the Solid Line drawing tool.
Circle
Selects the Circle drawing tool.
Arrow
Selects the Arrow drawing tool.
Dashed Rectangle
Selects the Dashed Rectangle drawing tool.
Solid Rectangle
Selects the Solid Rectangle drawing tool.
Symbol
Displays the Symbol Library menu containing a range of symbols that can be used to annotate the completed network drawing.
Note
Adds a yellow text note to your schematic. A Note icon is placed on your drawing – double clicking on the Note icon displays its
contents.
Text Box
Creates a multi‐line text box on your schematic. Use this to add detailed annotation comments and other multi‐line text entries.
Double click on a Text Box border to select the textbox. You can insert a predefined project details field (such as Created By or Job
Number). Simply right‐click on a selected Text Box and choose Insert Field.

Calculate Toolbar
The Calculate toolbar contains buttons for functions that allow checks, calculations and settings for the project to be made. (See also
Calculation, and Setting Defaults). They are, from left to right:
Calculate Button
Performs the Network Logic check and then performs all calculations on the entire network. See also: Calculation | Project
Calculation.
Check Discrimination
Performs a discrimination check on the current project. The discrimination check can be configured in the Preferences | Calculations
menu.
View Graph
Displays the tripping characteristic of the currently selected circuit. In addition to the currently selected device, the characteristics
for the following will also be displayed: the next device upstream (towards the supply source) and the next device downstream with
the highest effective rating (nominal rating multiplied by any overload settings).
Also, when a load is selected, the tripping characteristics for all the circuits on a route back to the active source are displayed when
Adjust Settings is clicked.
Protection Study
Starts Amtech Protect to enable a time/current discrimination study to be made. A cable, busbar, motor or load must be selected
before clicking the button. Protect will display the protective device characteristic curves for all circuits along the route back to the
Source from the highlighted component. See also: Calculation | Discrimination.
Templates
Displays the Component Templates dialog. Allows templates to be defined by the user for any of the network components.
See also Setting Defaults | Global Defaults.
Custom Reports
Displays the Custom Reports wizard. The wizard provides facilities for viewing and printing table type reports; it can also be used to
create customised report templates.
See also: Reports | Reports Wizard.
Re‐run Last Report
Clicking this button will re‐calculate the project, if required, and re‐generate and preview the last previously selected report.
Settings Toolbar
The Settings toolbar provides access to the most commonly used project settings (see also Setting Defaults). They are, from left to
right:
Drawing Size
Displays the Drawing Size dialog to allow the size of drawing displayed in the project window to be set for the current project and for
future projects.
See also The Project Drawing | Drawing Size.
Displays the Colour Configuration dialog to allow colours to be set for the items that appear on the drawing.
See also The Project Drawing | Colour Configuration.

Source at TOP of Drawing
Sets the drawing orientation for placing the project source at the top of the drawing. It is important that the drawing orientation is
set BEFORE you start placing drawing components.
See also The Project Drawing | Drawing The Network.
Source at BOTTOM of Drawing
Sets the drawing orientation for placing the project source at the bottom of the drawing. It is important that the drawing orientation
is set BEFORE you start placing drawing components.
See also The Project Drawing | Drawing The Network.
Properties
Opens the dialog for the currently selected network component.
Data Entry
Displays a spreadsheet type dialog at the base of the drawing that allows rapid changes to the settings of single cables, loads or
motors or groups of cables, loads or motors.

User Type
Displays the selected template for the currently selected network component. The template shown will be used each time a
component of the current type is added to the drawing, until a different template is selected. To select a different template, click on
the arrowed button and select a new template from the displayed list.
To define a new template, go to the Calculate toolbar and click the Templates button to display the Component Templates dialog.

The Project Drawing
Starting your project
Start‐Up Dialog
The Start‐Up dialog provides an easy way to reopen an existing project, or create a new one. The operation of the Start‐up dialog is
described in the Tutorial section.
The start‐up dialog can be disabled by de‐selecting the ‘Show this Dialog at Start‐up’ option. There is also a option in the
‘Preferences’ menu which allows you to determine whether you wish to ‘Use the Start‐up Screen’.
A simplified version of the Start‐up dialog is also displayed when the choose the ‘New’ option in the ProDesign ‘File’ menu.
Templates
ProDesign is shipped with a number of drawing templates. These are blank project files which use a pre‐defined drawing frame and
paper size.
Templates can be easily accessed using the Start‐up Dialog’s ‘Use Template’ option.
Creating your own templates
Firstly, you should set‐up your ProDesign drawing environment as required. We then recommend that you ‘Lock’ this template
project using the ‘Lock Project’ option in the ProDesign ‘Preferences’ menu. This prevents your template from being overwritten.
Then save the template project into the ProDesign Templates folder.

The Drawing Window
Multiple Projects
ProDesign has a multiple document interface allowing a number of projects to be opened at the same time.
When more than one project is open, each will be contained in a separate window within the ProDesign window. One project will be
active at any one time; clicking in a project window makes that window active. The Window menu can be used to control the way
project windows are displayed and can also be used to switch the active project.
Amtech Group The Project Drawing  53

For example, shown below are two open projects, tiled horizontally:
The Drawing Window Features
Using the example of a single new project in the ProDesign window, the principle areas and features of the window are described
below:
The project window shows the top left hand corner of a sheet of paper upon which the single‐line diagram representing the network
to be designed will be drawn. The remaining area of the sheet can be viewed using the surrounding scroll bars.
The Drawing Area is divided into a grid indicated by dots showing the intersections of the grid lines. Placed around the drawing area
are the title bar, menu bar, toolbars, scrollbars and status bar.
Title Bar
The title bar contains the title of the active project.
Window Controls
The title bar contains the window controls for the ProDesign window . These allow the ProDesign window to be hidden,
maximised or minimised and closed.
The set of window controls below the ones for the ProDesign window are those for the project, which allow the project window to
be hidden, maximised or minimised within the ProDesign window, and closed.
Menu Bar
Below the title bar is the menu bar. For details of the menu commands, see Menus and Toolbars.
Shortcuts for many menu commands used for drawing the single‐line diagram are provided by the buttons in the toolbars.
54  The Project Drawing Amtech Group

Toolbars
The Toolbars are displayed at the top of the drawing area below the Menu Bar when ProDesign is first opened. They can be dragged
into the drawing area and used as floating toolbars. Also, they can be dragged to the sides or the bottom of the drawing area where
they can be docked. To drag a Toolbar from its starting location at the top of the drawing, click and drag on the bar symbol at the left
of the Toolbar .
See also: Menus and Toolbars.
There are seven toolbars, four of which are particularly useful when drawing a project; these are:
Construct
Contains the tools required to draw the actual network components such as Source, Cable etc.
i.e., the software recognises them as part of the distribution network when calculating. Double‐clicking on any of these components
gives access to a dialog box where the user can input information relating to that element.

View
Useful for changing the view and appearance of the drawing:

Standard
Use the cut, copy, paste and delete functions to make modifications to the drawing layout and connections.

Annotate
Contains tools for objects such as text, lines etc., that can be used to enhance a completed project drawing:

Toolbar Tooltips
When the mouse pointer is hovered over any of the buttons on the toolbars a small box (Tool Tip), containing a brief description of
the button function, is displayed.

Zoom
The scale used to display the drawing is controlled by the Zoom functions.

Zoom In
Increases the scale of the drawing view by one step. Note: this can also be performed by pressing ‘Ctrl’ and moving your mouse
wheel.
Zoom Out
Decreases the scale of the drawing view by one step. Note: this can also be performed by pressing ‘Ctrl’ and moving your mouse
wheel.
Zoom Normal
Zooms the view into a nominal 1:1 view.
Zoom Previous
Reverts to the previous zoom setting.
Zoom Window
Zooms to fill the screen with the window that you draw.
Zoom Extents
Zooms to fit the whole project drawing area to the screen.
Pan
A pan control allows the drawing area view to be moved by simply holding down the left mouse button and moving the mouse.
Please note:
In order to accommodate the new pan feature the operation of the group select control has been altered. The multiple item
selection box is now drawn by left clicking while the mouse pointer is stationery. Once the mouse is moved to the desired position
another left click completes the selection box.

Drawing Size
The size of the drawing area available on the screen is set in Drawing Size dialog (Menu: Preferences | Drawing Size). The default size
is A3. Standard drawing sizes from A4 to A0 can be selected. Additionally, custom sizes can be selecting User Defined in the Size box
and entering the desired width and height dimensions in mm (or inches).

Project Drawing Defaults
Before starting work on a new project, it is a good idea to set the following as required. Listed in the table are the menu location and
default condition for each of the settings.


Drawing The Network
The single‐line drawing should be constructed radially starting from the Source (Source, Transformer or Generator) or Sources,
through the Main Switchboard (optional) then through Distribution Boards and Consumer Units as required and finally to loads as
required [A].
If you have selected Source At Top Of Drawing, you connections to all the components must follow the following rules. Supply
connections must be made to the top of the component. The load connection must be made to the bottom of the component.
Conversely, if you have selected Source At Bottom Of Drawing, supply connections must be made to the bottom of the components
while the load connection must be made to the top.
Sources, Main Switchboard, Distribution Boards, Consumer Units, Loads etc. must be interconnected with cables or busbars. The
exception to this is that a single source can be connected directly to the Main Switchboard without any intervening cable or busbar
[B].
A B
 

Any component not connected to an active source of supply will be displayed as the “Not Active” colour the default for which is grey.
Also to assist in the drawing of a connected network when View | Show Unconnected Ends is selected, components not successfully
connected will be displayed with a cross at the point of the connection failure; a red cross indicating an unconnected end at the
source end of the object, a blue cross at the load end.
NOTE: before a system can be calculated it must have a validly connected Source. A partial system, e.g. a Distribution Board or Load
in isolation will be highlighted as problem when a calculation is attempted.

Connections
Cables
When drawing cables, take care to observe the following:
 Work away from the source; Source to Main Board, Main Board to Distribution Board etc. [A].
 Do not draw cables into the centre of Distribution Boards, Loads etc [B, C].
 The vertical sides of Boards and Loads should not be used to make connections [D].
 Ensure that both ends of an interconnecting cable actually touch the relevant symbols at the start and end of the
cable [E].
A B C
  
D E


Busbars
When connecting busbars, cable connections to Tap Offs can be made to any unused side [A]. Similarly, busbar connections to End
Feed, Centre Feed and Tap Offs can be made to any unused side [B]. Busbars can also be used to connect sources to Switchboards
[C] or directly from the switchboard to the distribution board [D]. A distribution board can also be directly connected to a Tap Off
[E]. A busbar cannot be used to feed from a distribution board to a distribution board [F].
A B C
   D 
 F
E 

Interconnections are simplified by the fact that all single‐line drawing components snap to the grid, regardless of whether or not
Snap To Grid is selected.
Drawing Sources of Supply
To place a source on the drawing, click on the Source, Transformer, Generator or UPS button on the Design toolbar
,

then click at the point on the drawing where you wish the source to be located. When you have finished placing sources either select
another object from the toolbars or simply right click the mouse to return to the edit mode.
The source or sources of supply for a project can be defined as follows:
 A single source using Transformer, Generator or Source (used to represent a set of source conditions at existing terminals)
as appropriate.
 Multiple sources (up to a total of five), connected to a Switchboard. Only one source can be active at any one time. The text
reference for the active source is shown in bold on the drawing.

Sources can also be directly connected to a Switchboard or a Distribution Board without an intervening cable:
To define a supply from a number of identical parallel sources, draw a single source connected to a Switchboard and, in the Source
dialog, define the number of parallel sources (for more details, see: Distribution System Settings | Sources of Supply | Source of
Supply Settings | Voltage Tab | Identical Parallel Supplies). The parallel source arrangement is denoted by two parallel lines above
the source symbol (indicated by a red arrow in the diagram below):
When used as a source, the bypass connections are not used. The UPS can be connected directly to a board or through a cable as
shown below. The UPS component can also be used as part of the distribution system.


Drawing Switchboards
To place a Switchboard on the drawing, click on the Switchboard button [A] on the Construct toolbar, then click at the point on the
drawing where you wish the Switchboard to be located. On completion, either select another object from the toolbars or simply
right click the mouse to return to the edit mode.
The Switchboard is initially defined with a single section. The Switchboard can be supplied by one source, either with [B] or without
[C] an interconnecting cable. The Switchboard can also be supplied by multiple sources [D], up to a maximum of five Sources. It can
also be configured to have up to four sections connected by interconnecting switches [E] (Double‐click on the Switchboard symbol,
click on the Sections tab and select the number of sections required). The interconnector can be defined as open or closed (Double‐
click on the switch symbol on the drawing to change its state from Closed to Open and vice‐versa). The interconnector can be re‐
positioned on the Switchboard by dragging it.

Each connection to or from a switchboard is shown as a switch. The switch represents the protective device in the board. By opening
and closing the various switches sections of the network can be include or excluded from the calculations.

Drawing Cables
To draw a cable between two network components:
 Click on the Cable button on the Construct Toolbar.
 Place the intersection of the mouse pointer cross on the load end of the first component symbol and click the left
mouse button.
 Move the mouse pointer to the Source end of the second component and click the left mouse button again.

Drawing bends. To draw a bend, click to start the cable, move the mouse pointer to the location of the bend and left click the mouse.
Move to the position of the next bend or the end of the cable and left click again.
To draw a cable from a network component to a blank area on the drawing, follow the procedure above and then use a right mouse
click to finish.
Cables can be drawn repeatedly without the need to re‐select Cables from the Construct Toolbar. When you have finished drawing
cables either select another object from the Toolbars or simply right click the mouse to return to the edit mode.
Cables can be drawn in two styles:
 Orthogonal [B] (vertical or horizontal runs only) – click on the Orthogonal Cable button [A] in the Tool Box to select
Orthogonal.
 Non‐orthogonal [C] (runs can be drawn at any angle) – click on the Orthogonal Cable button [A] in the View Toolbar
to de‐select Orthogonal.
Drawing Busbars
To draw a horizontal end‐fed busbar system fed from the bottom:
 Click the End Feed button on the Construct toolbar , click on the drawing to place the End Feed.

 Click the Tap‐off button on the Construct toolbar ; click on the drawing to place a Tap Off and repeat for the
number of Tap Offs required.
 To draw the busbar, click the Busbar button on the Construct toolbar ;
 click the intersection of the mouse pointer on the right side of the End Feed, move the pointer to the left side of the
first Tap‐off and click again; repeat between the Tap Offs. The busbar should now be complete.

A busbar system in ProDesign normally comprises:
 A single End Feed or Centre Feed to which a supply cable is connected.
 A Tap Off at each point where a load is connected to the busbar system. A cable is used to connect the load to the
Tap Off.
 Separate lengths of busbar interconnecting the End Feed/Centre Feed and Tap Offs.
 In addition to the standard busbar configuration described above, the following busbar interconnections are also
permitted:
 A Source of Supply can be connected to a Switchboard using a Busbar without the use of Cable, End Feed or Tap‐off:
 When using this configuration, no low voltage protective device is included for the Busbar. A message in the Busbar
report highlights this fact. It is essential that a separate check is carried out to ensure that the protection at the
transformer primary adequately protects the Busbar.
 A Distribution Board can also be connected to a Switchboard using a Busbar without the use of Cable, End Feed or
Tap‐off:
Drawing Distribution Boards
To place a Distribution Board on the drawing, click the Distribution Board button on the Construct toolbar ,
then click at the point on the drawing where you wish the Distribution Board to be located. When you have finished placing
Distribution Boards either select another object from the toolbars or simply right click the mouse to return to the edit mode.
The width of a Distribution Board can be adjusted as follows:
Click on the board, it will be highlighted to indicate that it is selected, and a handle will be visible on each side:
Drag on either handle to re‐size the board:

Release the mouse button and then click in an empty area of the drawing to finish:
Drawing Consumer Units
To place a Consumer Unit on the drawing, click the Consumer Unit button on the Construct toolbar ,
then click at the point on the drawing where you wish the Consumer Unit to be located. When you have finished placing Consumer
Units, either select another object from the toolbars or simply right‐click to return to the edit mode.
The width of Consumer Unit can be adjusted as follows:
 Click on the Consumer Unit, it will be highlighted (to indicate that is selected) and a handle will be visible on each
side:
 Drag on either handle to re‐size the Consumer Unit:
 Release the mouse button and then click in an empty area of the drawing to finish: .
When the Consumer Unit is set to be a split load type, it will be shown thus:
 The width of each section can be adjusted separately, the right‐hand handle controlling the width of the right‐hand
section and the left‐hand handle for the left‐hand section .
Drawing Loads
To place a non‐motor load on the drawing:
 click on the Load button
on the Construct toolbar, then click at the point on the drawing where you wish the load to be located. When you have finished
placing loads either select another object from the toolbars or simply right click the mouse to return to the edit mode.
Drawing Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS)
A UPS can be connected to the load side of a busbar tap‐off or board.
For example:


Drawing Motor Circuits
A motor circuit will normally be drawn to include a motor starter; the motor overload protection device will be located in the starter.
An exception to this being where the entire circuit, including the motor, is to be protected by a circuit‐breaker and no separate
motor overload device is to be provided.
Depending on the position of the motor starter, the circuit can be drawn in one of four ways. These arrangements are shown in the
diagram as four separate motor circuits connected to a single distribution board:
 Motor 1: Motor at Board. The starter is connected directly to the Board (which could be a Switchboard, DB or CU)
with a cable between the Starter and the Motor.
 Motor 2: Starter between Board and Motor. A cable is connected between the board and starter, with a further
length of cable from the starter to the motor. In the example shown the motor is selected as Start Delta started, as
indicated on the starter symbol. The appropriate symbol is automatically inserted when a Star Delta motor is
selected.
 Motor 3: Starter at Motor. A cable is connected between a board and Starter and the Motor is connected directly to
the starter.
 Motor 4: No Starter. This represents a motor circuit where there is no starter and, therefore, no motor starter. The
overload and short‐circuit protection for the entire circuit including the motor will be provided by the circuit
Overcurrent Protective Device.
To draw either a Motor or Starter, click on the appropriate button on the Construct toolbar:

then click at the point on the drawing where you wish the component to be located. When you have finished placing either motors
or starters, select another object from the toolbar or right click to return to the Edit mode.
Drawing Street Lighting
To place Lighting Columns on the drawing click on the Lighting Column button on the Construct toolbar, then click at the
point on the drawing where you wish the column to be located.
Lighting columns are constituent parts of a street lighting circuit. A lighting column represents the cabling in the column and the
luminaire at the top.
A street lighting circuit must be connected to a distribution board and is made up of lighting columns connected in series by
interconnecting cables [A]. Street lighting circuits cannot be connected in a ring; radial circuits only are allowed. Spurs can be
connected to the main street lighting circuit [B]. Cables drawn between lighting columns must be connected into the top or bottom
faces of the symbol; do not connect cables into the side faces of the symbol.
Drawing Power Factor Correction Units
To place Power Factor Corrections Units on the drawing click on the Power Factor Correction button on the Construct
toolbar, then click at the point on the drawing where you wish the column to be located.
Only one Power Factor Correction unit can be placed on a switchboard or distribution board. They must also be connected via either
a cable [A] or a busbar [B].

A B
 

Drawing Junction Boxes
To place Junction Boxes on the drawing click on the Junction Box button on the Construct toolbar, then click at the point on
the drawing where you wish the column to be located.
A junction box is used to connect two cables of either different size or type without the need for an intervening protection device. To
do this, with the drawing set to source at the top, the supplying cable for the junction box must be connected to the top while the
load side must be connected to the bottom of the junction box.

Annotation
Automatic annotation
By default all the network objects described above are automatically annotated with a text description as they are added to the
diagram.
The following items can be annotated automatically (the default Id. No. text reference for each object is shown in brackets):
 Sources (Source 1, Source 2, etc.; Transformer 1, etc.; Generator 1, etc.);
 Switchboard (Sb‐1);
 Distribution Boards (DB1, DB2, etc.);
 Consumer Units (CU1, CU2, etc.);
 Cable numbers are allocated according to the cable type
 Submain Cables (Cbl‐SM 1, Cbl‐SM 2, etc.);
 Final Circuit Cables (Cbl‐FC 1, Cbl‐FC 2 etc);
 Lighting Column Circuits ( LS1, LS2 etc);
 Busbars and Busbars Components (Bb1, Bb2, etc.; EF1, EF2, etc.; CF1, CF2, etc.; TO1, TO2, etc.);
 Loads (Load 1, Load2, etc.);
 Motor Loads (Motor 1, Motor 2, etc.);
 Lighting Columns (LC‐1, LC‐2 etc);
 Power Factor Correction (PFC 1, PFC 2 etc);
 Junction Boxes (JB 1, JB 2 etc);
Editing text references
Automatic annotation ensures that the text label on the drawing and the reference in the calculation reports for each object, are
always the same. For example, a cable labelled ‘Cable 16’ on the drawing, will also be referred to as ‘Cable 16’ in the reports.
Each individual text reference can be edited in one of three locations:
 Double‐click on the text and the Text dialog will be displayed.
The text will already be highlighted, so typing in a new reference will replace the original one. Click OK to finish. The new
text will now be displayed on the drawing and any references in reports are updated to match.
 Double‐click on the network object and its dialog will be displayed (e.g., Cable) and the reference can be edited.
Also, unchecking the Display box hides the reference on the drawing:

 In the Cable | Reference tab of the Data Entry Spread Control, the component parts of a cable reference (Prefix,
Body, Suffix) can be edited. The edits can be applied to a single cable or a block of cables. For more information,
see: Distribution System Settings | Conductors | Cable Data Entry: Spread Control.
Changing the Default Text References
The default text references can be changed using the Component Template feature. For example, if a new Template for Cables is
created and ‘Set as default’, the reference defined in that user setting will be used each time a new Cable is drawn with a sequence
number tagged onto the end. For more details, see Setting Defaults | Component Templates.
Hiding Text Annotation
The text for an individual network object can be hidden by double‐clicking on that object to display its dialog and unchecking the
Display box (see Editing Text References above).
The text annotation for all network objects of each kind can be hidden using the settings in the Annotation Display Settings dialog
(Menu: Preferences | Drawing | Annotation). It is also possible to show and hide the Name text reference by selecting the required
setting in the dialog. The orientation of the text can also be modified by the appropriate selection.
Moving and Aligning Text
The text annotation is attached to the object it is associated with so that as the object is moved, copied or pasted, the text remains
in the same position relative to that object.
The relative position of the text to its associated object can changed by dragging the text to a new position (To move to positions in
between grid positions, uncheck Preferences | Snap to Grid).
The text can be aligned vertically or horizontally by checking or unchecking the Vertical box in the Text dialog .
As an example, using these manipulations the annotation for a cable can be moved and re‐oriented as shown below:

Free‐form text annotation
Text can be placed at any location on the drawing. Click on the Annotate button or the TextBox button in the Annotate

toolbar, move the text insertion cursor to the required position on the drawing and click. The Text dialog will be displayed, type in
the required text, click on OK and the text will be placed on the drawing. Free‐form text can be moved, aligned and edited in the
same way as the auto‐annotation text described above.
Font Selection
The default text size and font for annotation is set in the Font dialog:
displayed by clicking on the Font button on the Annotate Toolbar .
Changes to the font style are effective for text added to the drawing only after the changes have been made. Annotation created
before any change in the font style is unaffected by that change.

Symbol Library
The Symbol Library contains electrical symbols that can be used to annotate the network drawing. The library is accessed by clicking
on the Symbol Library button on the Annotation toolbar and browsing through the menu system as shown below:

NOTE: unlike ‘intelligent’ symbols, such as Cables, Boards etc., these symbols should not be used to create any part of the
distribution network. They should be placed on top of, or alongside, an existing completed network.

Default Symbols
Select Preferences | Default Symbol representation from the menu to display the Default Symbols dialog.
The selected symbols will be used for objects drawn after the default selection has been made; symbols for objects drawn before the
change of settings will be unaffected. Therefore, if you wish to use the same symbol throughout the project, it is advisable to select
the desired symbol before starting the drawing.
Editing The Drawing
Selecting Drawing Objects
Any object on the drawing can be selected by just clicking on it. Selected objects are highlighted in green. Multiple selections can be
made in two ways; with keyboard commands or with the group selection tool.
 Using the keyboard: hold down the Shift key or the Ctrl key while clicking on the objects to be selected. To de‐select
a single object in a group of selected objects; with the Ctrl key or the Shift key pressed, click on the object.
 The multiple item selection box is drawn by left clicking while the mouse pointer is stationery. Once the mouse is
moved to the desired position another left click completes the selection box. All items within the selection box will
become selected.

TIP:
When using the group selection tool, if an item is inadvertently selected it can be de‐selected by holding down the Shift key while
clicking on the item.
Also, items can be added to the group by holding down the Shift key while clicking on the additional items.
Cut
To cut one or a number of drawing objects, select them as described above, then click the Cut button on the Standard
toolbar; the object will be removed from the drawing and saved to the ProDesign clipboard.
The Cut command can also be performed by using Ctrl+X on the keyboard, selecting Cut from the Edit menu or right clicking and
selecting Cut from the floating menu:

Copy Function
To copy one or a number of drawing objects, select them as described above, then click the Copy button on the Standard
toolbar; the object will be saved to the ProDesign clipboard.
If the object copied is a network component such as a cable, the drawing object and its associated data (cable type, installation
method, etc.,) will be copied.
The Copy command can also be performed by using Ctrl+C on the keyboard, selecting Copy from the Edit menu or right clicking and
selecting Copy from the floating menu.
Paste
The paste command places on the drawing a copy of the object or objects last copied to the ProDesign clipboard by a Cut or Paste
command.
To paste, click on the Paste button on the Standard toolbar.
The Paste command can also be performed by using Ctrl+V on the keyboard, selecting Paste from the Edit menu or right clicking and
selecting Paste from the floating menu.
The pasted object or objects are placed on the drawing, offset from the position of the original object, by one grid space across and
one down.
Delete
The Delete command removes the selected object or objects from the drawing.
To delete, click on the Delete button on the Standard toolbar.
The Delete command can also be performed by using the Delete key or by selecting Delete from the Edit menu.
Undo
Undo cancels previous actions, either on the drawing or within dialogs.
To Undo, click on the Undo button on the Standard toolbar. The Undo command can be performed by using Ctrl‐Z on the
keyboard or by selecting Undo from the Edit menu.
Redo
Redo cancels the last Undo command.

To Redo, click on the Redo button on the Standard toolbar. The Redo command can be performed by using Ctrl‐Y on the
keyboard or by selecting Redo from the Edit menu.
Moving Components
To move a single object, click the object (it is then highlighted and the pointer changes to an arrowed cross‐hair) and drag the object
(it is displayed as an outline) to move it to a new position. Move the pointer to an empty space on the drawing and click to confirm
the move:
A right mouse click will cancel the move.
To move more than one object, use one of the techniques described in Selecting Drawing Objects above to select the objects. Click
and drag one of the grouped objects to move all the objects together to a new position on the drawing. Move the pointer to an
empty space on the drawing and click to confirm the move. A right mouse click will cancel the move.

When moving network components such as boards, their cable and busbar connections can remain attached or not depending on
whether Persistent Connection (on the Preferences | Drawing menu) is selected.
When moving a component (e.g., a board), when Persistent Connection is selected, any cables connected to the item are stretched
as needed to maintain the connection.

Once an item has been moved to new position, it will possible to adjust the cable bends. Click on the cable, a number of handles
appear. Click and drag a handle to re‐adjust the position of a bend – click an empty space on the drawing to complete the change.

A right mouse click will cancel the move.
To move more than one object, use one of the techniques described in Selecting Drawing Objects above to select the objects. Click
and drag one of the grouped objects to move all the objects together to a new position on the drawing. Move the pointer to an
empty space on the drawing and click to confirm the move. A right mouse click will cancel the move.
Logo
The image file (Logo.bmp) for the logo displayed on the drawing and in the report headers is stored in the ProDesign | Reports
folder.
The displayed image can be modified either in the Logo Editor or by replacing the supplied image file with another of the same
name.
Moving the Logo
When opening a new project the logo is displayed at the top or bottom left according to whether ‘Preferences | Drawing | Source
Feeds from Top’ or ‘Preferences | Drawing | Source Feeds from Bottom’ is selected.
To move the logo to a new location, click within the perimeter of the logo and drag the outline to the required location, click on an
empty part of the drawing to complete the move:

Re‐sizing the Logo
To re‐size the logo, click on it to select it, drag the handles to re‐size, click on an empty part of the drawing to complete the move.
Hiding the Logo
The logo on the drawing can be hidden by changing the Show Logo setting in the view Menu.
Logo Editor
The Logo Editor is available from the Reports | Logo Editor menu. It can be used to edit the image used to display the Company Logo
that appears on the drawing and on reports.
Logo Editor uses the standard Paint program supplied with Windows. Select Reports | Logo Editor and click the Edit Logo button:
to launch Paint with the default logo image displayed.

The drawing/editing features in Paint can be used to create a suitable image. When the file Logo.bmp is saved (do not change the
filename or location), the new image will appear on the drawing and reports.
Replacing the Logo Image File
If a suitable company logo already exists as an image file, it can be used to replace the default image, providing the following
conditions are observed:
 The file used must be named Logo.bmp and must be located in the ProDesign | Reports folder. If the current logo
exists in a different format, e.g., JPEG, it must be converted to BMP format using an image editor.
 The image dimensions should be: 500 x 128 pixels. If the image dimensions are greater than these, the displayed
image will be distorted.
The colours used for the different parts of the drawing, including phase markings, are set in the Colour Configuration dialog
displayed by clicking Preferences | Drawing | Colour Configuration . The Colour Settings dialog shows the current colours and
markings.

Changing a Colour Setting
To change the set colour for a particular item, proceed as described below using the Background colour as an example:
A. Click the item in the Colour Settings list;
B. Click in the Colour sample box at the lower right‐hand corner of the dialog;
C. The Colour dialog will be displayed. Select a basic colour or create a custom colour and click OK;
D. The new colour will now be shown in the Colour sample box;
E. The new colour will be shown in the Colour Settings list alongside the selected item.

Changing Phase Markings
Phases are identified by text markings, e.g., R, Y, B or L1, L2, L3. These phase markings are used in Cable, Busbar Consumer Unit and
Distribution Board dialogs and reports to identify phases.
To change a phase marking setting, select a phase (or three phase) in the Colour Settings list; the Marking box will be displayed
showing the current descriptive text.

Type in a new description and click the Apply button.
Saving a Colour Configuration Template
Complete sets of colour and marking settings can be saved as templates for re‐use. To define a template:
A. Type a template name into the Save into box below the Colour Settings list;
B. Click the Save into button, the settings are saved and the name of the template is added to the User Preferences list;
C. To apply the template settings as the default settings, click the Set As Default button and the template name will be shown in the
Default Configuration File box. A template can be deleted by clicking on the name of the template in the User Preferences list and
clicking the Delete button.


Find Function
The Find function can be used to find any network object (e.g., cables, boards etc.) on the project drawing. On completion of a
search the selected item is set flashing and the drawing is scrolled to place the item in the centre of the view.

To find an object, click Edit | Find to display the Find Item dialog:
Scroll through the items listed, click on the name of the item being searched for, click the Find button.
When the Find operation has been completed, click the Cancel button to close the Find Item dialog.
The items listed can be defined by choosing one of the entries in the Item Type list box. For example, when Busbars is selected,
busbars only are listed:
Text Match
Items can be found from the list by typing text into the Text Match box: check Text Match and type a search string into the Text
Match box, then click Find. The items that appear in the list will be those whose Id No. or Name text reference matches the search

string depending on the which tick boxes are selected. If Search Id No. is ticked then the search is performed in the Id No column, if
the Search Name is ticked then the search is performed in the Name column. With both ticked the search is performed in both the
columns. For example, typing in the search string ‘10’ will give a list of only those references containing ‘10’, including, for example:
‘Sub‐main 10’, ‘Cbl‐1053’, etc.
Zoom View
The scale selected in the Zoom View button sets the scale for the drawing view when the Find button is clicked.
Graphical Tooltip
When the mouse is hovered over any component of the network drawing (cable, load etc.) for more than one second the Graphical
Tooltip box is displayed. Moving the mouse pointer away hides it. The box shows some properties (Installation Method, etc.) for that
component. Also, when the project has been calculated a selection of calculation results are shown both in graphical and text form:
To change the parameters displayed, go to the menu item: Preferences | Graphical Tooltip | Preferences.
Component Properties
The dialog containing the settings and properties for a network component can be displayed using one of two methods:
 Double‐click the component.
 Right‐click the component and select Properties from the menu:

Printing the Drawing
The scale of the printed drawing is automatically adjusted to ensure that the selected Drawing Size (Menu: Preferences | Drawing
Size) fits on the size of paper handled by the target printer.
For example, if the size of the drawing in the project window is A2 and the printer paper is sized A4, the drawing will be scaled 1:2 to
fit onto the A4 paper.
To print the drawing, click the Print button on the Standard Toolbar or select Print from the File menu , the Print dialog will
be displayed:

It is advisable to make a test with the drawing size and the printer you intend to use to ensure the result will be legible before
creating an extensive project drawing.

Project Settings
ProDesign provides a range of features for applying various types of settings across an entire project and also to use them again and
again for new projects.
These features are described in this section and include:
Project Templates
Allows existing projects to be re‐used for new designs;
Lock Project
Protects projects against inadvertent or unauthorized changes;
Fix Design
For finalised designs: converts all Auto project settings to calculated values;
Reopen Last Project
Can be selected in the Start‐up Screen that can be displayed each time ProDesign is started. Automatically loads the last project to
have been worked on.
Component Templates
Allows the creation of setting templates for cables, loads, etc., that can be used in the current project and in future projects;
Voltage Drop Settings
Controls to allow the setting of voltage drop limits for the project are located in the Voltage tab of the Source dialog, and the Voltage
Drop Settings dialog. The controls allow voltage drop limits to be set to comply with BS 7671:2008 (2011) Appendix 4, 6.4, or
alternatively set to user‐defined limits.
Overload Settings
Sets the default overload setting method to Auto or Maximum;
Setting that control the way discrimination checks are carried out.
Diversity Settings
Sets the diversity rules for the current project;
Minimum Cable Sizes
Sets the smallest sizes to be used when Auto sizing cables for the current project.
Maximum Separate CPC Sizes
Settings that control the maximum size of separate conductor that will be used by the Auto CPC sizing process.
Project Revision
Allows you to record any changes made to each ProDesign project.
Models the affect of upstream earth fault protective devices when calculating downstream circuits.
Project Templates
Previously created projects can be re‐used as templates for new projects. Click on New in the File menu. Click the Use a Template
button:
Amtech Group Project Settings  83

the Select Template Project dialog will be displayed:
Any existing ProDesign project can be selected and will be opened with a blank filename. The project can then be edited and saved
as a new project without changing the original project in any way.
Lock Project
This feature allows the user to protect a project against unauthorized or accidental changes. The project lock can be applied with or
without a password.
Select Lock Project in the Preferences menu.
The Lock Project dialog will be displayed:
Check the Lock Project box. If the project is to be locked without a password, click OK and the project status will be changed to
‘Read‐Only’, as indicated in the window title bar:
84  Project Settings Amtech Group

If password protection is required, in the Lock Project dialog, check the Lock Project box, type a password in the Password and
Confirm Password boxes:
and click OK to protect the project.
To unlock a locked project, click Unlock Project in the Preferences menu.
If the project is password protected, type the password in the Unlock Project dialog, click OK.
Fix Design
The Fix Design function is intended, for a finalised design, to convert all Auto settings to the actual calculated values. The ProDesign
project will then represent the ‘As fitted’ installation. The advantage of fixing the project is that any subsequent changes to the
design in ProDesign would not cause the re‐calculation of the unchanged parts which could occur if settings are left in Auto.
Fixing a project design
To fix a design:
 click Calculate | Fix Design.
 A message will be displayed:
 Click Yes and the project will be calculated and all items set to Auto will be set at their calculated sizes or ratings.
For example, where a project contains a cable set to Auto and then calculated to be 50 mm2, when the project design is fixed, the
setting in the dialog for that cable will be changed from Auto to 50 mm2.
Subsequently, if the project is modified so that the loading on that 50 mm2 cable is increased beyond its capacity, when the project is
calculated an error message will be posted for that cable, rather than its size being increased automatically.
Unfixing a project design
Fixed projects can be unfixed. Unfixing a project restores all the Auto settings that were in effect before the project was fixed.
To unfix a project:
 Click on Calculate | Unfix Design .
 A message will be displayed:

 Click Yes and all the original Auto settings that existed before the project was fixed will be restored.
Reopen Last Project at Start‐up
When Reopen Last Project is selected in the Start‐up Screen:
the project active when ProDesign was last closed will be re‐opened. To ensure this feature is available on start‐up, select menu
item: Preferences | Use Start‐up Screen.
Component Templates
Templates can be defined for network components (cables, loads, etc.). These templates can then be used as required to avoid
repeatedly making all the required settings for each component as it is added to a network.
Any number of templates can be created for each component. A template can then be applied, either as default, or on a one‐off
basis for individual components.
The following example explains the procedure of creating Cable template. The same method applies equally to all the other network
components. Component Templates can be applied to:
 Sources of Supply: Source, Transformer, Generator;
 Distribution Boards: Distribution Board, Sub‐Circuit (final circuit supplied from a Distribution Board);
 Main Switchboard;
 Consumer Units: Consumer Unit and final circuits supplied from a Consumer Unit;
 Lighting Columns;
 Circuits: Busbar, Cable;
 Loads: Load, Motor;
 Busbar Components: Tap‐off.
Defining the Component Template for a Cable
To define a cable template that can be used repeatedly when, for example, adding sub‐main cables to a project:
 Select Component Template from the Calculate toolbar
 or from the Preferences menu, Calculation sub list.
 The Component Template dialog will be displayed.

 Click on the Cable button in the Circuits area, the User Setting – Cable dialog will be displayed, type Sub‐mains in the
Template Name box and click Add/Edit:
 The Cable dialog will be displayed. Settings can now be made to make the cable type and configuration suitable for
use as a sub‐main cable. For example, if all sub‐mains for a project are to be cabled in armoured XLPE multi‐core
cable select the cable type as ‘Multi Core XLPE.SWA.PVC Table 4E4’.
 When all the required settings have been made, click OK. The Cable dialog will be closed and the name of the
template ‘Sub‐mains’ will be added to the User Files list in the User Setting – Cable dialog.
Applying Component Templates
Once a Component Template has been defined, it can be applied, as follows (using the cable example from above):
 Double‐click on the cable in the network to which the settings need to be applied.
 In the Cable dialog, click the User Type button to display the Component Template – Cable dialog;
 Click on the name of the settings required in the Templates list .
 Click on the Load Template button .
 The previously saved settings will now be applied to the cable.
Setting Component Templates as a Default
Once a Component Template has been defined, it can be used as the default setting, as follows (using the cable example from
above):
 To display the Template – Cable dialog:
o Either, click the Component Template button on the Calculate toolbar and then click the Cable button.

o Or, click the User Type button in the Cable dialog.
 Click on the name of the settings to be used as a default in the Templates list .
 Click on the Set as Default button . The settings will now be used as the default settings and will
be automatically applied to new cables as they are added to the current project and future projects.
Component Template Selection During Drawing Construction
Clicking the arrow on the right side of a button on the Construct toolbar displays a list of templates currently defined for the
component type represented by the button. Click on a template to select it from the list. The example below shows the selection of a
template named ‘Final Circuits’ for the Cable component. Once the selection has been made the Final Circuit template will be
applied to all cables added to the drawing until a different template is selected. The template currently selected is shown in the ‐
toolbar.

Source Dialog
To comply with the voltage drop limits defined in BS 7671:2008 (2011) Appendix 4, 6.4, it is necessary to define the type of supply
the network is connected to. This setting is made in the Voltage tab of the Source, Transformer or Generator dialog of the Active
source of supply.
Voltage Drop Settings Dialog
The dialog is reached from the menu Preferences | Calculations | Voltage Drop, or from the Voltage Drop Settings button in the
Voltage tab of the Source dialog.

The global voltage drop limits for the project are set in the Voltage Drop Settings dialog. The settings determine the maximum
voltage drop permitted between the supply and the terminals of each load.

Phase Conductors Sizing
The default setting ‘Auto‐size for current‐carrying capacity and voltage drop limits’ means that when a calculation is carried out,
cables with their Size set to Auto and busbars with their Rating set to Auto, will be first automatically sized for their current‐carrying
capacity and then, where necessary, increased in size to meet the voltage drop set limits.
Alternatively, setting ‘Auto‐size for current‐carrying capacity only’ means that conductors will not be re‐sized to deal with circuits
where the voltage drop exceeds the set limit.
Voltage Drop Limits
The default setting applies the limits defined in BS 7671:2008 (2011) Appendix 4, 6.4. The values of the limits for lighting and
non‐lighting loads will depend on the Supply Type defined in the Voltage tab of the Source dialog. The voltage drop allowance for
wiring systems over 100 m in length described in Appendix 4, 6.4 can be included or not as required.
Alternatively, the voltage drop limit to all final circuits can be set to a specified value. The value can be expressed as a voltage drop
limit in percentage or absolute terms, or as a minimum voltage at the load terminals.

Overload Settings
For an adjustable protective device, it is possible to use one of three methods to set the overload:
 Set at Maximum: the selected overload setting is the maximum setting available.
 Set to Auto: when the project is calculated, the overload is adjusted to the lowest setting equal to or greater than
the design current.
 Fixed: a setting is selected by the user.
When a project is first created, the overload setting method will be Maximum, i.e., each new adjustable protective device added to
the project will have its overload initially set to maximum. Individual devices can have their setting method changed to Auto or Fixed
as required.
If the overload setting method is changed to Auto when the project is first created, the overloads of all protective devices
subsequently created will initially be set to Auto.
If the overload setting method is changed during or after the construction of a project, the new setting will be applied to all existing
devices and any devices added subsequently.
To change the overload setting method, from the Preferences menu, select Protective Devices / Overload Adjustment…


To set the overload setting method to Set to Auto, select Set to Auto and click Apply in the Overload Adjustment dialog; a message
box will be displayed advising that all adjustable device overloads will be set to Auto. Click OK in the message box to return to the
Overload Adjustment dialog. Click Close.
A similar procedure can be used at any time to change the setting method to Set to Maximum.

For many distribution systems checking discrimination will be an essential part of the design process. The scope of discrimination
checks, and when and how they are carried out can be set in the Discrimination Settings dialog. The settings made apply to the
current project. Each time a new project is created new settings need to be made to suit that project. Further information on
discrimination checks may be found under Discrimination in the Calculations section.
Discrimination Settings Dialog
To display the Discrimination Settings dialog, select the menu item Preferences | Calculations | Discrimination Check:
The dialog has four sections, described below.

Discrimination Check Selection
The Discrimination Check Selection section contains the following settings:
 Two check boxes ‘Energy‐based check’ and ‘Time‐current check’ allow the selection of either or both of the
discrimination checks.
 When ‘Time‐current check’ is selected, either or both of the phase fault and earth fault discrimination checks can be
set.
Discrimination Check Startup
The Discrimination Check Startup section contains the setting that determines when discrimination checks are to be carried out.
Either of the two following conditions can be set:
 ‘Start on request from menu or toolbar button’: the discrimination check will be performed when the Discrimination
Check is selected from the Calculate toolbar or Calculate menu.
 ‘Start automatically at end of network calculation’: each time a network calculation is completed the discrimination
check will start automatically.
Discrimination Check Dialog
The Discrimination Check dialog lists checks carried out and failures detected. When the setting is ticked, the dialog will
automatically close at the end of the check process.
Time‐current Discrimination Settings
The Time‐current Discrimination Settings section contains the setting that determines how time‐current discrimination checks are to
be carried out.

A table contains radio button settings for the Minimum, Nominal or Maximum portions of the characteristics for both the Upstream
and Downstream protective devices. The image alongside the table depicts the characteristics with the selected portion of each
characteristic drawn with a solid line.
Below the table the Minimum Time Margin in milliseconds can be set. This defines the acceptable time clearance between
characteristics when discrimination checks are made. A zero setting means that characteristics with no overlap would be acceptable.
A setting of, say, 100 would mean that at no point should the compared characteristics be any closer than 100 ms; if the
characteristics are less than 100 ms apart, an error message is generated.

Diversity Settings
Diversity is applied on the basis of the anticipated loadings that are likely to result from all loads not being connected at the same
time.
Diversity can be set and calculated in ProDesign for load currents in a number of ways:
 Set manually at a distribution board or consumer unit, the setting being applied to all final circuits connected to that
board;
 User Defined at a distribution board or consumer unit; diversities automatically calculated and applied to each
individual load connected to the board according to settings made by the user in Preferences | Diversity Settings;
 Table H2 at a distribution board or consumer unit; diversities automatically calculated and applied to each
individual load connected to the board according to settings defined in IEE Guidance Note 1, Appendix H. These
settings can be viewed in Preferences | Diversity Settings;
 Set manually at individual load dialogs.
 Also, at any individual distribution board or consumer unit a fixed amount of load can be defined which is not
subject to any diversity calculation.
The ways these various settings can be used are described below.
Project preferences
Diversity settings for the project are made in the Diversity Settings dialog accessed from Preferences | Diversity Settings. The settings
are divided into two areas: Premises Type and Diversity Settings.

Premises Type
The first three premises types are those defined in IEE Guidance Note 1, Appendix H. The Guidance Note contains a table, Table H2,
that lists categories of load types with diversity settings for each of the load types which vary depending on the type of premises in
which they are being applied.
When one of these three premises is selected, the settings in Table H2 can be selected to be applied automatically at any of the
distribution boards (DBs) or consumer units (CUs) in the project; alternatively User Defined settings can be applied.
(Manual diversity settings can also be made. These are described in the Distribution Board Settings below.)
When the fourth type, ‘General premises’ is selected, Table H2 settings will not be available at DBs. The name of ‘General premises’
is editable; when selected a box appears in which a new name can be typed, which is the name used in reports:
Diversity Settings
The diversity settings shown are for the premises type currently selected.
The box labelled ‘Purpose:’ contains a list of load types that have the purposes described. When one of these items is selected its
diversity settings are shown below. The settings shown correspond to the radio button setting made, Table H2 or User Defined.
For each load type, there are three settings. These are applied automatically when the relevant diversity type is selected in a board
(Switchboard, Distribution Board, Consumer Unit). Where a number of loads of the same type are connected to a single board, the
first setting ‘Largest’ is applied to the load of that type with the highest load current; the ‘2nd Largest’ setting is applied to the load of
that type with the second highest load current and the ‘Remaining’ setting is applied to all other loads of that type connected to the
board.
The diversity settings for User Defined can be edited; the Table H2 settings are displayed for information only.
The complete list of settings for the premises type currently selected, and Table H2 or User Defined as selected, can be viewed by
clicking the View button. A copy can be printed if required.
Manual Diversity at a Board (Switchboard, Distribution Board, Consumer Unit)
The Manual setting is selected in the Diversity tab of the board dialog and the diversity setting is made in the box below – the setting
can be made within a range of 0 to 2 (therefore the setting can be used to allow for spare capacity, for example).
The setting is applied to the total design current of all the final circuits connected to the board. For example, if the total connected
final circuit load is 88 A and the diversity setting is 0.85, the diversified load current will be: 88 x 0.85 = 74.8 A.
NOTE: diversity is applied to final circuits only, not to sub‐main circuits supplying other boards.

User Defined Diversity at a Board (Switchboard, Distribution Board, Consumer Unit)
The User Defined setting is selected in the Diversity tab of the board dialog; the calculated diversity appears automatically in the box.
See Calculations | Diversity for details on how the board diversities are calculated.
The settings applied depend on the settings made in the Diversity Settings dialog accessed from Preferences | Diversity Settings.
Table H2 Diversity at a Board (Switchboard, Distribution Board, Consumer Unit)
The Table H2 setting is selected in the Diversity tab of the board dialog; the diversity calculated from settings defined in IEE Guidance
Note 1, Appendix H, Table H2 appear automatically in the box.
See Calculations | Diversity for details on how the board diversities are calculated.
Define Load at a Board (Switchboard, Distribution Board, Consumer Unit)
Select Define Load in the Diversity tab of the board dialog. This setting overrides the load calculation for any final circuits connected
to the board. The data typed into the dialog will be used to calculate the total final circuit load to that board, regardless of any loads
connected to that board – no diversity will be applied.
The Define Load setting should normally only be used at a time when load data for a board is not available. For example, to allow a
total loading for a board of 120 A / 0.85 PF with a 3rd harmonic content of 8 %, without defining any final circuits, make the settings
shown above.
When the details of the actual load circuits to be connected to the board subsequently become available, these should be added to
the board (by drawing them connected to the board on the single‐line diagram or defining them in the board circuit diagram) and
diversity changed to one of the other settings, such as Manual.
NOTE: if load circuits are added to a board and the diversity setting is left at Define Load, a situation could arise in which the
connected load exceeds the nominated load current. This could lead to the connected load exceeding the capacity of the board.
Where this occurs a Note will be shown in the Errors and Warnings dialog when the project is calculated. The level at which a Note is
generated is set by the Defined Load Threshold Settings – see Defined Load Threshold below.

For any board with diversity set at ‘Define Load’, the Defined Load Threshold settings define the level at which a note will be
displayed in the Errors and Warnings dialog, advising when the load connected to the board has become excessive.
Global Settings
Select Defined Load Thresholds from the Preferences | Calculations menu to display the Defined Load Thresholds dialog. The dialog
contains settings that define the percentage of the value of Define Load setting at a board at which a note will be displayed in the
Errors and Warnings dialog. These are default global settings that can be replaced by local settings at individual boards as required.
See Local Settings below.
Local Settings
The Defined Load Threshold group box will appear in the board Diversity tab when diversity is set to Define Load. The setting in the
box defines the level at which a note will be displayed in the Errors and Warnings dialog. By default the Global Setting will be
applied:
The global setting is defined in the Defined Load Thresholds dialog, displayed by selecting Defined Load Thresholds from the
Preferences | Calculations menu.
Alternatively, the Local Setting can be used:


Example:
The settings depicted below would ensure that when the sum of the loads connected to the board (by drawing them connected to
the board on the single‐line diagram or defining them in the board circuit diagram) exceeded 132 A (120 x 110/100), a Note would be
displayed in the Errors and Warnings dialog whenever the project is calculated.

Diversity at a Final Circuit
Diversity can be set for individual final circuits in the Load Details dialog for circuits created on the network drawing and in the
Load/Motor tab of the Circuit dialog for circuits created in the board circuit diagram. A setting of 1 is normally applied. To change the
setting, Select ‘Duty’ and type in a value within the range 0 to 2.
The setting made at the final circuit is multiplied by any setting applied at the board to which the circuit is connected. The total
diversity is shown in the dialog.
NOTE: When the diversity method for the feeding board is Table H2, the diversity setting at the final circuit dialog will be fixed at 1.
When Standby is selected, diversity is set to 0.
The diversity setting for a circuit has no effect on the cable sizing for that circuit. For example, for a circuit protected by a BS 88 fuse
and where the load and diversity are set at 80 A and 0.8, the fuse rating will be set at 80 A and the cable size will be selected for a
rating of 80 A or greater. At the feeding board the diversified load current for the circuit will be calculated as 80 x 0.8 = 64 A. This
amount of current will be added to the total load calculated for that board.

Minimum Cable sizes
Minimum cable sizes is used to set the minimum sizes that will be used to calculate auto cable sizes in a project. Different minimum
sizes can be set for circuits with different load types. The Minimum Cable Size Settings dialog can be displayed by selecting
Preferences | Calculations | Minimum Cable Sizes.
For each load type listed, separate settings can be made for copper or aluminium, for either the phase conductor or any separate
CPC conductor in use.
 The different load types listed are those shown in the Type setting box in the Load details dialog, and also Motor
and Sub Mains.
The minimum sizes can be set within the following limits:
 Copper conductors: 1.5 to 50 mm2 (except Lighting load type : 1 to 50 mm2);
 Aluminium conductors: 16 to 50 mm2.
Any setting made will determine the smallest size of conductor in the list of conductor sizes available for selection.
Making Settings
To make settings for a single load category, click the row for that category and make the required settings using the settings at the
top of each column. If a different minimum size is required for the phase and CPC conductors, make the selection for the phase first
and then the CPC.
To make settings for multiple load categories, click or click and drag to select the block of rows required and then make the settings
as described above.
Clicking the Reset button will reset all the settings to the default values, i.e., Copper conductors = 1 mm2, Aluminium conductors =
16 mm2.
Printing
Click the Print Settings Summary button to obtain a paper copy of the settings.

Maximum Separate CPC Sizes
In a circuit with a separate CPC set to Auto, the size of that CPC may be automatically increased by the calculation if the circuit is
failing to disconnect for earth fault within the specified time limit (5s, 0.4s, etc.). To prevent the CPC becoming disproportionately
large in comparison to the size of the phase conductor in the circuit a maximum size limit is set. The
The dialog contains settings that limit the number of sizes a separate CPC will be increased by the auto calculation process. The size
limit is set in the Maximum Separate CPC Sizes dialog. Separate settings can be made for copper and aluminium conductors in sub‐
mains or final circuits.
The Maximum Size setting sets the number of sizes above the phase conductor size to which the separate CPC will be permitted to
rise. For example: Setting = 2 ; Phase Conductor Size = 16 mm2; Maximum Separate CPC Size when set to Auto = 35 mm2.
To make settings for a single circuit/conductor material, click the relevant row for that and make the required settings using the
setting at the top of the Maximum Size column.
To make settings for multiple combinations, click or click and drag to select the block of rows required and then make the settings as
described above.
Clicking the Reset button will reset all the settings to the default value, i.e., 3.
Printing
Click the Print Settings Summary button to obtain a paper copy of the settings.
Cable Dialog Message
In the CPC tab of the Cable dialog, a message is displayed next to the CPC Size setting which, when the project has been calculated,
shows the absolute value of the maximum size.

Project Revision
This feature allows changes made to a ProDesign project to be documented. The Project Revision dialog is launched from the menu
item: Edit | Project Revision.
The top part of the Project Revision dialog contains general information about the ProDesign project. The project path field is
automatically completed once the ProDesign project has been saved.
Revision History
This central area displays a list of the revision history for the current project.
Revision Details
This area is used to record the details of project revisions. The Revision field should be used to record a revision number. The large
space to the right should be used to record details of the changes.
To add a revision history entry
Complete the fields listed under ‘Revision Detail’ noting the following:
 The revision reference needs to be a unique entry.
 The date of the revision can be entered using the calendar pop‐up window. ProDesign will check that the revision
references and dates entered are in an appropriate order. A message is displayed if a newly entered low revision
reference is associated with a newer than previously entered date.
 The Revised By list box will contain the names of previously defined ProDesign users. A new name can be entered if
necessary.
 The large empty area is used to describe the details of the revision.
On completion of the Revision Detail fields click ‘Add’ to add this information to the database.
To update an existing revision entry
 Click on the row number of the entry;
 The details of the selected revision will appear in the Revision Detail area towards the bottom of the dialog. Amend
as required;
 Click ‘Update’.

To Delete a revision entry
 Click on the row number of the entry;
 Click ‘Delete’.
In some types of installation (e.g. an installation with a TT source) it is common to install an RCD at the source of supply. If an earth
fault occurs on one of the sub‐mains in the system the upstream RCD may be the device which causes automatic disconnection
rather than the device which is associated with the sub‐main. The ProDesign ‘Earth Fault Device Propagation’ feature allows this
scenario to be modelled.
The Earth Fault Protection Propagation is enabled from the ProDesign ‘Calculate’ menu.

When this option is selected the following occurs during project calculation:
 The software searches upstream for any earth fault protective devices.
 If such a device is found upstream then the earth fault disconnection time is calculated (using the downstream
circuits’ earth fault level). The maximum Zs of the earth fault device is also obtained.
 The disconnection times obtained from the upstream earth fault protection and the local device are compared. The
quickest disconnection time and highest maximum Zs are used.

When the ‘Earth Fault Protection Propagation’ option is not selected each circuit will be considered individually with respect to earth
fault disconnection, i.e. the presence of upstream earth fault devices will not be taken into account when calculating downstream
earth fault disconnection.


Distribution System Settings
This section describes the ways in which the major project components can be configured.
Sources of Supply
There are three types of supply source available in ProDesign: Source of Supply, Transformer, Generator. These are accessed by
clicking one of three buttons on the Construct toolbar.
It is important that accurate data is used to fill in the details required in the Source dialog. Incorrect data at the source will affect the
accuracy of the result obtained at all parts of the network.
Source of Supply
Represents an incoming supply, an existing board used as the supply to the network being designed, or other condition where the
supply is not derived directly from a transformer or generator. Can be defined as a TN or TT source.
Transformer
Used to represent the supply where the network design commences from the LV terminals of a transformer.
Generator
Used to represent the supply where the network design commences from the supply terminals of a generator.
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) as Source
Used to represent the supply where the entire network is powered by a UPS.
Amtech Group Distribution System Settings  103

Source of Supply Settings
The dialog contains data inputs that define the source conditions for the network supply and the supply type. Most of the data is
contained in tabs that group related items together. The inputs are:
Main Dialog Area
Reference
The text reference for the Source used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Reference box is checked.
Active Supply
The Active Supply box should be checked to indicate the Source to be used as the supply to the project. Only one source can be
active in a project at any one time. The text reference for the Active Supply is displayed bold on the drawing. When the project is
calculated, data from the dialog for the Active Supply is used to define the source conditions.
Connection
To: gives the reference for the cable or busbar connected to the source.
User Type
Click the User Type button to select User Global Settings – see User Global Settings.
104  Distribution System Settings Amtech Group

Voltage Tab
Phase Connection
The source phase connection can be set to three phase or three phase and neutral, or single phase and neutral.
For a single phase supply, the phase of the supply can be selected.
Supply Frequency
Supply frequency can be defined as either 50Hz or 60Hz; the default setting is 50Hz.
Conductor reactance is affected by the supply frequency selection. The conductor reactance data supplied by manufacturers, or
taken from BS7671 Appendix 4 is used for calculations at 50Hz. Conductor reactance values are adjusted when 60Hz is selected to
take into account the 20% frequency increase.
Voltage
Defines the voltage present at the supply terminals. It is preferable to enter the actual levels present at the terminals under normal
load conditions, voltage sensitive calculations such as voltage drop calculations can then be performed using accurate values. Enter a
nominal value if no other information is to hand, e.g., 400/230 V (the default value).
Entering one value and pressing the Tab key causes the other to be re‐calculated [Vp = VL/3].
ProDesign is designed to calculate standard grid connected systems. To allow calculations to be made for networks with supply
voltages greater than those normally applied to grid‐connected systems, the limits for the Voltage input in the Source of Supply
dialog have been raised as follows:
Three phase Voltage maximum: 1150 V
Single phase Voltage maximum: 664 V

When calculating for systems with voltages higher than grid‐connected values the following notes should be considered:
Earth fault disconnection
The earth fault disconnection calculations are valid for all system voltages that can be entered in the Source dialog except: For
circuits feeding portable equipment, the default disconnection time of 0.4s is not valid for phase voltages above 277V. The user can
intervene and manually select a disconnection time of 0.2s for phase voltages above 277V and less than 400 V. For phase voltages
above 400V the appropriate disconnection time is 0.1s and there is currently no provision for this in ProDesign.
Earth fault protection (adiabatic) calculation
BS 7671:2008 (2011) requires that a check should be made that the thermal capacity of the cpc is not exceeded under earth fault
conditions, ie. I²t < k²s², where k²s² is the thermal capacity of the cable and I²t is the amount of energy it has to sustain.
 For disconnection under earth fault conditions where the disconnection time is less than 0.1s, I²t is the energy let
through by the protective device in A²s. This is a value declared by the manufacturer and is voltage dependent. The
I²t energy let through values stored in the ProDesign database are for 240/415V systems.
 Therefore, for phase voltages above 240V, ProDesign gives no assurance that overheating of the cpc will not occur
during earth faults (adiabatic test). Where disconnection is not particularly rapid (eg. 2s), I²t is measured as the fault
current squared times the disconnection time; this is not voltage dependent and does not represent a problem.
Phase fault protection calculation
For phase voltages above 240 the same notes apply as for the Earth fault protection (adiabatic) calculation above.

Supply Type
The Supply Type should be set correctly to ensure that the appropriate set of voltage drop limits (BS 7671:2008 (2011) Appendix 4,
6.4) are implemented.
The Voltage Drop Settings button provides access to the Voltage Drop Settings dialog.
Identical Parallel Supplies
This Option is only available in ProDesign versions ProDesign100 and above.
A single supply source can be used to represent a number of identical parallel sources. This feature applies to a Source of Supply,
Transformer or Generator connected to a Switchboard, either directly or through a conductor. Duplicate parallel supplies can be set.
Each parallel supply is a duplicate of the one defined in the dialog. This includes source type, phase and voltage settings, fault
settings, protective device settings, and all conductor parameters.
To define parallel sources, in the Identical Parallel Supplies panel in the Voltage tab of the source dialog, check Parallel Sources and
select the number of parallel sources:
Parallel Supplies are indicated on the single line diagram by two parallel lines added to the supply source symbol:
Clicking the Details button in the Identical Parallel Supplies panel displays a dialog where the identities of the sources can be edited,
and also those for the conductor where the supplies are connected to the Switchboard through a conductor:


Fault Conditions Tab
Supply System
Sets the type of network supply, TT or TN. The selection determines the type of Source calculator available and controls the rules
applied to network calculations, i.e., when TT is selected the TT Supply Earth Fault Level Calculator is available and the rules
regarding calculations relevant to TT systems are applied.
More:
TT Supply Settings
More:
REC Supply Settings
Advanced
When the box is checked, it allows the source fault conditions to be defined as resistive and reactive components or to define the
source fault power factor.
When the box is unchecked, the source fault conditions can be defined as Phase fault current, and Earth fault current or external
Earth impedance. This is normally adequate information to define the source condition.
Phase Fault Current (Ip)
The level of prospective phase fault current at the network supply source. It is necessary to enter an accurate value if the design is to
be suitable for the actual site conditions. The default value (16 kA) is that generally declared to be the maximum for a REC single‐
phase supply into a building. The actual value may be quite different.
For a three phase supply, the value to be entered is the three‐phase rms symmetrical fault current. For single‐phase networks, enter
the phase to neutral fault current.
Phase Ze
The total external phase fault impedance (the impedance of the path through which a short‐circuit fault would flow) at the network
supply source.
PF
The power factor of the external phase fault impedance (the impedance of the path through which a short‐circuit fault would flow).
The power factor is the ratio of the fault resistance to the fault reactance (R/Z); this power factor is unrelated to the load power
factor.
An exact value of fault power factor may often be very hard to determine. Generally, the nearer the supply connection is to the LV
transformer, the lower will be the power factor.
Re
The resistive component of the external phase fault impedance (the impedance of the path through which a short‐circuit fault would
flow) at the network supply source.

Xe
The reactive component of the external phase fault impedance (the impedance of the path through which a short‐circuit fault would
flow) at the network supply source.
Earth Fault Current (Ief)
The level of prospective earth fault current at the network supply source. It is necessary to enter an accurate value if the design is to
be suitable for the actual site conditions. The default value (16 kA) is that generally declared to be the maximum for a REC single‐
phase supply into a building. The actual value may be quite different.
The value to be entered is the phase to earth fault current (Vph/Ze).
The earth fault current is initially set to the same value as the phase fault current. If the phase fault current is changed, the earth
fault current will automatically change to the same value. Therefore, where the earth fault current is different to the value entered
for the phase fault current, the phase fault current should be entered first and the earth fault current second.
The Earth Ze can be entered instead of the earth fault current, in which case the earth fault current will automatically be re‐
calculated.
Earth Ze
The total external earth fault impedance (the impedance of the path through which an earth fault would flow) at the network supply
source.
PF
The power factor of the external earth fault impedance (the impedance of the path through which an earth fault would flow). The
power factor is the ratio of the fault resistance to the fault reactance (R/Z); this power factor is unrelated to the load power factor.
An exact value of earth power factor may often be very hard to determine. Generally, the nearer the supply connection is to the LV
transformer, the lower will be the power factor.
Re
The resistive component of the external earth fault impedance (the impedance of the path through which an earth fault would flow)
at the network supply source.
Xe
The reactive component of the external earth fault impedance (the impedance of the path through which an earth fault would flow)
at the network supply source.
Protection Tab
The protection tab contains controls that allow the protection for the main cable connected to the supply to be defined. The same
settings can be made in the main cable dialog. For more details See Cables.
Comments Tab
Contains a comments text box the contents of which can be printed with the related report.

Transformer Settings
The contents of the Transformer dialog are similar to those described for the Source of Supply (see above). Additionally, it contains
the following features:
Voltage Tab
Primary Voltage

Defines the voltage at the terminals of the primary winding. This information is only used where the main incoming LV circuit
protection is located at the primary rather than the secondary side of the transformer.
Fault Conditions Tab ‐ Fault Level Calculator
Primary Fault Level

Sets the fault level declared for the network to which the transformer primary is connected. The default value (250 MVA) is a typical
assumed value for 11 kV supplies. The actual value could be higher (up to 500 MVA), particularly in cities, and lower in rural locations
remote from the HV grid system. The primary fault level is used in the calculation that determines the fault level at the transformer
secondary terminals.

Rating
Defines the declared power rating of the transformer. It is used in the calculation to determine the fault level at the transformer
secondary terminals; also to determine the transformer LV load current rating.
Impedance
Defines the transformer impedance as a percentage. It is used in the calculation to determine the fault level at the transformer
secondary terminals.
The percentage impedance of a transformer can be calculated using:
Z% = Rating (kVA) x Z x 105 / VL2
Apply
Clicking the Apply button updates the data in the Prospective Fault Conditions pane, using the changed values that have been typed
in.
When the Status notice below shows ‘Applied’, this means that the values shown in the Prospective Fault Conditions pane have been
calculated from those shown in the Fault Level Calculator. ‘Not Applied’ means the Prospective Fault Conditions do not yet reflect
the changes to the Calculator data.
Protection Tab.
LV / HV
(Designer range only)

The main cable connected between the transformer secondary terminals and the Main Switchboard can be protected by an LV
circuit protective device, as for other circuits in the LV network (select LV), or by an HV device located at the transformer primary
terminals (select HV).
The selection changes the selections listed in Manufacturer, Family, Type, Protection and Rating to provide LV or HV devices as
appropriate.
Transformer Load Rating

From the data typed into the Voltage and Fault Conditions Tabs, the transformer load rating for the primary and secondary windings
are calculated and displayed.
The primary value is used in the selection of a suitable HV protective device.
The secondary value is used to check that the total network design current does not exceed the transformer load capacity.
Transformer Rated Primary Current / Protection Rated At

Checks are carried out to ensure that the protective device protection is set to adequately protect the equipment with which it is
associated. An HV protective device can be rated at the actual level of transformer primary load rating (100 %) or a value 30 % higher
(130 %).
Generator Settings
The contents of the Generator dialog are similar to those described for the Source of Supply settings. Additionally, it contains in the
Fault Conditions tab, the calculator described below.

Fault Conditions Tab
Contains the same controls as in the Source of Supply dialog but the following should be noted with respect to the generator
impedance input.
Rating
Input the generator rating in kVA.
Impedance
Input the generator percentage impedance.
Generator impedance under fault conditions varies with time – the sub‐transient impedance applying in the instant after the
occurrence of a fault, the transient impedance in the longer period during which the fault current is decaying.
The value used should be selected to be appropriate to the time taken for protective devices in the system to operate. It is used in
the calculation to determine the fault level at the generator terminals. A high impedance may result in a very low fault current,
leading to difficulties in disconnecting circuits under earth fault conditions.
Apply
Clicking the Apply button updates the data in the Prospective Fault Conditions panel using a calculation based on the generator
rating and impedance data:
TT Supply Settings
The contents of the dialog are the same as those described for Source of Supply Settings, except for the Fault Level Calculator
described below.
Fault Level Calculator
When the Supply System is selected as TT, the ‘TT Supply Earth Impedance Calculator’ panel is displayed:
Resistance/Reactance
The Bonding Conductor and Electrode resistance and reactance data boxes are used in the calculation to determine the source earth
impedance. Values of resistance and reactance can be typed directly into the data boxes. Alternatively, click the Bonding Conductor
or Electrode button to use the calculator functions.
Apply
When the Apply button is clicked, the resistance and reactance inputs are used to fill in the impedance for the Earth Ze in the
Prospective Fault Conditions panel.
Further details can be found under TT Supply Fault Level Calculator

Bonding Conductor Calculator
Clicking the Calculate button next to the Bonding Conductor data boxes displays the Earthing Conductor Impedance Calculator. The
conductor impedance is calculated according to the selected cable size and length.
Cable Type
Select the type of cable used to connect the electrode: thermoplastic (PVC) or thermosetting (XLPE) insulation. The insulation type is
used in the adiabatic calculations.
Cable Size
Select the section of the cable used to connect the electrode (1 to 1,000 mm2).
Length
Input the length of the cable used to connect the electrode.
Impedance (Ohms): Resistance, Reactance
Shows the conductor impedance calculated using the above data inputs.
Electrode Resistance Calculator
Clicking the Calculate button next to the Electrode data boxes displays the Electrode Resistance Calculator. Electrode resistances are
calculated according to a method described in BS 7430.
Electrode Type: Plate
Select the electrode type as Plate.

Soil Resistivity (Ohm.m)
Input the soil resistivity (1 to 5,000 ohms).

Plate Dimensions
Input the dimensions of the plate, either as Height and Width (2 m max.), or Area (4 mm2 max.).
No. of parallel plates
Input the number of parallel plates (10 max.) used to form the earth electrode.
Spacing
Where there is more than one plate, select the spacing between the plates as greater than 2 and less than 10, or greater than 10:
Electrode Resistance
Shows the electrode resistance calculated using the above data entries.
NOTE: an electrode resistance greater than 200 ohms is not recommended.
Electrode Type: Rod
Select the electrode type as Rod.
Soil Resistivity (Ohm.m)
Input the soil resistivity (1 to 5,000 ohms).
Rod Dimensions
Input the rod length in metres, and the diameter in millimetres
Single Rod/Multiple Rods
Select electrode as a single rod or multiple rods.
In Line/Hollow Square
If multiple rods are selected, select whether rods are arranged in a line or in a hollow square.
No. of Rods/Spacing
If multiple rods are selected, select number of rods along each side (10 max. for rods in line, 20 max. for rods in hollow square) and
spacing (30 m max.).
Example: rods in hollow square; No. of rods along each side = 5. Total number of rods = 16.


Input the spacing between rods (30 m max.).
Electrode Resistance
Shows the electrode resistance calculated using the above data inputs.
NOTE: an electrode resistance greater than 200 ohms is not recommended.
More:
TT Supply Fault Level Calculator
REC Supply Settings
The contents of the dialog are the same as those described for Source of Supply Settings, except for the Fault Level Calculator
described below.
Fault Level Calculator
When the Supply System is selected as TN and the Phase Connection in the Voltage tab is set to ‘3 Ph / 3 Ph+N’, the ‘REC Supply Fault
Level Calculator’ panel is displayed as shown:
Supply Cable
Select the origin of the supply as a service cable supplied from an LV Distribution Main or from an LV Sub‐station.
Service Cable
Sets the size and length of the service cable connecting the REC cut‐out to the LV Distribution Main or Sub‐station.
NOTE: the selected length of service cable should be its length from the boundary of the consumer’s premises to the REC cut‐out.
When the Supply System is selected as TN and the Phase Connection in the Voltage tab is set to ‘1 Ph + N’, the ‘REC Supply Fault
Level Calculator’ panel is displayed as shown:
Service Cable
Sets the type and length of the service cable connecting the REC cut‐out to the LV Distribution Main or Sub‐station.
NOTE: the selected length of service cable should be its length from the boundary of the consumer’s premises to the REC cut‐out.
Apply
When the Apply button is clicked, the data entered in the calculator is used to calculate the source fault conditions which are then
used to fill in the data boxes in the Prospective Fault Conditions panel.
Further details are available under REC Supply Fault Level Calculator
UPS as Source of Supply
An Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) can be used either as a source of supply feeding the entire network or a part of the network.
For further details see: Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

Boards
Multiple Switchboards can be placed in each network – see also The Project Drawing | Drawing the Network | Switchboard.
The total number of Switchboards, Distribution Boards and Consumer Units that can be placed in a single network depends on the
level of the software suite with which ProDesign is supplied.
Switchboard Settings
Most of the data in the dialog is contained in tabs that group related items together. The inputs are:
Main Dialog Area
Id No.
The text reference for the Switchboard used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Id No. box is checked.
Name.
The secondary text reference for the Switchboard used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Name box is
checked.
Function
A text field used to describe the function of the Switchboard. This is shown in reports.
Connection
From: gives the reference for the cable or busbar supplying the Switchboard.
User Type
Click the User Type button to select Component Template – see Component Template.
Circuits Tab

No. of Circuits
The number of outgoing circuits connected to the Main Switchboard.
Wired
Selects the wiring system for the board. Three phase “TP” or Three phase and Neutral “TPN”. These will be automatically set by the
downstream load types.
Print Circuit Detail
Click to print the circuit details as shown in the box below.
Circuit Details
Lists details for the outgoing circuits including: Reference, Circuit Protective Device (CPD) description, State and Phase connections.
Where the board is split into multiple sections (see Sections below), the associated circuits are listed separately for each section; the
listing for each section is preceded by an entry in bold text which gives the reference of the section and the CPD being used to
protect that section.
The secondary bold text details are for the incoming supply to that section of the board. This is also indicated by “Incomer‐“ being
prefixed to the cable name.
For each item in the list: Double‐click on the CPD details to display the Protective Device dialog (for details on data inputs for the
circuit protective device, see Conductors | Cables | Protection Tab.
The State pull down list allows the user to set the switch to state to open or closed. The state of this switch is reflected in the
calculations. Click on the down arrow and select the required state.
Click on the down arrow in the Phase details box to select a different phase connection.

Sections Tab
Sections
A Switchboard can have a single section or up to 4 each connected through an interconnecting switch. When the two sections radio
button is selected the switchboard will be drawn with two sections.
Section Ref:
Where a switchboard is split into multiple sections, these boxes contain the references for the sections.
Section references are appended to the Main Switchboard reference, e.g., where a switchboard with a reference ‘Main Switchboard’
has a section with a reference ‘Section A’, the complete reference for that section will be: ‘Main Switchboard Section A’. Check or
uncheck the Display box to display or hide the reference on the drawing.
Interconnector
The Interconnector can be modelled as open or closed.

Diversity Tab

The Diversity tab provides controls to define the method used to calculate diversity at the board for final circuits connected to the
board, i.e.: Manual, Table H2, User Defined.
For details on diversity settings, see Calculations | Diversity below.
Define Load
When Define Load is selected, the load at the board is defined by setting actual load current values for each phase.
total loading for a board of 120 A / 0.85 PF, without defining any final circuits, make the settings shown above. The Voltage Drop
Reserve setting is intended to represent the anticipated voltage drop in the final circuits which are yet to be connected.
connected load exceeds the nominated load current. This could lead to the connected load exceeding the capacity of the board
and/or the sub‐main cable feeding it. Where this occurs a Note will be shown in the Errors and Warnings dialog when the project is
calculated. The level at which a Note is generated is set by the Defined Load Threshold Settings – see Defined Load Threshold below.
The Defined Load Threshold group box appears when diversity is set to Define Load. The setting in the box defines the level at which
a note is to be displayed in the Errors and Warnings dialog. By default the Global Setting will be applied:


Example:
the board on the single‐line diagram or defining them in the board circuit diagram) exceeds 132 A (120 x 110/100), a Note would be

Optional Data Tab
The data contained in the Optional Data tab is included in reports, if values are entered. The data is for information only and is not
used in any part of the calculations.

Earthing Tab

Earthing Tab
The settings in the Earthing tab describe whether the board is to be earthed locally and if so, what earthing arrangement is
to be used. (See also: Calculations / Earth Fault / Calculations / Earthing Arrangements.)
Earthing Arrangement
The default arrangement is for no local earthing at the board. Earthing of circuits connected to the board will be through
circuit protective conductors connected back to the earth connection at the supply source.
Alternatively, the setting can be changed to Local Earth at Board, in which case the earth path for circuits connected to the
board will be through the local earth and also back to the earth connection at the supply source.
When Local Earth at Board is selected, the check box ‘Calculate for local earth only’ determines how earth fault currents are
to be calculated for circuits connected to the board. When selected, the earth path from circuits back to the earth
connection at the supply source will be disregarded. When unselected, both earth paths, through the local and supply
source earth connections are considered in the earth fault calculations.
Also, a further check box setting determines whether or not the board symbol on the single‐line diagram is to be marked
with an earth symbol to indicate the presence of a local earth connection.
Fault Levels at Board
The panel shows the levels of phase and earth fault current and the fault impedances at the board. Valid data can only be
shown immediately after the project has been calculated; otherwise ‘N/A’ is shown to indicate that valid data is not
currently available.
Local Earth Impedance
The Bonding Conductor and Electrode resistance and reactance data boxes are used in the calculation to determine the local board
earth impedance. Values of resistance and reactance can be typed directly into the data boxes. Alternatively, click the Bonding
Conductor or Electrode button to use the calculator functions.
Comments Tab

Distribution Boards Settings
Main Dialog Area
Id No.
The text reference for the Distribution Board used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Reference box is
checked.
Name.
The secondary text reference for the Distribution Board used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Reference
box is checked.
Function
A text field used to describe the function of the Distribution Board. This is shown in reports.
Connection
From: gives the reference for the cable or busbar supplying the Distribution Board.
User Type
Click the User Type button to select Component Template – see Component Template.
Details Tab
Phase
Shows the distribution board phase connections.

Circuits
Max. No. of Ways sets the number of available ways in the board. Click on the Circuit Diagram button to access the dialog containing
the board circuit diagram (see Circuit Diagram below).
Incomer
Main Device shows the type of device used as the board incomer; Fuse or Circuit‐breaker are shown automatically depending on
type of device selected in the Protective device dialog (to access, double‐click on the Main Device symbol in the Circuit Diagram).
When the protection is selected as ‘No Protection’, either ‘Isolating Switch’ or ‘Terminals’ can be selected from the Main Device box.
Main Device Rating shows Auto when the device is selected as fuse or circuit‐breaker with the rating set to Auto. Where the fuse or
circuit‐breaker rating is selected, the box shows the rating. When the protection is selected as ‘No Protection’, the box shows Auto.
Diversity Tab

Define Load


Example:

Optional Data Tab

The data contained in the Optional Data tab is included in reports, if values are entered. The data is for information only is not used
in any part of the calculations.
Earthing Tab

Earthing Tab
Comments Tab

Circuit Diagram
The circuit diagram is accessed by clicking the Circuit Diagram button in the Details tab:
The circuit diagram provides a graphic representation of the board phasing and available ways, and the incomer and outgoing circuit
details, as follows:
Phases
Shows phase arrangement; three‐phase or a single phase.
Main Device
Board incomer shown as circuit‐breaker, fuse, isolator or terminals dependent on the protective device selection made. Shows
protective device description and whether protection rating is selected as Auto. Shows actual rating, or calculated rating in brackets.
Ways
Shown as occupied or Spare (unused). Shows phases occupied. Shows way numbers.
Circuits
Circuits shown graphically as fuse or circuit‐breaker protected, or unprotected. Shows protective device description and whether
protection rating is selected as Auto. Shows actual rating, or calculated rating. Shows cable and load references.
Use Colour
The phases can be shown in colour or monochrome: check or uncheck Use Colour.
Print
Click print to print a copy of the drawing.

In addition to showing the board layout, the circuit diagram provides facilities for adding new circuits and editing existing ones.

Adding Circuits

To add a circuit to an unused way, double‐click within the way on the connections between the busbars and the text reference
‘Spare’. (To add a single‐phase circuit, double‐click on the connection for the required phase. To define a three‐phase circuit, double‐
click on any phase and select a three‐phase load type). The Circuit dialog will be displayed containing the data entries necessary to
define a final circuit connected to the board, these include cable and load details. For further details on data entry, see the sections
below on Cables and Loads.
NOTE: circuits added in this way will not appear on the network drawing.
Editing Circuits
Existing circuits can be edited by double‐clicking in the same way as when the circuit was created. This will display the Circuit dialog
where details can be edited as required.
NOTE: circuits created by drawing them on the network drawing connected to a distribution board cannot be edited this way. To edit
those circuits, return to the network drawing and double‐click on the Cable dialog or Load dialog, as required.
Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete

Right‐clicking on an occupied or unoccupied way on the connections between the busbars and the text reference ‘Spare’ displays a
floating menu. Clicking on the relevant items allows circuits to be cut, copied, pasted or deleted, as required. For example, to copy an
existing circuit in spare way: right‐click on the existing circuit, click on Copy in the floating menu, right‐click on the target way, click
on Paste on the floating menu. A new circuit with the same configuration as the original circuit will be created in the target way.
Adding / Editing Circuit Protective Devices (CPDs)

Similar methods to those described above for adding and editing circuits can be applied to the CPDs for each way in the board. For
CPDs the double‐clicks and right‐clicks should be executed in the busbar area of the selected way. The incoming protective device
can be edited in the same way.

Consumer Unit Settings
The controls in the main dialog area apply to the consumer unit in general. Also, there are settings in tabs that group related items
together.
Consumer Unit Main Dialog Area
Id No. – Consumer Unit
The text reference for the Consumer Unit used in the reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Reference box is
checked.
Name – Consumer Unit
The secondary text reference for the Consumer Unit used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Reference box
is checked.
Function – Consumer Unit
A text field used to describe the function of the Consumer Unit. This is shown in reports.
Connection – Consumer Unit
From: gives the reference for the cable supplying the Consumer Unit.
User Type – Consumer Unit
Click to display the Template dialog where the currently defined Consumer Unit templates are listed. These can be edited, deleted or
‘Set As Default’; also, new templates can be added.
Attachments – Consumer Unit
Click to display the Attachment Manager, which can be used to attach files to the Consumer Unit.
Details Tab – Consumer Unit
The Details tab contains controls used to set the number of sections into which the board is to be split, the number of ways in each
sections, and the device protecting each of the sections.

Incomer
The incoming device can be selected as Terminals or Isolating Switch. The Rating of the Isolating Switch can be selected as: 63, 80 or
100 A.
Sections
The Sections panel contains controls to set the number of sections required, the number of ways in each section, and device used to
protect each of the sections.
In the column headed ‘Number of Sections’ there are three radio buttons allowing the selection of 1, 2 or 3 sections as required.
In the Column headed ‘No. of Ways’, the number of ways can be set for each of the selected sections. The total number of ways
contained in the board is shown at the bottom of the column. Any number of ways can be selected for each section, up to a limit of
30 ways in total.
The controls in the ‘Way Numbers from’ column set the number of the first way in each section. The controls are interlocked to
prevent duplicate way numbers.
A description of the devices protecting the selected sections is listed under ‘Sections Protected by’. Clicking the Change button
alongside a description displays the Protective Devices Selector where a different device selection can be made. Device selections for
sections 2 and 3 are limited to residual current devices. For the first section, it is possible to set ‘No RCD’ in the Protective Devices
Selector:
Deleting Sections
Whenever the number of sections is reduced, a check is made as to whether there are circuits connected to any of the sections to be
deleted. If there are, a warning dialog will be displayed. If the circuits in question have been defined in the Circuit Diagram (see
below), there will be an option to delete the ways together with the attached circuits. Any circuits that have been drawn as
connected to the board on the single‐line diagram will have to be moved or removed before the ways to which they are attached can
be deleted.


Deleting Ways
When the controls in the Sections panel are used to reduce the number of ways in any section, or to delete a complete section, a
check is made as to whether there are circuits connected to any of the ways to be deleted. If there are, a warning dialog will be
displayed. If the circuits in question have been defined in the Circuit Diagram (see below), there will be an option to delete the ways
together with the attached circuits. If there any circuits that have been drawn on the single‐line diagram, they will have to be moved
or removed before the ways to which they are attached can be deleted.

Phase
The phase to which the board is connected is shown. The phase can be selected as long as the board is not connected to any part of
the network.
Circuit Diagram Button
Clicking the Circuit Diagram button displays the Circuit Diagram which provides a graphic view of the board contents. Protective
Devices and circuits connected to the various ways can be defined in the Circuit Diagram.
Circuit Diagram Consumer Unit
The circuit diagram provides a graphic representation of the sections, the ways connected to the sections, and the protective devices
and circuits connected to the board.

The Board contents will normally be arranged with the Isolator on the right and with the outgoing circuits to the left. If required the
Board Arrangement can be changed to Isolator on Left.
The number of sections and the number of ways in each section will be displayed as defined in the Details tab.
Incomer
The list box on the face of the incomer symbol can be set to Isolator or Terminals as required. When Isolator is selected a further list
box allows the Rating of the isolating switch to be set.
Spare Ways
The available ways are initially shown as Spare (unused). As described below, each spare way can be set to have a circuit connected
to it or be equipped with a protective device only, with no circuit connected.
Adding Circuits
To add a circuit to an unused way, double‐click on or around the vertical line (labelled ‘Spare’) located above the desired way
number. The Circuit dialog containing the data entries necessary to define a final circuit connected to the board, including cable and
load details, will be displayed. For further details on data entry, see the sections below on Cables and Loads.
NOTE: circuits created by drawing them on the network single‐line diagram connected to a Consumer Unit cannot be edited this way.
To edit such circuits, return to the network drawing and double‐click on the Cable or Load, as required.
Adding/Editing Devices
To add a device to a way containing a blank (Spare) device, double‐click the Spare symbol (or right‐click and select ‘Add / Edit’), the
Circuit Protective device dialog will be displayed with ‘No Protection’ checked. Uncheck ‘No Protection’, the type of protective device
required can then be selected.

Where a protective device has been selected to set it back to Spare, right‐click its image and select ‘Delete’. NOTE: if a circuit is
connected to the deleted device, it will also be deleted.

To edit an existing device, double‐click its symbol (or right‐click and select ‘Add / Edit’) and change the settings in the dialog then
displayed.
Note: to define a spare way as equipped with a protective device but with no circuit connected, simply add a device as described
above without adding a circuit.
Preferences
There is a Preferences menu below the title bar where the following settings can be made:
 Deselecting ‘Use Colour’ causes the Consumer Unit circuit diagram to be displayed in black and white. This setting is
also applied to the appearance of the printed report.
 ‘Show Load Image’ controls whether the Load/Motor symbols appear on the circuit diagram. This setting is also
applied to the appearance of the printed report.
Print
Click Print to print a copy of the drawing.
Diversity Tab – Consumer Unit

Define Load

Example:

Optional Data Tab – Consumer Unit
The data contained in the Optional Data tab is included in reports, if values are entered. The data is for information only and is not
used in any part of the calculations.
Earthing Tab

Earthing Tab
Comments Tab – Consumer Unit


Conductors
Conductors in circuits in ProDesign can be cables or busbars. This section describes details of the data input dialogs for these
conductors. For details on how to draw cables and busbars, see Drawing The Network | Cables and Drawing The Network | Busbars.
Cable Data Entry: Dialogs
Settings to cables can be made in two ways:
 Cable Dialogs. On the single‐line diagram, double‐click on a cable to display the dialog containing its settings. The
dialog contents are described in detail below.
 Cable Data Entry Spread Control. Settings details for cables are listed in a table format. The settings of a selected
cable or cables can be modified using the setting controls at the top of the table. The available settings are similar to
those in the cable dialogs described below. For details of the spread control features, see: Cable Data Entry: Spread
Control.
Main Dialog Area
Id no.
The text reference for the circuit used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Reference box is checked.
Name.
The secondary text reference for the circuit used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Reference box is
checked.
Connection
From: gives the reference of the network item supplying the cable.

To: gives the reference of the network item the cable is supplying.
User Type
Cable Tab
Cable Type
Data (tabulated current ratings, resistances, reactances, derating factors) for the cable type selected are used in the calculations for
the circuit. The standard cable types included in BS 7671:2008 (2011), Tables 4D1 to 4J4 are identified by the table number given at
the end of the description.
In addition to the standard types, the following are also listed:
 LSF (Low Smoke and Fume): where LSF variants of the standard cables exist, these are listed. They have exactly the
same electrical properties (current‐carrying capacity, etc.) as their standard equivalent.
 Run to 70 °C: for each standard thermosetting cable, there is a ‘*RUN to 70 °C’ version listed. Each of these cables
have is based on a maximum normal operating temperature of 70 °C instead of the 90 °C maximum for which this
type of cable is normally rated.
This type should be selected when using thermosetting cables where the equipment being connected is not able to operate
at temperatures above 70 °C, and also where thermosetting cables are grouped together with thermoplastic (max. 70 °C)
cables.
 Flexible: there are flexible variants listed for the cables described in the BS 7671:2008 (2011) tables, as follows: 4D1,
4D2, 4E1, 4E2. These are shown as ‘*Flexible’ and have the same properties as their standard equivalent, except
their data are multiplied by the following factors, in compliance with BS 7671:2008 (2011), Appendix 4, 2.4:
o Current‐carrying capacities: 0.95 (16 mm2), 0.97 (>16 mm2);
o Voltage drop resistances: 1.10 (16 mm2), 1.06 (>16 mm2).
 Others: also included are a selection of specific manufacturer cable types and special cables.
Installation Method
The majority of installation methods listed match the Installation Methods described in BS 7671:2008 (2011), Table 4A2.
Additionally, the list also includes installation methods that are in common usage but are not described in the standard.
The installation methods that appear in the list are restricted to those that are valid for the cable type selected. For example, ‘Buried
direct in ground’ will not be listed for an unarmoured cable type.

Because of the large number described in BS 7671:2008 (2011), Table 4A2, installation methods are chosen in two steps. The first
step lists general categories of methods resulting in a short list of applicable methods in step 2. Alternatively, select ‘All methods’ in
step 1 to give a complete list in step 2.
For a given Installation method, a Reference method is applicable and this is used to determine the column in the cable rating tables
in which the tabulated rating (It) for the selected cable is to be found, and also the column for voltage drop resistances and
reactances. Also, for grouped cables, the Reference method determines the location of the rating factor (Cg) data in Tables 4C1 to
4C6.
In certain cases, to fully describe the required installation method, selections need to be made in boxes other than the Installation
box. The other boxes are: Configuration, Conduit/Trunking and Distance; their functions are fully described below.
A picture appears in the tab giving visual confirmation of the selected installation method. Alongside the picture a panel contains a
detailed description of the currently selected installation, including the applicable Reference method.

User Defined Rating Factor
Where none of the listed installation methods accurately reflect the actual method to be used, User Defined can be selected which
allows the value of the rating factor to be applied to the tabulated cable rating to be set by the user.
The user can set a value, from 0.1 to 2, which is used to derate the ‘free air’ rating (Reference Methods E and F) of the cable.
This overrides any other rating factors that would normally apply, e.g., ambient temperature rating factor (Ca). An exception to this is
the rating factor Ch for 3rd harmonic current, which will still be applied.
Cables in Walls, Partitions, Floors or Ceilings
Cable installed concealed in Walls, Partitions, Floors or Ceilings are subject to the requirements of BS 7671:2008 (2011), 522.6.100 to
522.6.103. For the relevant installation methods (Walls/Partitions:1, 2, 3, 57, 58, 59, 60, 102, 103; Ceilings/Floors: 47, 100, 101), a
panel is displayed in the Cable tab containing an indicator to show whether the installed conditions are compliant, and a Settings
button which displays a dialog in which the measures for protection can be edited. The panel title and the Settings dialog vary
according to whether the cable is installed in Walls or Partitions, or Ceilings or Floors.

Installed in Walls or Partitions
When the cable is installed in a wall or partition, clicking the Settings button displays the Settings dialog:

When the three list boxes have been set to describe the protection measures in force for the installation, an indicator panel shows
whether the measures are compliant or non‐compliant.
For each list box setting a picture and notes are displayed to clarify the requirements. Clicking Apply closes the dialog and applies the
settings. Clicking Cancel closes the dialog and leaves the settings unchanged from when the dialog was opened.
Installed in Ceilings or Floors
The requirements for cables installed in ceilings and floors are simpler and there is only one setting in the dialog:

Configuration
For certain installation methods, to determine the column in the table from which the tabulated rating (It) for the selected cable is to
be taken, it is necessary to define both the installation method and a particular configuration for that method, e.g., ‘Horizontal flat
touching’. In such cases the Configuration box will be visible and an appropriate selection should be made from the box.
Conduit/Trunking
Where the installation method includes conduit or trunking, a box will appear labelled Conduit or Trunking, as appropriate. Metal or
Plastic should be selected from the box to define the material from which the conduit or trunking is constructed. This information
will be used to set the options available in the CPC tab.
Distance
For the method ‘Run through thermal insulation’, it is necessary to define the distance along which the cable is run through the
insulating material. When this installation method is selected, the Distance box will be visible, allowing the distance (mm) to be
defined. The value entered is used to set the insulation derating factor Ci, according to BS 7671:2008 (2011), Table 52.2.

Length
The total installed length of cable.
NOTE: for ring socket circuits, this should be measured from the board, around the ring, and back to the board.
Size
The sizes listed include all the sizes generally available for the type of cable selected. An exception to this is where the minimum
cable size has been set (Preferences | Calculation | Minimum Cable Sizes) above the smallest size; all sizes up to the minimum set
will be excluded.
When Auto is checked, the calculations for the circuit will automatically select the smallest suitable size from the sizes listed.
To set a particular cable size, uncheck Auto and select the desired size from the list. The calculation will then check the suitability of
the set cable size.
The value in Amps displayed next to each cable size is the tabulated cable rating (It).
Phase
The options for phase configurations depend on where in the network the circuit is located:
Connected from the Main Switchboard:
The available selection of phase configurations will depend on the phasing of the circuit on the supply side of this one. If the previous
circuit is three phase, this circuit can be defined as three‐phase or one of the three single‐phases.
NOTE: changing a sub‐main circuit from three‐phase to single‐phase and vice‐versa may result in changes to the network on the load
side of the circuit that are hard to correct. If this happens inadvertently, use Edit | Undo or Ctrl+Z.
Connected from Main Switchboard and Source connected directly to MSB:
The phase can be set as three‐phase or one of the three single‐phases
side of this circuit that are hard to correct. If this happens inadvertently, use Edit | Undo or Ctrl+Z.
Connected to MSB:
For a main cable (between the source and the Main Switchboard) the phase configuration is fixed as three‐phase. To create a single‐
phase network, start the design with a source directly connected to the Main Switchboard (no interconnecting cable), then draw a
cable connected to the Main Switchboard; this cable can then be set as single‐phase.
Connected to DB or Consumer Unit:
The list of available connection configurations offers any available ways on the Distribution Board or consumer unit and the unused
phases on those ways (e.g., ‘3 L2’ means L2 phase on Way 3). The Circuit Diagram accessible in the Distribution Board or consumer
unit dialog shows in graphical form the phasing and the number and usage of ways.
side of this circuit that are hard to correct. If this happens inadvertently, use Edit | Undo or Ctrl+Z.
Temperature
The details for the temperature input vary according to whether the cable is installed in air or in the ground:
Ambient Temp – ‘Air’ installation methods
The temperature of the air surrounding the cable installation. For a cable in a trunking, for example, this is the temperature
surrounding the trunking, not within it.

For cables listed in BS 7671:2008 (2011), the tabulated current ratings are given for an ambient temperature of 30 °C. For the
installation method selected, load currents up to the tabulated current rating (It) will not cause the cable temperature to rise above
its conductor operating temperature (e.g., thermoplastic cable = 70 °C).
A rating factor (Ca) of less than 1.0 is applicable for ambient temperatures above 30 °C. This has the effect of increasing the tabulated
current rating required when the cable is selected.
Ground Temp – Ground installation methods
The temperature of the ground surrounding the cable installation.
The tabulated current ratings are given for a ground temperature of 15 °C for the general methods using BICC data. BS 7671:2008
(2011) Methods 70 to 73 are based on a ground temperature of 20 °C For the installation method selected, load currents up to the
tabulated current rating (It) will not cause the cable temperature to rise above its conductor operating temperature (e.g.,
thermoplastic cable = 70 °C).
For ground temperatures other than 15 °C (BICC) or 20 °C (BS 7671:2008 (2011)), a rating factor (Ca) is applied.
Grouping Tab
The Cable Type, Installation Method and Configuration details from the Cable tab are shown at the top of the tab.
Parallel Cables: this circuit
This box contain the settings relating to the number of parallel cables used in the circuit and how they are to be spaced. Unchecking
the ‘Cables in Parallel’ check box indicates that in the circuit in question there will be only one multicore cable or one single‐core
cable per phase employed. Checking the box displays the numerical control to be used to set the number of parallel cables to be
used.
The ‘Spaced more than 2 cable dia.’ box should be checked If it is intended to install the parallel cables in this way. The grouping
rating factor Cg will then be set to 1 (no derating).

Grouping: with Other Circuits
The box contains the control that sets the total number of circuits in the group. If the circuit is not grouped with any other, the box
should be unchecked. When the box is checked the numerical control is displayed allowing the total number of grouped circuits to
be defined.
When setting the number of grouped circuits, BS 7671:2008 (2011) Table 4C1, Notes 2 and 9 should be referred to.
Grouped Thermosetting Cables
When a thermosetting insulated cable (normal maximum operating temperature = 90 °C) is installed in a group with other cables, if
some of the cables in that group are thermoplastic insulated (normal maximum operating temperature = 70 °C), then all the cables
should be run to a maximum of 70 °C. See the note in the cable data tables in BS 7671:2008 (2011):
“Where it is intended to group a cable in this table with other cables, the cable should be rated at the lowest of the
maximum operating temperatures of any of the cables in the group (see Regulation 512.1.5).”
Therefore, when grouped circuits are selected for a thermosetting insulated cable, a warning icon is displayed, with an Info button
below.
Clicking the Info button displays a message box describing the requirement.
Parallel Cables/Grouping: Installation in air
The contents of this box are dependent on whether an installation in air or in the ground has been selected. The view shown below is
for an air installation method.
Arrangement
For certain reference methods (e.g. E), the value of the rating factor Cg to be applied depends on the arrangement of the cables. The
correct arrangement should be selected from the list. The setting box does not appear where specific arrangements are unnecessary,
Subject to Simultaneous Overload
Where circuits are grouped, there are two methods of calculating the rating factor (Cg) to be applied:
‘Subject to simultaneous overload’ (box checked): assumes that more than one of the grouped circuits may be overloaded at any one
time – applies grouping using In/Cg.
‘Not subject to simultaneous overload’ (box unchecked): assumes that only one of the grouped circuits will normally be overloaded
at any one time (a reasonable assumption for general distribution loads) – uses two calculations to determine Cg and uses the
highest value from the two (BS 7671:2008 (2011) Appendix 4, 5.1.2). Usually gives a reduced level of derating compared to ‘Subject
to simultaneous overload’.
Cable in parallel/Circuits in Group
The values of the numbers of cables in parallel and grouped circuits in the settings above are displayed here.
Derating
The numerical control initially shows the number of circuits/cables to which derating should be applied. The value shown will be the
cables in parallel multiplied by the circuits in group. The user can use the numerical control to adjust this number if required.

Cg
Based on the reference method and the number of circuits/cables to which derating is to be applied, the value of the grouping rating
factor Cg to be used in the cable sizing calculations is shown.
No. of trays/circuits per tray
For Reference Methods E and F there are data for multiple numbers of trays and other supports. The N. of trays should be selected
using the numerical control. The No. of circuits per tray required to accommodate all the cables specified will then be shown.
Parallel Cables/Grouping: Installation in ground – BS 7671:2008 (2011)
Depth of Lay
Indicates the depth at which the cable is installed. Rating factors for Buried Reference Method D in BS 7671:2008 (2011) are given in
Table 4B4.
Spacing
Where cables are grouped together, a rating factor for grouping is applied. This has the effect of increasing the tabulated current
rating required when the cable is selected.
The actual value of the applied rating factor depends on the distance the cables are spaced when installed; the greater the spacing,
the higher the value of the factor (the lower the derating).
Soil Thermal Resistivity (Ground installation methods)
Indicates the ability of the soil to conduct heat energy away from the cable. A rating factor of 1.0 is applicable for a resistivity of 2.5
K.m/W. Rating factors for other resistivities are taken from Table 4B3.

All other controls in the box operate in the same way as described above for air installation methods.
Parallel Cables/Grouping: Installation in ground – BICC Data
Depth of Lay (Ground installation methods)
Indicates the depth at which the cable is installed. A grouping rating factor (Cdg) of less than 1.0 is applicable for installation depths
greater than 0.5 m. This has the effect of increasing the tabulated current rating required when the cable is selected. The rating
factors are more severe for larger cable sizes.
Spacing (Ground installation methods)
Where cables are grouped together, a grouping rating factor (Cg) is applied. This has the effect of increasing the tabulated current
rating required when the cable is selected. The rating factors are more severe for larger cable sizes.
The actual value of the rating factor is dependent on the distance the cables are spaced; the greater the spacing, the higher the value
of the factor (the lower the derating).
For single‐core cables installed ‘Buried Direct’, where the spacing is zero, the actual grouping rating factor used is dependent on
whether the cables are installed ‘Flat’ or ‘Trefoil’.
Soil Thermal Resistivity (Ground installation methods)
Indicates the ability of the soil to conduct heat energy away from the cable. A derating factor (Cs) of less than 1.0 is applicable for
resistivities greater than 1.2 K.m/W. This has the effect of increasing the tabulated current rating required when the cable is
selected. The derating factors are more severe for larger cable sizes.

CPC Tab
The controls in the CPC Tab allow the configuration of the CPC to be selected.
CPC Configuration – Armour + Separate/Integral
The Armour will be used as the CPC. If the Armour alone is inadequate (Zs too high to ensure earth fault disconnection within the
required time), an additional CPC conductor will be added in parallel to reduce the value of Zs.
Any additional CPC conductor that may be required can be separate, or integral, within a multi‐core cable (Select ‘Integral
Conductor’).
A separate CPC is automatically sized unless a size is specified in the Size list box.
NOTE: although commonly used this method can be unreliable; because of the magnetic field associated with the armour, it is
difficult to predict the division of fault current between the two parallel conductors – see IEE Guidance Note 6, 6.3.1.
CPC Configuration – Conduit + Separate/Integral
The Metallic Conduit will be used as the CPC. If the Metallic Conduit alone is inadequate (Zs too high to ensure earth fault
disconnection within the required time), an additional CPC conductor will be added in parallel to reduce the value of Zs.
Any additional CPC conductor that may be required can be separate, or integral within a multi‐core cable (Check ‘Integral
conductor’).
According to the installation method selected in the Cable tab, ‘Metallic Conduit’ will be replaced with ‘Sheath’, ‘Earth Conductor’ or
‘Metallic Trunking’
CPC Configuration – Armour ONLY
The Armour ONLY will be used as the CPC. No additional conductors will be considered. If the value of Zs is too high to ensure earth
fault disconnection within the required time, an error message will be generated when the network is calculated.
According to the installation method selected in the Cable tab, ‘Armour’ will be replaced with ‘Sheath’, ‘Earth Conductor’, ‘Metallic
Conduit’ or ‘Metallic Trunking’
CPC Configuration – Armour OR Separate/Integral
Initially, the Armour ONLY will be used as the CPC. No additional conductors will be considered. If the value of Zs is too high to
ensure earth fault disconnection within the required time, the Armour will be disregarded and an additional conductor will be sized,
if possible, to meet disconnection requirements (i.e., reduce the value of Zs to ensure earth fault disconnection within the required
time).
Any additional CPC conductor that may be required can be separate or integral within a multi‐core cable (Check ‘Integral conductor’).
For a separate CPC the size is automatically sized unless a size is specified in the ‘Size’ list box.
Note: this method meets the requirements of the NICEIC Technical Manual.
CPC Configuration – Separate/Integral conductor ONLY
Any Armour will be disregarded. An additional conductor will be sized, if possible, to meet disconnection requirements (i.e., reduce
the value of Zs to ensure earth fault disconnection within the required time).
Any additional CPC conductor that may be required can be separate or integral within a multi‐core cable (Check ‘Integral conductor’).
For a separate CPC the size is automatically sized unless a size is specified in the ‘Size’ list box.
According to the installation method selected in the Cable tab, the word ‘Armour’ will be replaced with ‘Sheath’, ‘Earth Conductor’,
‘Metallic Conduit’ or ‘Metallic Trunking’

CPC Configuration – Separate Conductor/Integral conductor
Where a CPC conductor other than, or in addition to, the Armour, Sheath, Earth Conductor, Metallic Conduit or Metallic Trunking is
to be used, the item selected here specifies whether that conductor will be a conductor integral to a multi‐core cable or a separate
conductor.
The integral option is only available for multi‐core cables where an unused conductor is available, e.g., for a three‐phase and neutral
circuit, the cable type must be available in 5‐core form.
Maximum CPC Size
The sizes listed include all the sizes generally available for the type of cable selected. To set a particular CPC size, uncheck Auto and
select the desired size from the list. The calculation will then check the suitability of the set CPC size.
When Auto is checked, the CPC calculations will automatically select the smallest size from the sizes listed that allows the circuit to
disconnect within the specified time limit (5s, 0.4s, etc.) To prevent the size of the CPC rising disproportionately to the phase
conductor size, a setting is applied to limit the number of sizes to which the CPC will rise above the phase conductor size. The
settings can be reached from the menu item: Preferences | Calculations | Maximum CPC Sizes. When the separate CPC Size is set to
Auto, a message is displayed next to the CPC Size setting giving details of the maximum setting.
Protection Tab
The protection tab contains settings for the selection of an overcurrent device or an overcurrent device and earth fault protection, as
required.
Circuit Protective Device (CPD) Selection
Initially the selected device will be shown as the default type:
To select another device type, click the Change button to display the Protective Device Selector dialog, where the device type can be
selected according to Manufacturer, Family, Type and Protection.
The rating can be selected as Auto, or as one of the values listed in the Rating list box. Click the Apply button to complete the
selection.

Manufacturer
The list contains the names of all the manufacturers for which CPD data is held in the ProDesign database. Every effort is made to
include as many product ranges as possible.
‘Generic’ provides a selection of ‘standard’ fuse and circuit‐breaker types.
Selecting a Manufacturer from the list filters the items listed in the Family, Type Protection and Rating boxes to devices from that
manufacturer’s product ranges.
Manufacturer Buttons
There are buttons for some manufacturers. Clicking a manufacturer’s button selects that manufacturer in the Manufacturer list.
Family
The list contains the names of available product ranges for the selected manufacturer. Selecting an item filters the contents of the
Type, Protection and Rating boxes to those available in the selected range.
Type
The list contains the names of CPD types that exist for the product range selected in the Family list. Selecting a type filters the
contents of the Protection and Rating boxes to those available in the selected type.
Protection
The list contains the types of protection available for the CPD type selected. Selecting a protection type filters the contents of the
Rating box to those ratings available for the selected protection type.
Rating
The Rating box contains a list of all the ratings that exist for the type of protection selected.
When Auto is selected, the lowest rating that complies with the calculations will be automatically selected. When a particular rating
is selected, that rating will be used and checked by the calculations for compliance.
The CPD selected will used in the circuit when the Apply button in the Protective Device Selector is clicked. The details in the
Protection tab will be updated to show the details for the new selected device:

Adding Residual Current Protection
Where a device has phase fault and earth fault protection functions (e.g.: an electronic circuit‐breaker), the earth fault function
characteristic will be used to determine disconnection for earth faults.
Where a separate residual current device (RCD) is to be used in combination with an overcurrent protective device, this can be
defined in ProDesign by selecting ‘Add‐on RCD’ (a typical example is the use of a 30 mA RCD in addition to an MCB.):
The RCD characteristic will be used to determine disconnection under earth fault conditions. The RCD type is selected in the
Protective Device Selector in a similar way to that used when selecting the overcurrent protective device, except the devices listed
will be limited to RCDs only. The devices listed are generic types offering a range of sensitivities with instantaneous and time‐delayed
tripping.
Device Selection Filters
In the Protective Device Selector dialog, finding a suitable device from the lists can be made easier by using the filters. To display the
filters panel, click the Show Filters button:
The filter functions are:
 Hide Obsolete CPDs: checking this box hides all circuit protective devices no longer commercially available;
 Devices with earth fault protection: restricts the devices listed to those having built‐in earth fault protection;
 Filter for Breaking Capacity: restricts the devices listed to those with a breaking capacity (Icu) equal to or greater
than the value in the box;
 Devices with graphical data only: restricts the devices listed to those for which the new graphical curve data and full
adjustments is available;
 MCBs and Fuses only: restricts listings to these devices only;
 Supported Manufacturers only: restricts listings to these manufacturers only. Supported manufacturers collaborate
in providing regular data checks and updates.
The filter panel can be hidden by clicking the Hide Filters button:
Overload Setting Methods
For adjustable protective devices, there are three overload setting methods. The initial setting method when the device is first
selected is determined by the setting in the Overload Adjustment dialog (select from Protective Devices in the Preferences menu).
The overload setting methods and how they are indicated in the dialog are as follows:
 Set at Maximum: the selected overload setting is the maximum setting available:

(project not calculated)

(project calculated)
 Set to Auto: when the project is calculated, the overload is adjusted to the lowest setting equal to or greater than
the design current:

(project not calculated)

(project calculated)
 Fixed: a setting is selected by the user:
Overload Setting Adjustment
The overload setting of an adjustable device can be adjusted in two places:
 In the Overload Adjustment dialog;
 In the Graph View.
The Overload Adjustment Dialog
The Overload Adjustment dialog is displayed when the Adjust Overload button in the Protection tab is clicked. If the Rating (In) of the
protective device has been set to Auto and the project has been calculated, or the Rating is set at a fixed value, the dialog will appear
as follows:
The dialog contains an Overload Setting Method panel:
‘Set manually’ will initially be selected since the primary purpose of the dialog is to allow a fixed overload setting to be manually
applied. Alternatively, the overload can be ‘Set at maximum’ or ‘Set to Auto’. When the dialog is closed using the Apply button, the
current setting will be applied.
The dialog contains boxes showing the values of the device rating and design current if the project has been calculated:

The dialog contains a panel showing details of the overload settings and below it a summary of the currently selected setting:
The panel shows, in a table format, all the available overload settings, and their absolute current values, for the selected protective
device. Where there are two settings used to set the overload (a coarse and a fine setting), they are shown as above with the
absolute value shown at the intersection of the two settings.
Where the project (and, therefore, the design current) has been calculated, the recommended setting value will be highlighted dark
green. Where there are two setting combinations that achieve the same optimum setting value, the second recommendation will be
highlighted in light green. (The primary recommendation will be the one that uses the lowest coarse setting.)
The setting value that was in effect when the dialog was initially open will be highlighted in grey. This is the setting value that will
apply if the Cancel button is used to close the dialog.
If the overload setting method is ‘Set manually’, the overload setting can be chosen by clicking on the required setting value in the
table; the adjustment details for the selected overload setting are shown below the table. For example, in the image shown above,
the selected overload value is 100 A and the required adjustments are: Io = 1; Ir = 1, which are the actual settings that need to be
made on the dials on the front of the protective device. When the dialog is closed by clicking on the Apply button, the selected
settings are applied.
At the foot of the dialog there is a View Graph button that has the same function as the one in the Protection tab. This is described in
the section ‘Graph View’.
If the protective device Rating (In) is set to Auto and the project has not been calculated, the Overload Adjustment dialog will appear
as shown below. The overload setting method can be ‘Set at maximum’ or ‘Set to Auto’ but it will not be possible to set the overload
until the nominal rating of the device has been set either by the user or by the program calculation.

Devices With Non‐graphical Data
For the majority of protective devices, full graphical data is available. For these devices the full range of setting adjustments is
represented and disconnection data for calculations is taken from the tripping characteristic resulting from the settings made. These
devices also have available a fully toleranced characteristic curve showing the full range of tripping times from maximum to
minimum tolerance limits.
For a small number of devices tripping data is held in tables, and only limited data is available for those devices with adjustable
short‐circuit protection settings. Devices may be selected for short‐circuit protection set ‘@ min’ or ‘@ max’ but disconnection data
for intermediate settings will not be available.
There are two features in the Protective Device Selector dialog that can be used to identify which type of data is available:
 In the Protection box, an asterisk (*) is used to indicate devices for which full graphical data is held.
 When the filter ‘Devices with graphical data only’ is checked, only those devices for which full graphical data is held
will be listed.
For devices with non‐graphical data, the following procedures are different to those described in the section ‘Protection Tab’ above:
 Device Adjustment;
 Graph View.
Device Adjustment for Non‐graphical Data
Overload settings are selected from the list box below the protective device description. The full range of overload settings available
on the device will be listed:
For those devices with adjustable short‐circuit or instantaneous trips, a device set ‘@ max’ or ‘@ min’ should be selected from the
Protection list in the Protective Device Selector:
NOTE: for a device with non‐graphical data, only the two adjustments described above have any effect on the outcome of the
calculations in ProDesign. Although its characteristic curve and any associated settings can be viewed and adjusted (see: ‘The Graph
View’), any adjustments made in this way will have no effect on the ProDesign calculations.
Graph View for Non‐graphical Data
For devices with non‐graphical data, only the nominal characteristic curve will be available.
Breaking Capacity
The breaking capacity of the selected CPD can be assessed in two ways:
 Fully Rated: a check is made to ensure that the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) is equal to or greater than the
calculated prospective fault current (Ipf);
 Cascade Rated: a check is made to ensure that the cascaded breaking capacity is equal to or greater than the
calculated prospective fault current (Ipf). The cascaded rating depends on the performance of the associated CPD on
the supply side of the one under consideration. Cascaded ratings are only available for combinations of supply side
and load side CPDs tested and rated by the manufacturer. The selection is only available when such a combination is
present.

No Protection
This should be checked only if the circuit has no circuit protective device (CPD).
Where No Protection is checked, the cable sizing, short‐circuit and earth fault calculations for the circuit are performed using the
characteristics of the nearest CPD in the network on the supply side of the circuit.

Comments Tab
Cable Data Entry: Spread Control
The Data Entry Spread Control allows settings to be made to cables, individually and in groups, without the need to navigate to each
cable on the single‐line diagram and edit the contents of each individual dialog.
To display the control, select Data Entry from the Edit menu or the Settings toolbar:

Full details are given in the section: Data Entry Spread Control.
Busbar Settings
There are four busbar components in ProDesign which can be used to construct busbar systems:
End Feed Unit
Used as the connection point for the cable supplying a busbar system; a correctly connected end feed will have one cable connection
and one busbar connection:

Centre Feed Unit
Used as the connection point for the cable supplying a centre fed busbar system; a correctly connected centre feed will have one
cable connection and two busbar connections:
Tap Off Unit
Used to connect outgoing cable circuits to a busbar system; a correctly connected Tap Off will have one or two busbar connections
and one cable connection:
Busbar
Used to represent the busbar connection between an end feed and a tap off, a centre feed and a tap off, or a tap‐off and a tap off:

The settings in the dialogs for the busbar components are described below.
Main Dialog Area:
Id No.
The text reference for the busbar used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Reference box is checked.
Name.
The secondary text reference for the busbar used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Reference box is
checked.
Connection
From: gives the reference of the network item connected to the supply end of the busbar.

To: gives the reference of the network item connected to the load end of the busbar.
User Type
Information
Where information has been made available by the busbar manufacturer for the selected busbar type, this can be viewed by clicking
on the Information… button. The information will be displayed using Adobe Acrobat Reader which must be installed (a copy is
included on the AMTECH program CD).
Where information is not available, the button will be greyed out: .
Length Tab
Section Length
Used to set the length for an individual section of busbar (e.g., from tap off to tap off) in a busbar system.
Total Length
Displays the total length of the busbar system, comprising the sum of the lengths of each individual section.
Manufacturer / Range / Type
The currently selected busbar Manufacturer / Range / Type are displayed. These settings can be made in the Details tab.
Details Tab:
The Details Tab contains the settings that are used to determine the busbar configuration:

Manufacturer
Select the busbar manufacturer from the list. The ranges and types shown in the boxes below will restricted those available for that
manufacturer.
Range / Type
Select the range and type from the lists to complete the busbar selection.
Rating
For busbars where the rating is set to Auto, when the project is calculated the minimum suitable rating will automatically be selected
from the range of ratings available for the selected busbar type. Alternatively, uncheck the Auto box and select a rating from the list.
When the project is calculated, the selected size will be checked for suitability.
Temp (°C)
Set the temperature to match the average ambient temperature at which the busbar is to operate.
Phase
Displays the configuration of the phase connections. To change the busbar phasing, change the phasing of the supplying cable.
Poles
Set the number of live poles with which the busbar is equipped.
Installation
Set the installation orientation, e.g., a busbar riser should be set to ‘Vertical’. Some busbar types are derated when installed
vertically.
CPC Tab:
Set the busbar component(s) being used as the circuit protective conductor. The choices offered match the earthing arrangements
for the selected busbar.
Optional Data Tab:
A short text description can be typed in for busbar Function and Location. These will appear in the relevant reports.

Comments Tab:
End Feed Unit
Id No.
The text reference for the End Feed used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Reference box is checked.
Name.
The secondary text reference for the End Feed used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Reference box is
checked.
Connection
From: gives the reference of the cable supplying the End Feed.
To: gives the reference of the busbar connected to the End Feed.
Centre Feed Unit
Id No.
The text reference for the Centre Feed used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Reference box is checked.
Name.
The secondary text reference for the Centre Feed used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Reference box is
checked.
Connection
From: gives the reference of the cable supplying the Centre Feed.
To: gives the reference of the busbar connected to the Centre Feed.
Tap Off Unit

Main Dialog Area:
Id No.
The text reference for the Tap Off used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Reference box is checked.
Name.
The secondary text reference for the Tap Off used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Reference box is
checked.
Function
A short text description can be typed in for the Tap Off Function. This will appear in the relevant reports.
Connection
From: gives the reference of the busbar supplying the Tap Off.
To: gives the reference of the cable connected to the load side of Tap Off.
User Type
Protection Tab:
The Protection Tab contains the settings for the circuit protective device for the circuit connected to the Tap Off. For details, see
Conductors | Cables | Protection Tab.
Diversity Tab
The diversity controls are similar to those for the Distribution Board (see: Distribution Systems Settings > Distribution Board Settings
> Diversity Tab).
The only type of diversity setting available is Manual, i.e., a setting between 0.01 and 2 which is used to multiply the total connected
load to find the diversified load. Diversity is applied to the load connected to the Tap Off.
Example: Load connected to Tap Off = 120 A; Diversity setting = 0.8; Diversified Load = 96 A.
Comments Tab:

Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
The UPS component can be used to model the following functionality:
Connection points
There are four UPS connection points, two inputs and two outputs:
1: the battery charging connection or combined charging connection and bypass supply connection.
2: the bypass supply connection only.
3: the power output connection or the combined power output connection and bypass load connection.
4: the bypass connection load only.
Operating Modes
The four available operating modes are:
Connections to 1 and 3. The battery charge is maintained by the supply connected to 1. With the UPS on‐line, the supply to the load
connected to 3 is delivered from the batteries via the inverter. In bypass mode the supply to the load connected to 3 is delivered
from connection 1 through the internal bypass switch.
Connections to 1, 2 and 3. The battery charge is maintained by supply connected to 1. With the UPS on‐line, the supply to the load
connected to 3 is delivered from the batteries via the inverter. In bypass mode the supply to the load connected to 3 is delivered
from the supply connected to 2 through the bypass switch.
Connections to 1, 2, 3 and 4. The battery charge is maintained by the supply connected to 1. With the UPS on‐line, the supply to the
load connected to 3 is delivered from the batteries via the inverter. In bypass mode the supply to the load connected to 4 is
delivered from the supply connected to 2 through the bypass switch.

Connections to 1, 3 and 4. The battery charge is maintained by the supply connected to 1. With the UPS on‐line, the supply to the
load connected to 3 is delivered from the batteries via the inverter. In bypass mode the supply to the load connected to 4 is
delivered from connection 1 through the bypass switch. The UPS component can be used both as a source of supply for the whole
network or located in the distribution system providing an uninterruptible supply to a board. When used as a source of supply,
connections 1 and 2 are not used.
UPS Settings
The settings in the UPS dialog are described below.
Main Dialog Area
The dialog header area contains the same settings as for other components described above.
The dialog footer area contains the same settings as for other components described above.
Voltage Tab
Input Phase Connection
Determined by settings at the project supply source. (Not applicable when used as a supply source.)
Output Phase Connection
Phase settings applicable to the network connected to the UPS output. (Selectable when used as a supply source.)
Indicates the number of parallel UPS units used to supply the load. The ‘N +’ setting allows the desired level of redundancy to be set,
e.g. a setting ‘N + 1’ indicates that the number of units in parallel are one more than is required based on the load current alone.

Input Voltage / Output Voltage
Determined by settings at the project supply source. (Input voltage not applicable when used as a supply source.)
Input Frequency / Output Frequency
Determined by settings at the project supply source. (Input frequency not applicable when used as a supply source.)
Applicable to the network connected to the UPS output.
Close Coupled UPS
Only active when the UPS is directly connected to the load side of a board. Determines whether the battery charger and bypass
connections are to be combined or switched separately.
UPS Type
When the UPS type is selected as Online, the inverter supply cable will be sized for both the battery charge current and the load
current. When Offline, the inverter supply cable will be sized for the load charging current only.
Inverter Tab
Output Rating
UPS rating can be selected in Auto, based on the calculated diversified load and typical UPS ratings. A manual rating can also be
inputted within a range of 1 to 250 kVA.
Number in Parallel
Settings from the Identical Parallel Supplies panel in the Voltage tab.
Inrush Multiplier
The multiple of the normal charging current experienced when the battery charge is completely depleted.
Maximum Charging Current
The maximum normal charging current.
Harmonic Current
3rd harmonic content in the inverter output current.
Inverter Type
Setting made in the Voltage tab.
Fault Capacity
The maximum output fault current for: 1 cycle; 60 seconds; continuous – sustainable for 10 min.

Bypass Switch Status
Selected state indicated on the single‐line diagram.
Bypass Input Conductor
Setting determined by interconnections made on the single‐line diagram. A common conductor is sized for both the battery charger
supply and the load current in contrast to sizing separate conductors for separate functions. The number of parallel units determined
by the ‘N +’ setting.
Bypass Output Conductor
Settings determined by interconnections made on the single‐line diagram. The number of parallel units determined by the ‘N +’
setting.
Earthing Tab
Earthing Inherited
Default setting: the load side connection is solidly connected through circuit protective conductors to the earth connection at the
project supply source.
Separate Earthing
Defines local earth connection at UPS. When Downstream Only is selected, the earth fault calculations include the local earth
provision only, the supply source earthing is ignored. When Downstream Only is not selected, the calculation takes into account both
the local earth and the connection back to the supply source earth.
The Local Earth Impedance panel contains a calculator to obtain the electrode and its bonding conductor impedances to be
determined. Otherwise the impedance values can entered directly into the data input boxes. Clicking the Apply button applies the
local earth impedance values. The Earthing Impedance panel shows the total earth impedance at the UPS.

Protection Tab
There are separate protection panels for the inverter and the bypass. The default setting for the bypass is No Protection, in which
case protection will be provided by the supply side protective device. The Bypass Output Protection panel will only be enabled where
a separate bypass output cable is connected.

Load Data Entry: Dialogs
There are four categories of load type in ProDesign:
 Non‐motor loads;
 Motor loads;
 Street Lighting.
 Power Factor Correction
This section describes data input contained within the dialogs for these loads.
Final circuits, comprising the cable supplying a load and the load itself, can be defined in ProDesign in one of two ways:
 On the network drawing: draw a cable connected to a switchboard, distribution board, consumer unit or busbar tap
off; place a Load or Motor symbol at the end of the cable.
 Within the Circuit Diagram within a Distribution Board or consumer unit dialog, display the Circuit dialog to define
the cable and load details.
 For details see: Network Settings | Boards | Distribution Boards | Circuit Diagram.
Main Dialog Area Settings ‐ Motor and Non‐motor loads

The controls in the main dialog area are common to both non‐motor loads and motor loads.
Id No.
The text reference for the Load or Motor used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Reference box is checked.
Name.
The secondary text reference for the Load or Motor used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Reference box is
checked.
Connections
Shows the reference of the cable supplying the load (Non‐motor load).
Shows the starter location and from where it is supplied (Motor load).
User Type

Non‐motor Load Settings
Details Tab
Type
A list of load types. Selection of the correct load type is important because calculation rules vary according to load types; specifically
the rules for earth fault disconnection times, classification of load types for load analysis and diversity settings.
Load
The connected load current used as the design current (Ib) in the calculation for the selection of the CPD rating [InIb].
Power Factor
The power factor of the load current.
3rd Harmonic
The level of third harmonic distortion in the load current expressed as a percentage of the fundamental current.
Earth Fault Disconnection Current
When set to ‘Auto’ the earth fault disconnection time limit is automatically calculated based on BS 7671:2008 (2011) 411.3.2.
When set to fixed the desired earth fault disconnection time limit can be selected from the list. If the manually selected earth fault
disconnection time limit exceeds the value stated in BS 7671:2008 (2011) 411.3.2 then an error message is reported during project
calculation.
Diversity
Diversity for final circuits can be set in two ways: at the dialog for the DB feeding the final circuit and this setting. This setting can be
made within the range 0.1 to 2. The effective setting for this load circuit will be the two settings multiplied together. This is shown in
the Total Diversity box. The diversity setting in the Load dialog is fixed at 1 when the diversity setting at the feeding DB is Table H2.
The Standby setting effectively sets the diversity for the circuit to zero.
The CPD sizing for a final circuit is unaffected by the diversity setting. Example: Load = 20 A, Diversity = 0.5; the CPD rating would be
selected as 20 A, the load added to the feeding DB for this circuit would be 20 x 0.5 = 10 A.
Supply Voltage
The system voltage corresponds to the value entered in the dialog for the network active source. It is shown in the form Three‐
phase/Single‐phase.

Voltage Drop Tab
Load Details
At the top of the tab there are two read‐only text boxes labelled ‘Type’ and ‘Load (A)’ containing the same data as in the
corresponding controls in the Details tab.
Load Circuit Cable Sizing
The settings in this box control how the sizing for the cable connecting the Load/Motor will be carried out. There are two controls
only one of which is enabled at any one time.
 When the cable feeding the Load/Motor is set to ‘Auto’ the ‘Limit maximum cable size to’ control is enabled and the
‘Cable size fixed at’ control is disabled. The size limit box allows a size to be chosen from the list. The default setting
is ‘No Limit’; this has the same effect as choosing the largest cable size. Selecting a lower size limits the range of
cable sizes available to the Auto cable sizing processes.
 When the cable size feeding the Load/Motor is fixed in the Cable dialog, the ‘Cable Size Fixed at’ control is enabled
and displays the user‐selected cable size.
Voltage Drop Limit Settings
The lower part of the tab contains two boxes either of which can be selected by clicking the radio button beside it; they are ‘Apply
Global Limit’ and ‘Define Specific Limit’ group box.
Apply Global Limit
The box contains read‐only text boxes summarising the settings being applied from the source to this load.


The values will be determined according to the type of supply, load type, load length and the settings in the Voltage Drop Settings
dialog, as follows:
 ‘The limit set … (%)’. If User Defined has been selected, the value entered will be displayed. If Apply BS 7671 has
been selected, the value will depend on the type of supply and load type as follows:
o Public Supply, Lighting Load: 3 %; Public Supply, Non‐Lighting Load: 5 %;
o Private Supply, Lighting Load: 6 %; Private Supply, Non‐Lighting Load: 8 %.
 ‘Wiring System Length’. The sum of the lengths of the conductors between the source and the load. ‘N/A’ if User
Defined is selected.
 ‘Extra Allowance’. Calculated as BS 7671:2008 (2011) Appendix 4, 6.4.
Both the ‘Wiring System Length’ and ‘Extra Allowance’ control will contain ‘N/A’ if the ‘Add additional voltage drop allowance for
wiring systems over 100 m of 0.005 % per metre over 100 m (max. 0.5 %)’ option is de‐selected on the ‘Voltage Drop Settings’ dialog
or if User Defined is selected.
‘Total Voltage Drop Allowance’. The sum of the values held in the two percentage boxes above.
Define Specific Limit
The box contains controls the setting of a specific limit for the voltage drop from the source to this load, either as: Voltage drop Limit
(%) or Minimum Voltage at Load terminals (V). These controls function in the same way as those in the Voltage Drop Settings dialog.
Comments Tab
Motor Load Settings
A motor circuit will generally include a starter and a motor. The significance of the starter is that it contains the setting for the motor
overload, and the sizing of the conductors in the motor circuit will be based on that setting. Separately the overcurrent protective
device will provide short‐circuit protection for the entire circuit.
Optionally, a motor circuit can be constructed without a starter, in which case it will be assumed that the circuit overcurrent
protective device will provide both overload and short‐circuit protection.
Motor Starter


Starter Position Panel
Shows the starter position in the circuit: Starter at Board; Starter between Board and Motor; or Starter at Motor.
Motor Protection Tab:
 ‘Motor Load (A)’ read‐only text box showing the same value as the Load text box in the Load form.
 ‘Overload Setting at Starter (A)’ text box initially shows the same value as that in the ‘Motor Load (A)’ text box. The
initial value can be modified to any greater value. The value set will be used as the basis for the cable sizing
calculations.
Circuit Protection Tab
 Protection Settings: the same controls as in the top part of the standard Protection tab with text boxes for
information only below. (see: Protection Tab)
 ‘Overcurrent Protective Device Motor Rating (A)’ which is the maximum motor load current for which the device is
suitable. Where the rating is set to Auto and the project has not been calculated, the box will show ‘Auto’. Once the
project has been calculated, the rating will be shown in brackets, e.g., ‘Auto (25)’.
 ‘Motor Load (A)’ a copy of the one in the Motor Protection tab.

Motor Details Tab
Motor Details: a copy of those settings in the Motor Details form.
Motor Details Tab
Type
A list of motor load types. Selection of the correct load type is important because calculation rules vary according to motor load
types; specifically the rules for diversity settings selection of the CPD for different starting methods and earth fault disconnection
times.
Rating
The rating in kW is used, in conjunction with the No. of Poles, to find typical values of power factor and efficiency which are inserted
into their respective edit boxes in the dialog. The supply voltage, rating, power factor and efficiency are then used to calculate the
load current. Alternatively, the load current and power factor can be typed directly into the Load and Power Factor boxes. The CPD
and cable sizing calculations are based on the load and power factor; the rating (kW), No. of Poles and Efficiency are not used for this
purpose.
No. of Poles
The No. of Poles is used, in conjunction with the rating in kW, to find typical values of power factor and efficiency which are inserted
into their respective edit boxes in the dialog. The supply voltage, rating, power factor and efficiency are then used to calculate the
load current.
Load
ProDesign can provide the calculated load current for a motor two ways:

from the values entered by the user for Rating and No. of Poles. Typical power factors and efficiencies are used to calculate the load
current; from values entered for power factor and efficiency by the user.
The load current is used as the design current (Ib) in the calculation for cable sizing [IzIb]. NOTE: this is not the same as the rule used
for non‐motor loads.
Power Factor
The power factor of the motor under steady load conditions. When the user inputs the motor Rating and No. of Poles, a typical
power factor is inserted in the box.
Efficiency
The efficiency of the motor under normal load conditions. When the user inputs the motor Rating and No. of Poles, a typical
efficiency is inserted in the box.
3rd Harmonic
The level of third harmonic distortion in the load current expressed as a percentage of the fundamental current. Example: Load
current = 40 A, 3rd Harmonic = 25 %; 3rd harmonic current = 10 A. For motors, harmonic distortion would only be present where
electronic control equipment is used.
calculation.
Diversity
Diversity for final circuits can be set in two ways: at the dialog for the DB feeding the final circuit and this setting. This setting can be
made within the range 0.1 to 2. The overall diversity setting for this circuit will be the two settings multiplied together. This is shown
in the Total Diversity box. The diversity setting in the Load dialog is fixed at 1 when the diversity setting at the feeding DB is Table H2.
It would normally be appropriate to set diversity for a motor to 1.0 in the Motor dialog – at the final circuit level.
The Standby setting effectively sets the diversity for the circuit to zero. Example: two motors connected to one DB, one Duty and one
Standby. Set the Duty one as ‘Duty’ (Diversity = 1) and the other as ‘Standby’ (Diversity = 0). The result will be the cable for each
motor will be sized for the load current; the contribution to the total design current at the DB will be the load current for just one
motor.
Supply Voltage
The system voltage corresponds to the value entered in the dialog for the network active source. It is shown in the form Three‐
phase/Single‐phase.
Starter Position
Indicates the position at which the Starter component has been inserted in the cable supplying the motor.
Assess Voltage Drop on Starting
The calculation that assesses voltage drop on motor starting adds the voltage drop caused by the starting currents of all selected
motors to the network voltage drop levels caused by load currents. Checking the box includes the motor in the group of motors
included in the assessment.
Start Current
Value of starting current used in motor starting voltage drop assessment. The typical value inserted in the box can be overwritten if
preferred.
Start PF
Value of power factor used in motor starting voltage drop assessment. The typical value inserted in the box can be overwritten if
preferred.
Include Motor Fault Contribution
The calculation that assesses voltage drop on motor starting adds the voltage drop caused by the starting currents of all selected
motors to the network voltage drop levels caused by load currents. Checking the box includes the motor in the group of motors
included in the assessment.

Zm
Value of equivalent motor impedance used for fault contribution assessment. The typical value inserted in the box can be
overwritten if preferred.
Fault PF
Value of power factor used in motor fault contribution assessment. The typical value inserted in the box can be overwritten if
preferred. If modified, the X/R ratio will recalculate.
X/R
The Reactance/Resistance ratio of the equivalent motor impedance used for fault contribution assessment. The typical value
inserted in the box can be overwritten if preferred. If modified, the Fault PF value will recalculate.
Street Lighting Settings
Street Lighting circuits in ProDesign are made up of a series of Lighting Columns interconnected by cables. For details on
constructing street lighting circuits, see:
The Project Drawing | Drawing The Network | Street Lighting.
Data inputs are similar to those described for the Cable and Load dialogs, whose contents are described in: Network Settings |
Conductors | Cables and Network Settings | Loads.
Data input details that vary from those in the standard cable and load dialogs are described below:
Lighting Column Dialog
The Lighting Column dialog differs from the Load dialog as follows:
Cable Tab

The Column Height describes the length of the cable run in the lighting column, and replaces the Length input.
Load Tab

Type
The type of lamp being used should be selected from the list.
Lamp Rating
The rating can be selected from the list; otherwise select ‘User Defined’.
Running Current
If a lamp rating is selected from the list in the Lamp Rating box, the running current will be found from a table of typical operating
currents for the lamp type selected multiplied by the number of lamps. If the lamp rating is selected as ‘User Defined’ the running
current should be entered by the user.
Please Note: ProDesign does not consider the effect of inrush current. The user will need to ensure that the selected protective
devices are suitable.

No. of Lamps
The number of lamps fitted to the column should be entered. The running current is calculated from the lamp rating and the number
of lamps.
Power Factor / Third Harmonic
These inputs works in a similar way to the Running Current above. Typical values will be inserted when the lamp rating is selected as
‘User Defined’.
calculation.

Protection Tab

The default setting is ‘No Protection’ which assumes that the column cabling is unprotected. This can be changed to select a
protection device as required.
Cable Dialog
For the interconnecting cables between the lighting columns, the following are changed compared to the normal cable dialog:
Cable to 1st Column

The Length to 1st Column describes the length of the cable from the distribution board and the first lighting column, and replaces the
Length input.
Cable Column to Column

The Length Col/Col describes the length of the cable from one lighting column to the next, and replaces the Length input.

Junction Box
Id No.
The text reference for the Junction Box used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Reference box is checked.
Name.
The secondary text reference for the Junction Box used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Reference box is
checked.
Connection
From: gives the reference of the cable supplying the End Feed.
To: gives the reference of the busbar connected to the End Feed.
Power Factor Correction
Main Dialog Area:
Id No.
The text reference for the Power Factor Correction used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display Reference box is
checked.
Name.
The secondary text reference for the Power Factor Correction used in reports. It is also displayed on the drawing if the Display
Reference box is checked.

Connection
From: gives the reference of the cable supplying the Power Factor Correction.

Power Factor Correction Tab
Power Factor to be Correct to:
The power factor that the system is to be corrected to by the equipment.
Existing.
These fields give the power factor, kW, kVA and kVAr of the system at the point of connection. They are calculated by the system
and are not editable by the user.
Target.
These fields give the power factor, kW, kVA and kVAr of the system at the point of connection when the corrected power factor is
applied. They are calculated by the system and are not editable by the user.
Required Capacitance.
This field gives the calculated kVAr rating of the correction unit to obtain the required power factor at the distribution board. It is
calculated by the system and is not editable by the user.

Attachments
The Attachments button at the foot of the component dialog launches the ‘Attachment Manager’ dialog. This feature allows you to
associate documentation files (e.g. images and PDF files) to each component.
For example, technical literature relating to an air conditioning load could be attached to the relevant ProDesign Load item. This
would allow easy access to this information in the future.
Type
The Attachment Manager can be used to add or modify attached files associated with any component in your ProDesign project.
The Type field enables you to easily search for the component you require. Alternatively click ‘All’ to view all attachments.
Item
Use the ‘Item’ options to specify which component on your ProDesign project that you wish to add attachments to. Alternatively, use
the ‘All’ tick box if you wish to see all the attachments for the selected component Type.
Attachment Details
This area displays the attachments associated with the selected ProDesign component(s).
To add an attachment click the ‘Add’ button and browse to the required file.
Double click on a row number to open an attached file, or select the row and click ‘Open’
To disassociate an attachment select the row and click ‘Remove’

Pack
ProDesign can enclose any attached files in a zip file using the ‘Pack’ option. This allows feature allows easy transportation of file
attachments along with ProDesign project files.
If you wish a file to be included in the ‘packing’ process then ensure that the ‘Pack’ option is ticked. If you wish to transfer the
attachment files then simply select ‘Attachments’ from the ProDesign ‘File’ menu and choose ‘Pack’. This will create a zip file
containing the actual attached files in the same folder and with the same name as the ProDesign project.
Load data Entry: Spread Control
The Data Entry Spread Control allows settings to be made to loads, individually and in groups, without the need to navigate to each
load on the single‐line diagram and edit the contents of each individual dialog.
To display the control, select Data Entry from the Edit menu or the Settings toolbar:

Full details are given in the section: Data Entry Spread Control.

Data Entry Spread Control
The Data Entry Spread Control allows settings to be made to cables and loads, individually or in groups, without the need to navigate
to each component on the single‐line diagram and edit the contents of each individual dialog.
To display the control, select Data Entry from the Edit menu or from the Settings toolbar:

The control is normally positioned at the base of the ProDesign window. Its height can be adjusted by dragging the upper edge of the
title bar:
The settings available are generally the same as those in the Cable, Load Details and Motor Details dialogs and are contained in the
same tab pages. Additionally, for cables, there is a Reference tab containing settings that control the format of the text references
used to identify cables.

Amtech Group Data Entry Spread Control  173

Data Table
A table lists the settings for each cable (or load or motor, depending on the selected tab) in the project, each row containing the
settings for each cable (or load or motor).
The settings data is read‐only and shows the current state of the settings for each listed component. Changes to settings are made
using the data entry controls in the top row of the table.
Data Entry
The data entry area at the top of table contains the controls used to change settings for all of the selected cables (or loads or motors)
below.
The various settings are available as they would be in a dialog. Settings are applied as follows:
 Combo Box Settings: (e.g., Phase, Cable Type, Installation Method, etc.). Select a new setting from the drop‐down
list. As soon as the new selection is made, it is applied to the components currently selected.
 Text Box: (e.g., Length, Ambient Temperature, etc.). Double‐click in the box, edit the value. The new value is applied
to the selected components when moving to another setting or by pressing the Return key.
Selecting Cables
The settings made in the data entry area at the top of the settings data table are applied to the component(s) selected at the time
the settings are applied. To select an individual component, click on the row for that component; it will be highlighted to indicate
that it is selected. Picture shows FC‐3 selected:
Multiple component selections can be made, in which case settings made will be applied to all of the selected components. Multiple
selections can be made as follows:
 Contiguous Rows can be selected by one of two means:
Click and drag from the first to the last row to be selected.
Click the first row, Shift‐Click the last row. Picture shows SM‐4, SM‐3, SM‐2, SM‐1, FC‐3 selected:
174  Data Entry Spread Control Amtech Group

 Non‐contiguous rows are selected by using Ctrl‐Click to select each of the rows to be selected. Picture shows SM‐3,
SM‐1, FC‐3 selected:
Settings Applied to Multiple Components
When applying settings to an individual component, the procedure is exactly the same as when working in the dialog for that
component. Generally the logical way to proceed is to start at the left of the first tab and work across, then move to the second tab
and so on. In this way each setting made determines what settings will subsequently be available (e.g., if an armoured cable type is
selected, the next setting, Installation Method, will include methods such as ‘buried in ground’ which would not be available for non‐
armoured cables).
When settings are applied to multiple components, the same principle applies. If a group of components with widely different
settings are selected, many settings will not be available; only those settings compatible with all the selected components will be
enabled. This should be dealt with by moving through the settings from left to right as when making settings for an individual
components. However, some settings, such as Protective Device selection, are not dependent on other settings and can be freely
made, even to a group of cables of different types and with different installation conditions.
When changes are to be applied to more than one component at a time a warning box is displayed:
Clicking Yes allows the settings to be applied; clicking No cancels the action.

If preferred, the warning can be suppressed by clicking the button at the bottom of the box. The message will not re‐appear during
the current session. When ProDesign is re‐opened the message will once again be displayed before changes can be made to multiple
components. Also see below: Toolbar / Multiple Cable Edit Warning Message.
Reference Tab
With the exception of the Reference tab, the settings in all the other tabs work in a similar way to the equivalent tabs in the
component dialogs.
The controls in the Reference tab set the format of the text used to identify existing cables on the drawing and in reports. The
settings are:
 Style. Standard: the cable is identified by an ‘Id No.’ with a format determined by the settings Prefix, Body,
Increment and Suffix described below.
Connected To: the cable is identified by the component which is connected to it on the load side (e.g., a cable supplying DB4
will have the Id No. ‘DB4’). The Suffix setting (see below) can also be used (e.g., a cable supplying DB4 with suffix ‘sub‐main’
will have the Id No. ‘DB4‐ sub‐main’).
Connected From: the cable is identified by the component which is connected to it on the supply side (e.g., a cable
connected to DB3 will have the Id No. ‘DB3’). The Suffix setting (see below) can also be used (e.g., a cable connected to DB3
with suffix ‘sub‐main’ will have the Id No. ‘DB3‐ sub‐main’).
 Prefix. When the Style is set as Standard, Prefix determines the text used for the first part of the Id No. (e.g.,
‘Cable’).
 Body. Sets the numerical part of the cable Id. No. This is automatically generated normally to provide unique
numbers in sequence. The Body setting can be used to overwrite the number automatically allocated for a cable.
 Suffix. Defines a text string that will be appended to the Id. No. for the selected cables.
 Include Way/Phase. Appends Way and Phase details to the Id No. (e.g., 3‐phase Cable 74 connected to Way 5:
‘Cable‐74‐5‐L1,L2,L3).
Toolbar
Undo/Redo

Using the buttons on the Toolbar, up to 10 levels of data settings can be undone or redone. Note: the Undo/Redo buttons on the
Cable Data Entry toolbar and the ProDesign Standard toolbar perform the same actions.
Data Table Sort

The order in which cables are listed can be changed by using the Sort buttons on the toolbar.
Ascending Sort: sorts the selected components in ascending alphabetical order. The sort is based on the selected
column, e.g., if the Manufacturer column in the Protection tab is selected, the cables are listed with device
manufacturers ordered alphabetically.
Descending Sort: as above but sorted in descending alphabetical order.
Custom Sort: displays a dialog containing controls to allow the sort to be defined based on multiple columns. Click the
button to display the Sort dialog:

The controls in the dialog can be used to select the columns on which the sort is to take place and the order in which they
are to be sorted. The example shown above will sort the cables by Id. No., then Name, then Phase, then Type and then by
load current..
To select the sort columns, click on one or more in the left hand box and click the button with the right arrow; the selected
columns will appear in the right hand (Sort by) box.

To change the order of the sort, select an item in the right hand box and click the Up or Down button as required.

The check box at the bottom of the dialog:
allows the sort to be carried out in ascending or descending alphabetical order.

Copy/Paste

Using the Copy and Paste buttons, the settings for one cable can be copied to one or more cables.

Copy: copies all the settings for the selected row (not available when more than one row is selected).

Paste: pastes all the copied settings into the selected rows.
Locking and Unlocking Components

Components are normally unlocked allowing any settings to be changed. Locking a component prevents changes being made to its
settings.

Lock: select one or more components, then click the Lock button. The lock symbol will appear in the first column of the rows
containing the selected components .

Unlock: clicking the Unlock button unlocks all components.
Components Filter

The filter hides all components except those selected by the filter process.
Click on the Filter button to display the Components Filter dialog:
Three filtering mechanisms are included, each in a separate group box as follows:
 By Text Match: the string entered in the text box is used to filter for Id. No. or Name or both depending on which of
the ‘Include Id. No.’ and ‘Include Name’ boxes are checked.
 For Cables Connected to Component Type. Select from: All Components, Distribution Board, Consumer Unit,
Switchboard, Load, Motor, Tap‐off, Lighting Column, Source, Transformer, Generator, Power Factor Unit, Junction
Box. All the cables connected to the selected component type will be listed in the ‘For Cables Connected to Selected
Components’ box.

 For Cables Connected to Selected Components. The box will contain a list of those cables remaining after the
application of the filter settings on the left hand side of the dialog. The list can be further filtered, if required, by de‐
selecting some of the listed cables.
When the Apply button is clicked, only the cables selected by the filter process will be visible in the cable data table. All other cables
will be hidden.
Hidden cables can be made visible by clicking the Show Cable button (see below).
Showing and Hiding Components

The details for all components are normally visible in the cable data table.

Hide: select one or more components and then click the Hide button. The details for the selected components will no longer be
visible. (The Filter feature can also be used to hide selected components.)

Show: click the Show button to display the details for all components. This action can be used to re‐display components previously
hidden either by the application of the Hide button or the Filter function.
Multiple Component Edit Warning Message

By default a warning box is displayed when attempting to make changes to multiple components.

Hide Warnings: click the button to suppress the appearance of the warning box for the remainder of the current session. On re‐
opening ProDesign, the setting will revert to Show Warnings.

Show Warnings: click the button to restore the appearance of the warning message.
Templates

Click the button to reveal a list of the names of all the currently defined templates for the selected component type. Click a name in
the list to apply the template settings to the currently selected component(s).


Graph View
Protective device characteristics can be viewed and adjusted in the Graph View. These include overcurrent and earth fault operating
characteristics and energy let‐through characteristics. Also shown are the thermal withstand characteristics of circuit conductors.
Within the Graph View the following functions are available:
 Inspection of overcurrent and earth fault time/current characteristics, including operating time in relation to fault
current levels and time/current discrimination;
 Protection setting adjustments;
 Inspection of overcurrent and earth fault energy let‐through characteristics, including comparison with conductor
thermal withstand characteristics.
Displaying the Graph View
The Graph View can be accessed from:
 The project single‐line diagram: select a component (Load, Cable, etc.), then click the View Graph button
on the Calculate Toolbar.
 The characteristics of the device protecting the selected component and those upstream on a path back to the
supply source will be displayed.
 The Circuit Protection tab of the Cable dialog: click the View Graph button , the characteristic of the
selected device will be displayed. The time/current or the energy/current characteristic will be displayed depending
on the selection made by clicking on the down arrow on the button:
Selecting Graph Views
Four views of the graph are available: ‘Overcurrent + Time/Current’, ‘Earth Fault + Time/Current’, ‘Overcurrent + Energy/Current’
and ‘Earth Fault + Energy/Current’, selectable using the toolbar controls:

The Time/Current views can be used to check discrimination; the Energy/Current views to compare conductor thermal withstands
with protective device energy let‐through levels. The features available in each of the views are described below.
Setting Devices
Adjustments can be made to any of the settings for a displayed characteristic.
The settings are grouped in categories:
L: overload; S: short‐circuit; I: instantaneous; G: earth fault
Each setting is labelled with the identifier used by the manufacturer, e.g. Io, Ir, I3,etc.:
Amtech Group Graph View  181

Settings are adjusted by clicking on the arrow buttons. The results of any changes can be seen on the graph as they are made.
NOTE: Settings are only active in the relevant view, i.e. Overcurrent settings in the Overcurrent views and Earth Fault in the Earth
Fault views:
Closing the Graph View
The Graph View can be closed by clicking one of the two buttons: Save and Exit or Cancel:
If Save and Exit is clicked, any changes to protective device settings made in the Graph View will be saved and applied in ProDesign.
Clicking cancel causes any changes to be discarded; device settings in ProDesign will remain unchanged.
ProDesign Graphical Discrimination
The time/current characteristics of the selected protective devices are displayed in the ‘Overcurrent + Time/Current’ and ‘Earth
Fault+Time/Current’ views.

The graph is calibrated:
 Vertical axis: time 0.01 s to 10,000 s;
 Horizontal axis: current 1 A (10 mA, Earth Fault) to 1 MA;
The data displayed in the graphs allow visual inspection of time/current discrimination. Overlaps in the characteristics for two
devices indicate areas where discrimination may fail.
The devices are identified in the single‐line diagram to the right of the graph. For adjustable devices, clicking the device description in
the single‐line diagram displays the device protection settings panel to the right of the single‐line diagram. Adjustments to the
settings can be made to improve discrimination or for other purposes as required.
When a device is selected, indication is shown on the graph of the fault current for the relevant circuit. In the Overcurrent view the
minimum and maximum phase fault currents are shown; in the Earth Fault view, the earth fault current is shown:

See also: Discrimination.
182  Graph View Amtech Group

ProDesign Graphical Energy Let‐through
The energy let‐through characteristics of the selected protective device is displayed in the ‘Overcurrent + Energy/Current’ and ‘Earth
Fault+Energy/Current’ views, together with the thermal withstand characteristics of the conductors in the associated circuit.

The graph is calibrated:
 Vertical axis: Energy 1x102 to 1x1011 A2s;
 Horizontal axis: current 1 A (10 mA, Earth Fault) to 1 MA;
The data displayed in the graphs allow a visual comparison of the relative levels of energy let‐through by the protective device and
the thermal withstand of the conductor in the circuit being protected. This provides a graphical representation of the adiabatic
check. For the line conductor, the adiabatic requirement is satisfied where the conductor withstand is equal to or greater than the
device energy let‐through at the minimum prospective fault current (Pscc Min). The earth fault adiabatic check compares the circuit
protective conductor (cpc) withstand to the device let‐through at the earth fault current (Ief).
The devices are identified in the single‐line diagram to the right of the graph. To select a device, click the device description at the
right of the single‐line diagram:
The following items are shown on the graph for the selected device:
 The protective device let‐through characteristic;
 The thermal withstand characteristic of the conductor in the circuit protected by the selected protective device;
 The thermal withstand characteristic of alternative conductors.
For adjustable devices, protection settings can be changed as required.
Where no graphical thermal energy let‐through data is held for a protective device type, a message is displayed on the graph when
that device is selected:


‘Overcurrent + Energy/Current’ View
A typical ‘Overcurrent + Energy/Current’ graph view is shown below:
Included in the view are the:
 Line conductor (25 mm2) thermal withstand (solid line);
 Withstand characteristics for the next available size below (16 mm2) the selected conductor and the one above (35
mm2) (dashed lines);
 Minimum fault current (Pscc Min) for the selected circuit;
 Protective device energy let‐through characteristic.
The line conductor adiabatic check is performed at Pscc Min. Providing the amount of energy let‐through by the device is not greater
than the conductor withstand at Pscc Min, the circuit is compliant with the line conductor adiabatic check. In the example shown,
the withstand is 8.53 x 106 A2s and the let‐through is 6 x 104 A2s, therefore the circuit is compliant.

‘Earth Fault+Energy/Current’ View
A typical ‘Earth Fault + Energy/Current’ graph view is shown below:

Included in the view are the:
 Circuit protective conductor (cpc) thermal withstand (solid line);
 Withstand characteristics for the next available size below the selected separate cpc and the one above (dashed
lines). For armour, sheath, earth conductor, conduit or trunking only as cpc, alternative sizes are not shown;
 Earth fault current (Ief) for the selected circuit;
 Protective device energy let‐through characteristic.

For a circuit with overcurrent protection and an Add‐on RCD:
 click the overcurrent device on the single‐line diagram:
to see its characteristic as above.
 click the RCD:
to see its characteristic:

 click the conductor symbol:
to see both characteristics:
NOTE: for devices with an earth fault protection feature or associated with an add‐on rcd, for a given level of fault current the energy
let‐through is taken from the characteristic with the lowest value. For example, at the earth fault current (Ief) in the graph above, the
let‐through (6 x 104 A2s approx.) is taken from the overcurrent characteristic.
To view the withstand characteristic of a busbar, in the single‐line diagram, first click on the protective device directly upstream of
the busbar and then click on the busbar:

Withstand Data Panel
When a conductor in the single‐line diagram is selected, a data panel appears at the top right of the graph listing data about the
conductor withstand and the protective device energy let‐through at the fault current (Pscc Min for the line conductor and Ief for the
cpc) at which the adiabatic check is carried out.
The background colour of the panel, which is normally green, is red when the adiabatic check is in a failed condition, i.e. the energy
let‐through is in excess of the conductor withstand.
Cable Withstand Data Calculations
In the ‘Overcurrent + Energy/Current’ graph view the line conductor thermal withstand is calculated and displayed for a range of
current associated with fault durations of up to 20 seconds. An example is shown below of the characteristic of a 4 mm2
thermoplastic insulated copper cable.
The straight horizontal line starting at the point labelled 2. is the A2s adiabatic characteristic for fault durations of 5 seconds and
below. For adiabatic conditions it is assumed that, for the relatively short duration of the fault current, no heat energy is lost to the
surrounding environment and that it is all absorbed by the conductor. This is calculated using:
A2s = k2S2
For the above example this is: 1152 x 42 = 2.116 x 105
The characteristic for fault durations between 5 and 20 seconds is plotted between points 1. and 2. using a non‐adiabatic calculation.
For relatively long fault durations it is assumed that a proportion of heat energy is dissipated to the surrounding environment
reducing the amount absorbed by the conductor. In the non‐adiabatic calculation a correction factor is applied to the adiabatic
value, the value of which depends on the type of conductor and the fault duration.
In the above example, for a fault duration of 20 seconds, the non‐adiabatic limiting current is 144 A. The correction factor is 1.394,
i.e. the adiabatic limiting current for the same 20 second fault duration would be 144/1.394 = 103 A.
In the ‘Earth Fault + Energy/Current’ graph view, the earth conductor withstand includes only the adiabatic characteristic for fault
durations of 5 seconds or less. The adiabatic calculation is the same as that used for the line conductor.

Graph Navigation Tool
The log/log graph view in Protect extends for six decades in both directions, e.g:
 Current: 1 A to 1 MA;
 Time: 0.01 s to 10,000 s;
 Energy: 102 to 108.
A pan controls allow the graph view to be moved where data extends beyond six decades in any direction. Also, a zoom control
allows more detailed inspection of detail at a specific point. Both controls are contained in a navigation tool located on the graph:
The tool can be moved to any other position on the graph and can be hidden by clicking the Show Navigation button on the tool bar:
Navigation Tool Functions
The Zoom control is at the centre of the navigation tool. Each time it is clicked the view is moved to the next Zoom level. Surrounding
the Zoom controls are four pan buttons, each moving the view in the indicated direction.
There are four Zoom levels:
 The default view showing six decades of the graph in each direction and the panel containing the single‐line diagram
and the device protection settings;
 The graph is extended horizontally to fill the window, six decades of the graph in each direction are shown;
 The graph fills the window, three decades of the graph in each direction are shown;
 The graph fills the window, two decades of the graph in each direction are shown.
The graph view can also be controlled using the keyboard and the mouse. Double‐click the graph view to zoom, use the arrow keys
to pan the view.

Calculations
This section describes the calculations performed by ProDesign.
Check Network Logic
To perform a network logic check, click Calculate | Check Network Logic:
Check Network Logic provides a rapid check on the validity of the network diagram interconnections without performing any
calculations. This can be useful for a very large project.
As the check progresses, circuits are highlighted in green as they are checked and then returned to their normal colour.
When an incorrect connection is encountered, the check halts with the bad connection flashing in alternate colours, red, yellow,
blue, and an error message is displayed:
At the end of the logic check, if no connection errors have been detected, a message is displayed to confirm that the network has
been connected correctly. The message summarises the number of cables, busbar systems, loads and motors included in the
network:
Click the OK button to return to the network drawing.
Amtech Group Calculations  189

NOTE: the logic check is performed on the network connected to the active source. Components placed on the drawing area with no
connection back to the active source will not be checked. At the end of the logic check, unchecked circuits are highlighted in brown.
Another way these unconnected elements can be identified is by using the Show Unconnected Ends feature when drawing the
network.
For more details on Show Unconnected Ends see: The Project Drawing | Drawing The Network.
Calculating The Project
To calculate the project, click Calculate | Calculate or click on the Calculate button in the Calculate toolbar:

The calculation procedure involves three stages:
 The logic check is performed as described above. Click OK to proceed to the next stage;
 The network calculations are performed. Details of the calculations are described below in this section. When the
calculations are complete, if no problems have been detected a message will be displayed to confirm this.
 Errors and warnings are displayed.
Errors and Warnings Dialog
Errors are displayed to warn of conditions which are likely to involve a failure to comply with the requirements of BS 7671:2008
(2011). Warnings are intended to alert the designer to conditions that are not necessarily non‐compliant but may need attention. A
third category, ‘Notes’ is designed to inform the user of other, non‐critical, calculation results. For example, a cable may have been
increased in size, above the size necessary to carry the load current, to meet a voltage drop requirement. This will result in a
compliant design but the designer should be aware that this has taken place.
When the project is calculated, any problems found during the calculations are listed in the Errors / Warnings dialog which is
displayed at the end of the calculation procedure:
To locate the network component referred to in an error or warning message, double‐click the message. The drawing will scroll to a
position where that network component is centred in the window; additionally, the network component will be flashing.
Error and Warning messages
Errors and Warnings, grouped together by categories denoted by headings, e.g. ‘Sub‐mains Voltage Drop’. Error and warning
messages contain the following fields:
Reference
The reference of the network component;
190  Calculations Amtech Group

Calculated values
Calculated values relevant to the problem reported;
Description
A message describing the problem;
Status
Error for critical messages or Warning for advisory messages. The messages are colour coded, red for errors and blue for warnings.
Error Categories
A list box containing a list of the categories for which error or warning messages are present. Selecting an item from the List Box
scrolls the list to the beginning of the block of messages for the category selected.
Show Errors, Warnings and Notes
Contains three check boxes, ‘Errors’, ‘Warnings’ and ‘Notes’ which can be checked to determine what is displayed. One of the three
boxes must always be checked.
It is possible to prevent any ‘Notes’ appearing by deselecting the ‘Show Calculation Notes’ option in the ProDesign ‘Preferences’,
‘Calculations’ menu.
Errors and Warnings Count
Shows the number of errors present. The count is unaffected by the status of the ‘Show’ check boxes.
Track Button
The Track button in the errors and warnings dialog affects the contents of the Graphical Tooltip that appears when you hover the
mouse over a cable.
In its default mode, the Graphical Tooltip displays a wide range of calculations results. When the 'Track' button alongside a message
category is clicked, the data displayed by the graphical tooltip will then be selected as appropriate to that category.
For example, clicking on the Track button alongside the heading Voltage Drop will result in the Graphical Tooltip being tailored to
display information useful for diagnosing voltage drop issues.
When the project is re‐calculated the Graphical Tooltip returns to its default behaviour.
Help button
Select an error/warning message and click the Help button to display Help text related to the selected message. The text will extend
the information provided by the error/warning message and give a suggestion or suggestions as to how the problem may be put
right.
Print button
Produces a printed version of the list of messages. The contents of the printout will correspond to the displayed list as filtered by the
‘Show’ Errors and Warnings check boxes.
Exit button
Closes the dialog.

Error Messages
Busbar: Peak Fault Current Withstand
The peak fault withstand declared by the manufacturer for the busbar system must be greater than the prospective peak fault
current, i.e., the instantaneous level that could be reached during the first half‐cycle of fault current. An excessive level of peak
current may lead to mechanical damage to the busbar caused by electromechanical stresses.
Hint:
Likely to occur where a busbar with a relatively low current rating is connected to a supply with a relatively high level of prospective
fault current.
Busbar Sizing
The busbar current rating should be equal to or greater than the required current rating (Iz). Iz is calculated for the most heavily
loaded section of busbar and takes into account the ambient temperature surrounding the busbar casing and whether the busbar is
installed vertically or horizontally (both set in the Details tab of the Busbar dialog).
Hints:
 If the busbar rating is set to Auto, it may be necessary to select a different type with a higher range of ratings;
 Some busbars are designed for use as risers and are fully rated when installed vertically. Other types may be
derated when used in this way.
Busbar Neutral Sizing
The rating of the neutral busbar conductor should be equal to or greater than the neutral current.
Hint:
Generally, the neutral conductor of a busbar will be the same size as the line conductors. Therefore, if a neutral sizing error occurs
when there is no problem with sizing of the line conductors, a high neutral current resulting from unbalanced line currents is likely to
be the cause.
Cable Neutral Sizing
The current‐carrying capacity of the neutral conductor is less than the required capacity taking account of the installation conditions.
Normally, for single‐core cables set to Auto, the neutral conductor would be sized the same as the line conductors. Where there are
harmonic currents, the current in the neutral could be greater than any of the line currents, leading to an Auto neutral size greater
than the line conductors.
Hint:
The neutral cable size may be fixed at a value too low to support the neutral current. The neutral size can be set to Auto, Double
(automatically double the size of the line conductors) or Manual.

Cable Phase Sizing
The tabulated current‐carrying rating (It) of the cable is less than the required rating (Iz). The required rating may be increased as a
result of the application of rating factors (for such conditions as grouped cables) that reflect the installed condition.
Hints:
 If the cable is set to ‘Auto’ and the tabulated rating of the largest cable size is inadequate, it may be necessary to
use a different cable type or a number of parallel cables;
 If the cable size is fixed and the tabulated rating of the selected cable size is inadequate, it may be necessary to
select a larger size or use a number of parallel cables;
 Derating for the installed condition (ambient temperature, grouping, etc.) may be high, check the values of rating
factors in the Cables Calculations and Cables Analysis reports.
Circuit Protective Device: Breaking Capacity
There is a general requirement for the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) of a circuit protective device to be equal to or greater than
the maximum fault current [both the prospective short‐circuit current (Pscc) and the earth fault current (Ief)] at the supply end of
the circuit.
Hints:
 Consider the use of a different CPD with a higher breaking capacity.
 Where the breaking capacity of a device is not adequate, the requirement may be met using a Cascade Rating Back‐
up protection – BS 7671:2008 (2011), 536.1). Select ‘Cascade Rated’ breaking capacity in the Protection tab of the
Cable dialog. (requires the use of a suitable circuit‐breaker in the circuit on the supply side of the one under
consideration).
 Review the level of fault current defined at the project active supply source.
Circuit Protective Device: Cascade Rating

A Cascade Rating is being used but the fault current (prospective short‐circuit current or earth fault current) is greater than the
enhanced breaking capacity provided by cascading.
Hint:
 Review the level of fault current defined at the project active supply source.
Circuit Protective Device: Rated Current
The rating of the circuit protective device should be equal to or greater than the design current (Ib) for the circuit.
For a protective device without an adjustable overload (e.g., fuse, mcb), the nominal rating (In) of the circuit protective device should
be equal to or greater than the design current (Ib) for the circuit.
Hints:
 If the rating of the CPD is set to ‘Auto’, Ib may exceed the rating of the largest size in the selected range of CPD – try
a different CPD type.
 If the rating of the CPD has been set by the user – try a higher setting;
 For an adjustable device, check that the overload setting is higher than Ib.
Circuit Protective Device: Rated Current
For a protective device with an adjustable overload, the adjusted overload setting (Ir) of the circuit protective device should be equal
to or greater than the design current (Ib) for the circuit.
Hint:
For a device with an adjustable overload, check that the setting is higher than Ib.
Circuit Protective Device: Rated Current, Motors
The motor rating of the circuit protective device when used to provide short‐circuit protection for a motor circuit should be equal to
or greater than the motor load current. Where the motor load current exceeds the device motor rating, inadvertent operation of the
protective device may be caused by the high level of transient current likely to occur during motor starting.
Hints:
 Protective device ratings when used for motor loads are generally lower than for other load types. This is
particularly true for circuit‐breakers designed for general distribution loads, for which the motor rating may be very
low. Most circuit‐breaker ranges have special overload types for motor protection (consult the manufacturer).
These overload types should be used wherever possible.
 The motor rating of a device can be seen in the Protective Devices Selector, and also the Circuit Protection tab of
the Starter dialog (after the project has been calculated when the device is set to Auto).
Circuit Protective Device: RCD

There is a general requirement for the use of an RCD to protect socket‐outlets 20 A unless they are to be used under supervision by
skilled or instructed persons, or identified for use with a particular piece of equipment (BS 7671:2008 (2011), 411.3.3). If one of the
two of these exemptions is ticked in the Load Details dialog, the error message will no longer appear for that circuit.
Circuits supplying mobile equipment with a rating 32 A are required to be protected by RCD (BS 7671:2008 (2011), 411.3.3(ii)).
Circuit Protective Device: Ring Circuit
For a ring final circuit feeding sockets, the circuit protective device used must have nominal rating of either 30 A or 32 A (BS
7671:2008 (2011), 433.1.103).
Discrimination: Energy‐Based
The energy‐based check ensures discrimination between devices such as fuses and MCBs, which respond instantaneously to fault
currents, with no intentional time delay. Assessment of short‐circuit tripping behaviour and resulting discrimination levels for such
devices depends on the levels of energy (A2s) flowing through the devices and cannot be determined by inspection of time‐current
characteristics.
Hints:
 For fuses, it is normally necessary to ensure a ratio of at least 1.6:1 between the nominal ratings of the upstream
and downstream fuses to avoid a loss of discrimination.
 For circuit‐breakers, greater ratios may be necessary. Also, the frame size of the device is more important than just
the nominal rating. For example, two mcbs of the same type but with ratings 63 A and 10 A are unlikely to provide
energy‐based discrimination.
Discrimination: Time‐Current
The time‐current discrimination check detects any overlapping of the time‐current tripping characteristics for two successive devices,
i.e., levels of current for which operation of the upstream device will be initiated before the downstream device clears the fault,
resulting in a loss of discrimination.
Where overlaps occur the error message gives the range of current (from If1 to If2) across which the overlap occurs and for which
discrimination is likely to fail.
Hints:
 Using successive devices with dissimilar characteristics (e.g., fuses and circuit‐breakers) increases the likelihood of
overlaps.
 With adjustable circuit‐breakers, use View Graph to optimise settings.

Earth Fault: Adiabatic
The circuit protective conductor (CPC) has failed the adiabatic test required by BS 7671:2008 (2011), 543.1.3 that ensures that
following earth fault disconnection, the final temperature of the CPC does not exceed a limit beyond which damage which may
occur. The section (csa) of the conductor is less than the minimum (Smin) calculated using: Smin = √(I2t)/k
The earth fault disconnection time is less than 0.1 s, therefore the term I2t is calculated as the energy let‐through (A2s) at the
calculated level of earth fault current (I).
Hint:
It will probably be necessary to increase the CPC size.
The earth fault disconnection time is greater than 0.1 s, therefore the term I2t is calculated as the earth fault current (I) squared
times the disconnection time (t).
Hint:
Reducing the disconnection time may solve the problem. This could be done by: larger CPC; avoid the use of devices with high trip
level (e.g., type D MCB) unless necessary; for adjustable devices, ensure the fault tripping level is not set too high.
Earth Fault: Earth Loop Impedance
The earth fault loop impedance (Zs) is greater than the maximum permissible value (Max Zs) for the protective device and load type.
Therefore, the level of earth fault current is too low to ensure disconnection of the protective device within the disconnection time
specified in BS 7671:2008 (2011), Table 41.1, for the level of applied voltage and system type.
Earth Fault: External Earth Loop Impedance
Where the external earth fault loop impedance (Ze) is greater than the maximum earth fault loop impedance (Max Zs), the circuit
will be non‐compliant regardless of any change that may be made to the size of conductors in the circuit.
Hints:
 A device with a higher Max Zs requirement may provide a solution. This may lead to the use of an RCD;
 Measures in the circuits on the supply side, such as increased CPC sizes, may improve the situation.
Generator Load Rating

The load rating is calculated from the Rating (kVA) in the Fault Conditions tab in the Generator dialog. When the total diversified
network current exceeds that calculated rating, an error message is generated.
Hint:
Ensure that the Rating (kVA) in the Fault Conditions tab of the Generator dialog is set correctly.
HV Circuit Protective Device: Primary Rated Current
The rating (In) of the transformer protection located on the primary side of the transformer is less than the transformer rated
primary current. Depending on the setting made the requirement may be for 100 % or 130 % of the rated primary current. The
setting and primary design current are displayed in a panel in the Protection tab of the Transformer dialog.
Hint:
Ensure that the Rating (kVA) in the Fault Conditions tab of the Transformer dialog is set correctly.
Non‐compliant Installation
Cables installed within walls, partitions, ceilings or floors are required to comply with BS 7671:2008 (2011), 522.6.101 to 522.6.103
which is intended to ensure that if a concealed cable is penetrated by a screw, drill, etc., it first has to pass through an earthed
conductor thus ensuring disconnection resulting from earth fault current.
Hint:
Click the Settings button in the Cable dialog next to the ‘Non‐Compliant’ indicator for a full explanation of the available provisions for
compliance.
Line Conductor Adiabatic Check
The line conductor has failed the adiabatic test required by BS 7671:2008 (2011), 434.5.2 that ensures that the final temperature of
the conductor, reached at the end of fault disconnection, does not exceed a limit beyond which damage which may occur.
The fault current flowing through the phase conductor, which has caused the circuit protective device to disconnect the circuit, could
be caused by either a phase fault or an earth fault condition. ProDesign calculates all possible conditions and an error message will
be produced if a condition arises where the heat energy (I2t) flowing during the time taken to disconnect exceeds the conductor
withstand (k2S2).

The phase fault disconnection time is less than 0.1 s. The energy let‐through of the protective device is greater than the energy fault
withstand of the conductor calculated using: k2S2; where k is from BS 7671:2008 (2011), Table 43.1 and S is the section of the
conductor in mm2.
Hint:
 The energy let‐through of the protective device may be comparatively high for the size of the conductor. Example,
using a circuit‐breaker with a low current rating in a relatively large frame size, e.g., 100 A frame with 20 A trip.
The phase fault disconnection time is greater than 0.1 s and greater than the limiting time (t) calculated using: t = (k2S2)/I2; where k is
from BS 7671:2008 (2011), Table 43.1, S is the section of the conductor in mm2, and I is the minimum phase fault current.
Hint:
 Reducing the disconnection time may solve the problem. This could be done by: avoiding the use of devices with a
high trip level (e.g., type D MCB) unless necessary; for adjustable devices, ensure the fault tripping level is not set
too high.
 If the problem occurs under earth fault conditions, the use of an RCD would probably provide a solution.
Phase Unbalance
The sizing of the phase and neutral conductors takes into account harmonic currents, where present in circuits. However, the
method used, as described in BS 7671:2008 (2011), Appendix 4, 5.5, does not provide for rating factors where the phase imbalance is
greater than 50 %
Reduced Neutral Harmonics

Because of the level of 3rd harmonic current the rating of the selected neutral conductor size is insufficient for the level of neutral
current. The neutral current is the total of the current caused by imbalance between the individual phase currents and the sum of
the 3rd harmonic currents flowing in each phase. The levels of both are shown in the message.
Hint:
If the neutral conductor size is set to Auto, the correct size will be normally selected for the calculated neutral current.
Transformer Load Rating
The load rating is calculated from the Rating (kVA) in the Fault Conditions tab in the Transformer dialog. When the total diversified
network current exceeds that calculated rating, an error message is generated.
Hint:
Ensure that the Rating (kVA) in the Fault Conditions tab of the Transformer dialog is set correctly.

Voltage Drop
The voltage drop between the supply and the load end of the cable in the circuit exceeds the setting in the Voltage Drop Settings
dialog. The Reference and Name columns show the Id No. and Name of both the final circuit and the load. The calculated values
column shows the limit and the actual voltage drop. The Description column states whether the limit is a user‐defined setting or to
BS 7671:2008 (2011), Appendix 4, 6.4.
Hint:
Check that the limit set for the stated load is appropriate. Settings in the Voltage Drop tab in the Load Details dialog allow a limit to
be set for that particular load, without changing the global limit applied to the rest of the project.
Maximum Disconnection Time
The maximum disconnection time set by the user is higher than the value required by BS 7671:2008 (2011), Table 41.1 for the
selected circuit type.
Warning Messages
CPD: Breaking Capacity
An optional requirement for circuit‐breakers is to ensure that the service breaking capacity (Ics) is equal to or greater than the
prospective fault current at the load end of the circuit (BS EN 60947‐2). Ics, usually lower than the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu),
defines a level of fault current that the circuit‐breaker can interrupt and still be capable of full rated service. Meeting this optional
requirement provides an enhanced level of service continuity, in that the circuit‐breaker would immediately be ready for re‐use after
the interruption of a load end fault (statistically the most common fault configuration).
CPC: Auto Size
This refers to a conflict between the minimum size set for separate CPCs and the maximum CPC size limit. The minimum size is set
above the maximum size as it applies to this circuit. The rule applied ensures that the minimum size is used regardless of the
maximum size requirement.
Discrimination: Energy‐Based

There is no data available for energy‐based discrimination for the protective devices used in the two circuits named. This will occur
for: circuit‐breakers from different manufacturers; circuit‐breakers from a manufacturer that has not provided data; circuit‐breaker
upstream and fuse downstream.
Hint:
To ensure discrimination when using circuit‐breakers, it is necessary to use devices from a single manufacturer that provides data.
Network Diversity
For each board, the load calculations determine the load, either by applying the value set for Define Load, or by factoring the
connected load by a diversity setting. This message indicates that either diversity for the phases listed should be set to Define Load
or that the connected loads should be defined on the single‐line diagram or in the board circuit‐diagram.

Notes
Compliant Installation: User Defined
Cables installed within walls, partitions, ceilings or floors are required to comply with BS 7671:2008 (2011), 522.6.100 to 522.6.103
which is intended to ensure that if a concealed cable is penetrated by a screw, drill, etc., it first has to pass through an earthed
conductor thus ensuring disconnection resulting from earth fault current.
The circuit complies using a method defined by the user, in the Settings dialog for Cable in Walls or Partitions or Cable Under Floors
or Above Ceilings, rather than one of the standard listed provisions.
Board Defined Load Threshold Exceeded
Diversity settings can be used to set a defined load at a board in a situation where details of the load circuits to be connected are not
known. The Define Load Threshold can be set to a percentage of that defined load so that if, subsequently, circuits are connected to
the board, the note will give notice when the total connected load from those circuits exceeds the Defined load Threshold.
Changing the diversity to Manual will allow ProDesign to assess the load on the board as the sum of the connected circuit design
currents multiplied by the diversity setting.
Voltage Drop: Upsized Final Circuit
It is required that the voltage drop across every branch in the network from the supply source to the load terminals is limited to the
value set by either the global setting in the Voltage Drop Settings dialog (user‐defined or to BS 7671:2008 (2011), Appendix 4, 6.4) or
a specific setting made for the load in that branch, in the Load Details dialog.
The final circuit cable will be increased in size from the minimum size required to support the load current, to a size which will keep
the overall voltage drop from the supply source to the load terminals within the set limit.

Voltage Drop: Upsized Sub‐mains
It is required that the voltage drop across every branch in the network from the supply source to the load terminals is limited to the
value set by either the global setting in the Voltage Drop Settings dialog (user‐defined or to BS 7671:2008 (2011), Appendix 4, 6.4) or
a specific setting made for the load in that branch, in the Load Details dialog.
To ensure the overall limit for a branch is met, each cable in the branch is allocated a limit. Where the allocated limit is exceeded by
the cable when sized for current‐carrying capacity, its size is increased to meet the limit.
Cable Sizing
General
The cable sizing calculations verify for each circuit in the network that the selected cable is adequately rated for the design current
(Ib) of the circuit in which it is installed. In other words, the cable is adequately rated to withstand the thermal effects of both
continuous normal loads and overload conditions up to the level at which the circuit protective device is designed to operate. The
effects of short‐circuit faults are assessed in the Phase Fault Calculations.
The correct cable size can be selected automatically or the designer can set a size, in which case its suitability is assessed during the
calculation process. Assessment of current rating takes into account:
 the Design Current (Ib);
 the nominal current (In), (Ir) of the circuit protective device (CPD);
 the cable type;
 the Installation Methods employed;
 the number of cables in parallel;
 the number of cables grouped together;
 the ambient temperature.
The calculations result in cables sized to adequately carry load currents in all parts of the network. Where this is not possible, error
messages will be displayed.
NOTE: the Voltage Drop Calculations that follow the cable sizing calculations may result in further increases in the sizes of some
cables in a network where voltage drop problems are encountered.
The cable sizing calculations follow the procedures described in BS 7671:2008 (2011) Appendix 4, and uses data from Tables 4A2,
4A3, 4B1, 4B2, 4B3, 4B4, 4C1, 4C2, 4C3, 4C4, 4C5 and 4C6 together with the cable current‐carrying capacity tables, Tables 4D1A to
4J4A to determine the correct cable sizes for the defined installed conditions.
The parts of Appendix 4 dealing with voltage drop (Section 6 and Tables 4D1B to 4J4B) are considered in the section describing
voltage drop calculations.
ProDesign includes a number of cable types not listed in Appendix 4, (fire resistant types, etc.). It also provides ratings for ground
installation methods other than those included in BS 7671:2008 (2011).
Installed in Air
Cable Rating Data
BS 7671:2008 (2011) lists the ratings of cables in Tables 4D1A to 4J4A. For any cable type and size, the rating given is the maximum
continuous load current the cable can withstand without exceeding the conductor operating temperature given at the head of the
table (e.g., thermoplastic insulated = 70 C). The rating applies for the installation method indicated and an ambient temperature of
30 C. The ratings are valid for both 50 Hz and 60 Hz operation.
NOTE: when use is made of the comparatively higher current ratings provided by thermosetting insulated cables, consideration must
also be given to the higher associated operating temperature (90 C). The terminals of equipment connected by cables of this type
must be able to sustain the increased temperature. There is no way to check this in ProDesign. Similarly, where thermosetting and
thermoplastic insulated cables are run together in a group, the thermosetting cables should be run at a maximum operating
temperature of 70 C. A warning is given in the Grouping tab of the Cable dialog for this condition.

Among the cable types listed in ProDesign, there are flexible variants of the cables described in the BS 7671:2008 (2011) tables: 4D1,
4D2, 4E1, 4E2. These are shown as ‘*Flexible’ and have the same properties as their standard equivalent, except their data are
multiplied by the following factors, in compliance with BS 7671:2008 (2011), Appendix 4, 2.4:
 Current‐carrying capacities: 0.95 (16 mm2), 0.97 (>16 mm2);
 Voltage drop resistances: 1.10 (16 mm2), 1.06 (>16 mm2).
Installation Methods
The majority of the installation methods defined in the Cable dialog correspond to the Installation methods defined in BS 7671:2008
(2011), Table 4A1. The full definition of the installation method is defined by the user in the data boxes: Installation, Configuration,
Distance and Grouping, as applicable
For the defined installation method, the calculations determine the appropriate Reference method, which is then used to find the
tabulated cable rating (It) from the cable rating tables, i.e., Table 4D1A, etc.
Example:
For the installation method selection shown below, the appropriate Reference Method would be C and the tabulated rating (It)
would be found in column 7 of Table 4D1A; the voltage drop data from Table 4D1B, column 7.
The rating factor for grouping (Cg) would come from row 2 of Table 4C1 ‘Single layer on wall or floor’.
For five cables in a group the rating factor would be 0.73:
Rating Factors
As described above current ratings in BS 7671:2008 (2011) tables relate to specific installation methods at an ambient temperature
of 30 C. Any variations in installation conditions (change in ambient temperature and/or grouping of cables, etc.) affecting the
dissipation of heat energy from the cable must be reflected in the application of rating factors to the cable current‐carrying capacity.
For cables installed in air, the corrected current ratings for these conditions are determined by the use of rating factors: Ca Ci, Cf, Ch
and Cg, as described below.
Ambient Temperature Rating Factor (Ca)
Ambient temperature is the temperature of the free air in the immediate vicinity of the cable installation. For enclosed cables (e.g.,
conduit) it is the temperature of the air surrounding the enclosure.
Tabulated ratings (Tables 4D1A to 4J4A) in BS 7671:2008 (2011) are based on an ambient temperature of 30 C. For a higher ambient
temperature the cable rating will need to be corrected downward to avoid the operating temperature of the cable exceeding its

maximum value. Conversely, when a cable is operated at lower temperatures, the cable rating can be increased. For all ambient
temperatures, the corrected current rating is the maximum the cable can carry continuously without its temperature exceeding its
conductor operating temperature.
These corrections are made in ProDesign using the values for the ambient temperature rating factor (Ca) given in BS 7671:2008
(2011), Table 4B1.
Thermal Insulation Factor (Ci)
Where a cable is to be totally surrounded by thermal insulating material over a length of more than 0.5 m, a rating factor (Ci) of 0.5 is
to be applied. For shorter distances the value of the rating factor is given in Table 52.2 of BS 7671:2008 (2011). In ProDesign,
installation method ‘Run through thermal insulation’ should be selected.
Semi‐enclosed Fuse BS 3036 Factor (Cf)
Where a circuit is protected by a fuse type to BS 3036, because of its inferior overload protection characteristic, a factor Cf of 0.725 is
to be applied when sizing the cable for the circuit.
Harmonic Rating Factor (Ch)
Harmonic currents can cause an increased level of temperature rise in conductors. Where the load current in a circuit includes a
substantial proportion of harmonics, a rating factor should be applied to prevent the cable overheating.
In ProDesign a rating factor Ch is applied for levels of 3rd harmonic current above 15 %. In each Load dialog there is an input for the
harmonic current level.
For more information, see the section: Calculations | Harmonics.
Grouping Rating Factor (Cg)
Where cable are bunched or grouped together, dissipation of the heat generated by load currents to the surrounding air is impaired.
Consequently, current ratings for grouped cables need to be corrected downwards. These corrections are made in ProDesign using
the values given in BS 7671:2008 (2011), Tables 4C1, 4C4, 4C5, 4C6 for the Grouping Rating Factor (Cg).
Grouping Arrangements: Touching/Spaced
For non‐enclosed installation methods there are two sets of factors depending on whether the cables are touching (Fig.1a) or spaced
(Fig.1b). ‘Spaced’ here means spaced at least one cable diameter apart but not more than two.

For example, for multicore cables installed on perforated cable tray (Installation Method 31), the Arrangement ‘Horizontal, touching’
in the Grouping tab of the Cable dialog corresponds to Fig. 1a above (Cg = 0.82 from Table 4C4); ‘Horizontal, spaced’ to Fig. 1b (Cg =
0.98 from Table 4C4).
Total circuits in group
Care should be taken to make appropriate inputs to ‘Total number of grouped circuits’ to avoid excessive derating of cables at one
extreme and over‐optimistic assumptions at the other.
Rating factors are for multiples of either circuits of single‐core cables or multi‐core cables. This means that where, for example, a
three phase and neutral circuit is wired in single‐core cables, all four of the cables employed counts as one item for grouping
purposes (Fig.2); ‘Total number of grouped circuits’ – unchecked.

Where a cable is spaced horizontally more than two cable diameters from the rest of the cables in the group it can be disregarded
for the purposes of grouping (Note 2, Table 4C1), e.g., for the condition shown in Fig. 3, the number of grouped circuits should be set
to 2.

If a grouped cable is expected to carry not more than 30% of its grouped rating, it can be disregarded for the purposes of grouping
(Note 9, Table 4C1). Because there is no facility in ProDesign to identify the individual cables in a group, it is not able to apply this
rule. Therefore, the user should assess whether there are cables that can be ignored on this basis.
Cables in parallel
The cabling of a ring socket circuit constitutes one circuit only and should not be defined as having two parallel cables.
Cables in a circuit are considered to be paralleled where:
 more than one single‐core cable is used in each phase;
 more than one multi‐core cable is used.

In ProDesign when parallel cables are set, grouping is automatically applied. This is done by automatically setting ‘Total number of
grouped circuits’ = ‘Cables in Parallel’. Although, the paralleled cables are part of the same circuit, if they are grouped together, they
should be derated in the same way as similar cables in separate circuits.

If the user wishes to define the parallel cables as being installed with spacing >2 dia., ‘Total Circuits in Group’ can be unchecked to
remove the grouping previously applied.

NOTE: where circuits with parallel cables are grouped together, care needs to be taken to ensure that grouping is correctly applied.
For example: Two grouped circuits, each with two parallel cables:


Determination of required cable size
The derating parameters discussed above are used to determine the minimum suitable size of cable for the design current (Ib) for a
circuit, taking into account any installation conditions affecting the cable rating.
The continuous current‐carrying capacity of a cable (Iz) is the actual capacity taking into account all relevant rating factors, i.e.:
Iz = [In / (Ca x Cg x Ci x Cf x Ch)]
(Ca, ambient rating factor; Cg, grouping rating factor; Ci, rating factor for installation in insulation material; Cf, rating factor for BS
3036 fuse; Ch, rating factor for harmonic current)
The general rule for cable sizing is:
It  [In / (Ca x Cg x Ci x Cf x Ch)]
Therefore, the following rule ensures that the selected cable is suitably rated:
It  Iz
For adjustable circuit protective devices:
Iz  [Ir / (Ca x Cg x Ci x Cf x Ch)] (Ir is the adjusted rating of the CPD)
For motor circuits:
Iz  [Ib / (Ca x Cg x Ci x Cf x Ch)]

Simultaneous Overload
ProDesign allows rating for grouping assuming the grouped cables are either ‘Subject to simultaneous overload’ or ‘Not Subject to
simultaneous overload’ (BS 7671:2008 (2011), Appendix 4. 5.1.2):
Subject to simultaneous overload
It  [In / Ca x Cg x Ci x Cf x Ch] ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ (Appendix 4. 5.1.2 Equation (2))
Not Subject to simultaneous overload
It  [Ib / Ca x Cg x Ci x Cf x Ch] ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ (Appendix 4. 5.1.2 Equation (3))
It  (1 / Ca x Ci){(In/Cf)2 + 0.48 Ib2 [(1 – Cg2)/ Cg2]} ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐(Appendix 4. 5.1.2 Equation (4))
Installed in Ground
BS 7671:2008 (2011) Methods
Installation Methods 70 and 71 describe multicore and single‐core cables installed in cable ducting in the ground. Installation
Methods 72 and 73 describe multicore cables installed direct in the ground, with or without added mechanical protection. For all of
these methods, a rating factor Cc of 0.9 is applied for cable sizing.
The current‐carrying capacities given in the tables are based on the following conditions, and modified by the rating factors
described:
 Ground temperature of 20 C. For other ground temperatures, the value of the rating factor Ca is given in Table 4B2.
 Soil thermal resistivity of 2.5 K.m/W. Table 4B3 gives the value of the rating factor Cs for other resistivities.
 Buried depths of 0.7 m. Table 4B4 gives the values of the rating factor Cd for other depths.
Tables 4C2 and 4C3 give the value of the rating factor Cg for groups of cables.
General Methods
Cable sizing for ground installation methods (‘Buried direct in ground’ or ‘In underground single‐way ducts’), although similar in
principle to the sizing for air installation methods described above, uses different parameters. Also, the calculation for ‘Not Subject
to simultaneous’ overload does not apply.
The installation methods and ratings used are as described in the publication:
BICC Cables ‘Fixed Power, Control and Wiring Cables’ Publication No. EC F 3‐91
The correction factors used are listed below. The values in square brackets describe the conditions for which no derating is required:

Ca = rating factor for Ground Temperature (C); [Ca = 1 @ 15 C]
Cd = rating factor for Depth of Lay (m); [Cd = 1 @ 0.5 m]
Cs = rating factor for Soil Thermal Resistivity (K.m/W); [Cs = 1.2 K.m/W]
Cg = rating factor for grouped cables.

For both of the above sets of buried methods, the minimum cable capacity (Iz) for a given cable type and installation condition is
obtained by dividing the product of all the factors into the nominal rating of the circuit protective device, thus:
Iz = In/(Ca x Cd x Cs x Cg x Ch) [Ch, derating factor for harmonic current]
Cable selection is made using:
It  Iz
Motor Circuits
In motor circuits there are some important differences in the cable sizing calculations as compared to non‐motor circuits.
Motor Overload Setting at Starter
The motor overload setting (see: Motor Starter) is used to determine the cable sizing for a motor circuit.
For a non‐motor load the required rating (Iz) for the cable is found by dividing the nominal rating (In) of the device by any rating
factors applicable: Iz = In/factors. In the case of an adjustable overload, the overload setting (Ir) is used, i.e.: Iz = Ir/factors.
For a motor circuit, the motor overload provides protection for both the motor and the circuit cables, therefore the motor overload
setting (Irm) is used to determine Iz, i.e.: Iz = Irm/factors.
Circuit with no Motor Overload
Where a motor circuit has no motor overload, the circuit protective device provides overload protection for both the motor and the
cables. Therefore, cable sizing will be the same as for a non‐motor load.
Protective Device Motor Rating
A protective device, when used with a motor load, will generally require an increased rating to avoid inadvertent operation caused
by the high levels of transient current that occur during the motor starting cycle. have a lower rating than when used for a non‐
motor load. Consequently, protective devices tend to have lower ratings when used for motor protection rather than non‐motor
loads.
The motor ratings given are based on manufacturers’ data and take into account the selected method of motor starting.
In a motor circuit, the motor rating is shown in the Circuit Protection tab in both the Motor Starter and Cable dialogs:
Short‐circuit Protection
As described in Motor Overload Setting at Starter, the motor overload will provide overload protection for the cables in a motor
circuit. At the same time a check is made to ensure that the circuit protective device will adequately protect the cable from damage
under short‐circuit conditions. This check is made for all circuits but is particularly important in motor circuits where the protective
device rating may be increased to deal with the motor starting inrush current.
Start Delta Started Motors
For Start Delta started motors six conductors are required:
 Multicore cable: 2 x 3c;
 Single‐core cable: 6 x 1c.
to connect the motor windings to the starter.
These conductors are sized for the motor design current divided by √3 (the delta current). Since these conductors are normally
installed in a group, grouped circuits will be set in the grouping tab for the cable connected to the motor resulting in the application
of an appropriate group rating factor Cg:

If it is intended that the cables will be installed spaced apart, the grouping check box can be unchecked resulting in a group rating
factor of 1.
Example
The following example shows the calculation for sizing the cables between the starter and motor for a star/delta started motor:
Cable: Single‐core, 70°C thermoplastic non‐arm Cu Table 4D1; Size = Auto;
Installation: 20 – Clipped direct on a wooden/masonry wall (Ref. Method = C); Flat Touching.
Grouping: 2.
Load: Motor, Star Delta started, three phase; Ib = 38.45 A, PF = 0.89
Required rating Iz = Ib/(√3 x Cg) = 38.45/(√3 x 0.85) = 26.12 A
Selected Cable size: 4 mm2 (Cable tabulated rating It ≥ required rating Iz; 33 A ≥ 26.12)
User Defined Rating
The installation method ‘User Defined’ is available for all cable types. When selected, it replaces all derating factors (except Ch, the
derating factor for harmonic current) with a value typed in by the user:
The minimum cable capacity (Iz) is then calculated thus:
Iz = In/(Cu x Ch) [Cu, user defined derating factor]
The cable size is then selected using the tabulated current‐carrying capacity for Reference Method E (multicore) or Method F (single‐
core).
Busbar Sizing
The general principles for sizing busbars are similar to those for cables described above but the details are significantly different.
Generally, there are no installation methods for busbars as the busbar casing provides a standardised environment for the
conductors. Also, there is no requirement for assessing ratings for parallel and grouped conductors.
Busbar Data
There is no busbar data in BS 7671:2008 (2011) and ProDesign uses data from the relevant manufacturer for each of the busbar
types listed in the Busbar Details dialog.
Busbar Ratings
A busbar size is given as an actual rating in amperes rather than as a section in mm2. The section of the busbar conductors, although
not stated, is stored in the ProDesign database and used for such purposes as voltage drop and fault calculations.
Derating Factors
Unlike cables, not all busbars are rated for an ambient temperature of 30 C. A number of busbar types are fully rated at 35 C or 40
C. Consequently, it is not unusual to see an ambient derating factor of, for example, 1.02 for a busbar operating in an ambient
temperature of 30 C.
Because a busbar includes its own enclosure, the current rating given by the manufacturer does not need to be modified for
different installation conditions. An exception is that some busbars have a different rating according to the whether they are

installed in a horizontal or vertical run. An example of a busbar installed vertically would be a riser between floors in a building. The
user should indicate in the Busbar Details dialog which installation method is used by selecting: Installation – Horizontal or Vertical.
Diversity at Tap Off
At each Tap Off there is a diversity setting that multiplies the load connected to that Tap Off to give the diversified value of that load.
Example:
Sizing Calculations
The circuit protective device (CPD) rating In (or Ir for an adjustable device) must be equal to or greater than the design current Ib, i.e.,
In  Ib or Ir  Ib.
For a busbar, the CPD used for sizing will be the nearest one on the supply side of the busbar under consideration, usually the CPD
for the cable feeding the busbar.
The required busbar current rating Iz must be greater than or equal to the circuit protective device rating divided by the
temperature, harmonic current and installation correction factors:
Iz  (In / Ca x Ch x installation correction factor)
The tabulated busbar current rating It must be equal to or greater than Iz: It  Iz.
Voltage Drop Requirements
The voltage drop calculations in ProDesign are designed to assist the user to comply with the requirements of BS 7671:2008 (2011).
The three relevant areas are:
 525: general rules for voltage drop in consumers’ installations.
 Appendix 4 Section 6: describes calculation methods used to determine the voltage drop in a cable using resistances
and reactances from Tables 4D1B to 4J4B.
 Appendix 4, 6.4: Voltage drop limits between the origin of the installation (supply terminals) and various load types.
Voltage Drop Calculations
The voltage drop across the cables in each circuit in a project are calculated in ProDesign according to the methods described in
Appendix 4 Section 6.
The voltage drop values shown in reports for three‐phase, three‐phase and neutral, and single‐phase circuits, are the phase to
neutral voltage drops. In the case of three‐phase and neutral circuits, the neutral current is determined by adding the complex phase
currents, which for a balanced load condition (the same load current in each phase) will be zero. The voltage drop in each phase is
then found by adding the complex sum of the phase and the neutral voltage drops.
The impedance data used for the voltage drop calculations is taken from Tables 4D1B to 4L4B for the cable types listed in BS
7671:2008 (2011). For other types and for busbars, manufacturer’s data is used. The data used is the complex impedance (resistance
and reactance) for the relevant type of circuit. For three‐phase and three‐phase and neutral circuits the tabulated values are divided
by root √3 to obtain per conductor impedances.
The calculations are corrected for load power factor and operating temperature using the methods described in BS 7671:2008
(2011), Appendix 4, Section 6.2.
The generalised formulae for the calculations are:
Single‐phase circuits:

Vd1ph = {L x A x [Ct x cos Ø (r1ph) + sin Ø (x1ph)]} / 1000
Three‐phase circuits:
Vd1ph = {L x A x [Ct x cos Ø (r3ph/3) + sin Ø (x3ph/3)]} / 1000
where:
Vd1ph = phase to neutral voltage drop.
L = the total circuit length.
A = the design current Ib.
cos Ø = the load power factor.
sin Ø = sin (cos‐1 Ø).
r1ph, x1ph = the tabulated conductor resistance/reactance for single‐phase circuits (mV/A/m).
r3ph, x3ph = the tabulated conductor resistance/reactance for three‐phase circuits (mV/A/m).
Ct = temperature correction factor, where:
Ct = {230 + tp – [Ca2Cg2 – (Ib2/It2)](tp – 30)}/(230 + tp)
and: tp = maximum normal operating temperature; Ca = ambient derating factor; Cg = grouping factor; Ib = design current; It =
conductor tabulated rating.
Voltage Drop Limits
ProDesign provides two methods for setting voltage drop limits. These are set globally for the whole project in the Voltage Drop
Settings dialog (Menu: Preferences/Calculation/Voltage Drop or click ‘Voltage Drop Settings’ in the source dialog).
The default setting ensures that the voltage drop up to and including each final circuit will be limited to the values given in BS
7671:2008 (2011) Appendix 4, 6.4 (Compliance as described in 525.3):
Voltage Drop Limits to Other
BS 7671:2008 Appendix 4, 6.4
Lighting
Uses
Public Supply 3 % 5 %
Private Supply 6 % 8 %

Alternatively, a User Defined setting can be selected allowing a voltage drop limit to all final circuits to be set by the user
(Compliance as described in 525.1, 525.100).
In addition to the global limits, the Load and Motor dialogs contain a Voltage Drop tab which can be used to set a specific limit for
each individual load.
NOTE: the voltage drop limits given in Appendix 4, 6.4 are between final circuits and the ‘origin of the installation (usually the supply
terminals). Therefore, if the source of the network in ProDesign is not the ‘origin of the installation’ then the limits given will not
necessarily be appropriate. In other words, if there is a supply cable connected to the ‘origin of the installation’ which is not included
in the ProDesign model, allowance needs to be made for the voltage dropped in that cable when setting limits. Also, it should be
noted that misunderstandings can and do arise between contractors and clients on what constitutes the ‘origin of supply’ for a
particular installation.
Compliance With Voltage Drop Limits
The Phase Conductor Sizing setting in the Voltage Drop Settings dialog is set by default to ‘Auto size for current‐carrying capacity and
voltage drop limits’, which means that where conductor sizes are set to Auto their sizes will firstly be set to comply with the current‐
carrying capacity requirements and secondly sizes, where necessary, will be adjusted upwards to deal with voltage drop
requirements, as described below.
If the setting is changed to ‘Auto size for current‐carrying capacity only’, sizing for voltage drop will not be carried out. The voltage
drop calculations will still be performed and any non‐compliances will be indicated by error messages.
Where cable sizes or busbar ratings are set to Auto, the voltage drop routine may result in an increase in the size of cables (rating of
busbars) above the sizes set for current‐carrying capacity. If low voltage drop limits are set, or if the network involves long circuit

lengths, considerable upsizing may take place. For each circuit where upsizing occurs to satisfy voltage drop limits, a Note will be
displayed in the Errors and Warnings dialog.
Where ProDesign is unable to meet the voltage drop limits set, an Error message will be generated indicating the load where the
voltage drop is excessive. Errors may occur where:
 Phase Conductor Sizing in the Voltage Drop Settings dialog is set to ‘Auto size for current‐carrying capacity only’;
 The largest cable size for the type selected does not meet the voltage drop requirement;
 For a final circuit cable the ‘Limit maximum cable size to’ control has been set to a cable size that does not meet the
voltage drop requirement.
Identifying branches to final circuits
Each load is located at the end of a branch extending back to the source.
The branches for the loads shown in Fig. 6 below include the following:
 Load 1: Cable 4 + Cable 3 + Cable 2 + Cable 1.
 Load 2: Cable 7 + Cable 2 + Cable 1.
Initial voltage drop allocation
For each of the branches in the network an initial voltage drop limit is allocated to each circuit. The allocation for each circuit will be
a percentage of the voltage drop limit for the load at the end of the branch. The calculation setting the allocated voltage drop for
each individual circuit takes into account the conductor cross‐section, its length and the load current flowing through it. The sum of
the individual allocations in a branch equals the voltage drop limit for the load at the end of the branch.
Voltage drop assessment
Taking each of the branches in turn, the voltage drop in each circuit is calculated, using the sizes determined by the cable and busbar
sizing routines for current‐carrying capacity (see Cable Sizing and Busbar Sizing above). For each circuit, the actual voltage drop is
calculated and then compared to the allocation for that circuit. If the actual voltage drop is equal to or less than the allocation, the
cable size remains as previously calculated.
If the actual voltage drop in a conductor is greater than its allocation, it will be increased one size and the check repeated. This
process continues until all allocations are satisfied or, in cases where the largest available conductor size does not meet the
allocation, an error message will be displayed.

Voltage Drop Reserve at Distribution Boards
For Distribution Boards (and Switchboards and Consumer Units), where Diversity is set to ‘Define Load’ a ‘Voltage Drop Reserve’
setting is enabled.
The ‘Define Load’ setting is intended to be used at a time when there are no details for the loads to be connected to the board. An
estimate of the level of load that will be connected to the board is typed in. At the same time ‘Voltage Drop Reserve’ should be set to
an estimate of the level of voltage drop that will occur across any of the final circuits to be eventually connected to the board.
User intervention
The process described above should produce an acceptable solution but the user may wish to optimise the design by adjusting the
finalised cable sizes while remaining within the setting limits.
For example, in Fig. 6, the re‐sizing routine may have resulted in Cable 1 being increased in size to meet a voltage drop problem in
branch: Cable 1/Cable 5/Cable 8/Cable 10. The user may prefer a solution that increases the size of Cable 5 and leaves Cable 1
unchanged. This can be done by fixing Cable 5 at the increased size desired and re‐calculating. The size of Cables 1 should then
return to the size set by the cable sizing routine for current‐carrying capacity. Alternatively, Cable 1 can be fixed at the desired size
leading to the resizing of Cables 5 and 8 to fit within smaller allocations.
If the sizes of all the conductors in a branch are fixed then ProDesign can no longer re‐size them and the user has manual control of
voltage drop.
A ‘Limit maximum cable size to’ setting in the Load/Motor dialog allows a limit to be set to cable upsizing. This can be used for
purposes such as the prevention of the selection of a size too large to connect to the load terminals.
Radial Lighting Circuits
Where the load description for the circuit is ‘Lighting Radial Circuit’ the voltage drop calculation takes account of the fact that the
loads are distributed along the length of the circuit instead of being concentrated at the extreme end. This gives a lower and more
realistic level of voltage drop for lighting loads.
Fig. 3 shows the layout for a circuit with a conventional load. The voltage drop is the simple product of the circuit impedance and the
design current.
Fig. 4 shows a radial lighting circuit. The voltage drop will be the sum of the voltage drops Vd1, Vd2, Vd3, Vd4, Vd5.

A completely accurate assessment would require the load currents for each individual luminaire and the distances between them. In
ProDesign a good approximation is obtained by the following method:
 The length to the first fitting. The standard calculation is applied to this length.
Vd1ph = { Ct x L x A x [cos  (r1ph) + sin  (x1ph)]} / 1000
 The remaining circuit length. The standard calculation is used and the result divided by 2.
Vd1ph = { Ct x L x A x [cos  (r1ph) + sin  (x1ph)]} / (1000 x 2)
 The reported voltage drop is the sum of the results from the two above calculations.
NOTE: This calculation is not used for Street Lighting circuits – the full details of all conductor lengths and luminaire loadings are
provided by the user and full voltage drop detail is reported.
Motor Starting Voltage Drop
525.102 describes the need to check that the voltage drop associated with motor starting inrush currents do not cause the voltage at
the terminals of other loads to fall to unacceptable levels.
‘When ‘Assess Voltage Drop on Starting’ is checked in the dialog for a motor circuit, the voltage drop associated with the increased
level of motor current during starting is calculated.
Typical values for the starting current and power factor are inserted into the data boxes in the dialog. These can be overwritten with
other values, if required.
‘Assess Voltage Drop on Starting’ can be selected for any number of motors, so that the impact of a group starting simultaneously
can be seen across the distribution network.
In the Motor Starting Voltage Drop report (Menu: Reports | Motor Starting Voltage Drop), the voltage drop during motor starting is
shown for the selected motor circuits and any sub‐mains between those circuits and the supply source.’
Phase Fault Calculations
The phase fault calculations cover three areas:
 Phase fault currents;
 Circuit Protective Device (CPD) breaking capacity;
 Adiabatic check protection of line conductors.
Calculation Method
To find the value of prospective fault (Ipf) current at any point in the network, a sum is made of the impedances in the network
between the Source of Supply (including the source impedance) and the point at which the fault is assumed to occur, i.e., the path
through which the fault current will flow. The summed impedance (Z) is then divided into the nominal applied voltage (U0) to find the
fault current (If):
Fault Current Ipf = U0/Z
The impedance Z is the complex impedance, i.e., Z = r + jx.
The value of applied voltage (U0) will depend on the voltage at the Source of Supply and the type of fault current being calculated.
For example, if the voltage at the Source of Supply is defined as 400 V/230 V and the fault being calculated is line to neutral, the
applied voltage will be 400V/√3.
Two fault currents, maximum and minimum, are calculated at all points in the network.
Maximum Fault Current
The calculation is for the fault configuration that gives the highest possible prospective fault current. For example, for a three‐phase
and neutral circuit, a symmetrical fault (all three phases shorted) would give the highest current. The calculation also uses circuit
resistances measured at 20 °C (lowest resistance, highest fault current).
The formulae used to calculate the maximum fault current are:
Three‐phase and three‐phase and neutral circuit:
Max. fault current = 3ph symmetrical fault current (Isym)
Isym = Uo / (Ze + Z1)
Single phase circuit:
Max. fault current = Phase to neutral fault current (Iph‐n)

Iph‐n = Uo / (Ze + Z1 + Zn)
where: Ze = external phase impedance; Z1 = line conductor impedance @20ºC;
Uo = phase to neutral voltage; Zn = neutral impedance @20ºC.
For a Single phase circuit in a Three phase distribution system, the external phase impedance Ze is the sum of the Phase and Neutral
impedances @20ºC of all upstream conductors in the route back to Source plus the Source impedance.
Minimum Fault Current
The calculation is for the fault configuration that gives the lowest possible prospective fault current. For example, for a three‐phase
and neutral circuit, a phase‐neutral fault would give the lowest current. The calculation also uses circuit resistances at full load
operating temperature.
The formulae used to calculate the minimum fault current are:
Three phase and neutral circuit:
Iph‐n = Uo / (Ze + Z1> + Zn>)
Three phase circuit:
Iph‐ph = UL / 2(Ze + Z1>)
Single phase circuit:
Iph‐n = Uo / (Ze + Z1> + Zn>)
where: UL = line (phase to phase) voltage;
Uo = phase to neutral voltage; Ze = external phase impedance;
Z1> = line conductor impedance at full load operating temperature;
Zn> = neutral conductor impedance at full load operating temperature.

In general, the fault calculation routine in ProDesign follows the above methodology. The difference is in the way in which ProDesign
evaluates and stores the impedances. ProDesign evaluates all of the phase and neutral conductor impedances at 20ºC and operating
temperature. The impedances are then stored in a matrix. For the Phase fault calculations, four matrices are created,
 Phase 20ºC
 Phase&Neutral 20ºC
 Phase Operating temperature
 Phase&Neutral Operating temperature.
ProDesign plucks the relevant impedances from the appropriate matrices when performing the fault calculations. For more
information see the Model Calculation document, Section 5 Phase Fault.
The model calculation document is accessible from the help menu drop down:
Breaking Capacity Check
The breaking capacity of every circuit protective device (CPD) in a network is checked against the prospective fault current conditions
at the point at which the device is installed. If the breaking capacity of any CPD is less than the maximum prospective fault current,
an error message will be displayed.
The fault current could be caused by either a phase fault or an earth fault condition.
Fully Rated CPDs
It is generally a requirement to ensure that the breaking capacity of each Circuit Protective Device (CPD) is equal to or greater than
the maximum prospective fault current at the point of installation (434.5.1). ProDesign carries out a check on the breaking capacity
of each CPD.

The Breaking Capacity (also known as interrupting capacity) of a CPD, is the maximum level of fault current that the device can safely
interrupt. If the device is expected to interrupt a fault current greater than its declared breaking capacity, it will not be suitable for
that duty.
The breaking capacity (Icu) data used by ProDesign is taken from manufacturer’s data at nominal U = 400V.
Circuit‐breakers have two breaking capacities: Icu and Ics. In contrast to circuit‐breakers, fuses generally have a single breaking
capacity.
Breaking Capacity Definitions
Icu / Icn
Icu is defined as the ‘Ultimate Breaking Capacity’ of a circuit‐breaker (Icn is the ‘Normal Breaking Capacity of an mcb, with the same
meaning as Icu). This is the maximum level of fault current that the circuit‐breaker can safely interrupt. Therefore, Icu (or Icn ‐ as
applicable) has to be equal to or greater than the maximum prospective fault current at the point of installation.
Ics
Ics is defined as the ‘Service Breaking Capacity’ of a circuit‐breaker and is the maximum level of fault current that the circuit‐breaker
can interrupt, subject to more stringent requirements than those applicable to Icu. The requirement for Icu is simply to safely interrupt
the fault current and it is acceptable that, having done this, the circuit‐breaker may well be no longer serviceable. For Ics, the circuit‐
breaker must be able to perform a further close/open operation under fault conditions.
For some circuit‐breakers, the Ics rating may be lower than the Icu rating (as low as 50%). For larger circuit‐breakers the two ratings
are often the same.
The standard, BS EN60947‐2, recommends that any circuit‐breaker should be selected and installed such that its Ics rating is equal to
or greater than the maximum prospective fault current at the load end of the circuit in which it is installed. This is a recommendation
not a requirement. Ics and its application, is not mentioned in BS 7671:2008 (2011). Where this recommended condition is not met, a
warning message will be displayed.
Breaking Capacity for Fully Rated CPDs
For each circuit where the CPD has been set to ‘Fully Rated’ (Cable dialog, Protection tab), its Ultimate Breaking Capacity (Icu) is
checked against the calculated maximum fault current at the source end of the circuit.
Cascade Rated CPDs
Generally it is a requirement that the breaking capacity of each Circuit Protective Device (CPD) should be equal to or greater than the
maximum prospective fault current at the point of installation (434.5.1). Alternatively, it is permissible to select a protective device
on the basis of a Cascade Rating (otherwise known as Series Rating or Back‐up Rating).
Cascade Ratings are listed in manufacturer’s tables showing combinations of two devices, one upstream (nearest to the supply) and
one downstream (furthest from the supply). For each combination, a maximum fault capacity is given which is the maximum
prospective fault permissible at the point of installation of the downstream device. This will be higher, sometimes much higher, than
the breaking capacity (Icu) of that device. This is made possible by the energy limiting performance of the upstream device which
ensures that the downstream device will never be expected to interrupt a level of fault current beyond its breaking capacity.
The Cascaded Rating applies to the downstream device, the upstream CPD has to be selected according to the rules for Fully Rated
devices.
Cascade Rating is only valid for published combinations of protective devices and should only be used up to the maximum ratings by
given manufacturers.
Breaking Capacity for Cascade Rated CPDs
The user can only select ‘Cascade Rated’ (Cable dialog, Protection tab) where a valid cascade breaking capacity is available for a
combination of the CPD type under consideration and the CPD used in the upstream circuit.
For each circuit where the user has indicated that the CPD should be ‘Cascade Rated’, the following checks are made:
 The Ultimate Breaking Capacity (Icu) is checked against the calculated maximum fault current at the source end of
the circuit. If the Icu is less than the fault current, the CPD Cascade Rating is then checked.
 The Cascaded Breaking Capacity is checked against the calculated maximum fault current at the source end of the
circuit.

Purpose of Calculation
The calculation is used to check that the energy let‐through of the CPD does not cause the temperature of the line conductors in a
circuit to exceed their maximum admissible limiting temperature (e.g., for thermosetting insulated cables this would be 250 °C)
under fault conditions.
The fault current could be caused by either a phase fault or an earth fault condition. ProDesign calculates all possible conditions and
checks whether or not the heat energy (I2t) flowing during the time taken to disconnect exceeds the conductor withstand (k2S2).
Description of Calculation
The calculation determines the time it would take for the conductor temperature to rise from the highest permissible temperature in
normal load conditions to the maximum admissible limiting temperature. Providing the CPD disconnects within this time, the circuit
is considered to be adequately protected (434.5.2). The formula used is:
t = (k2 S2) / I2
where:
t = the maximum permissible disconnection time;
k = a factor for the type of conductor being used. The value of k reflects the behaviour of the conductor under thermal conditions;
S = the section of the conductor in mm2;
I = the fault current in amperes.
Where the disconnection time is less than 0.1 s, the energy let‐through (I2t) of the CPD has to be less than the value of the cable
withstand (k2 S2), i.e.:
I2t < k2 S2

Data for the calculation is obtained as follows:
 For disconnection times greater than 0.1 s, the protective device actual disconnection time is taken from the
maximum tolerance of its operating characteristic at the calculated fault current – this can be seen in the Graph
View with settings: Overcurrent + Time/Current. (See also: ‘Graph View’.)
 For disconnection times less than 0.1 s, the energy let‐through is taken from the device I2t characteristic at the
calculated fault current – this can be seen in the Graph View with settings: Overcurrent + Energy/Current. (See also:
‘Graph View’.)
Busbar Fault Rating
The fault rating of busbars are checked in two ways:
 Short time withstand. The busbar has to thermally withstand a level of rms through fault current for a stated period,
e.g. 25 kA rms/1 sec.
 Peak withstand. The busbar has to be able to withstand the mechanical stresses associated with the peak value of
fault current.
Short time withstand
This is a check to ensure that the busbar conductors do not become excessively heated by the fault current, i.e., that a maximum
value of heat energy A2s is not exceeded.
The load end minimum phase fault current (IFLMin) is found for the first section of busbar (the one nearest the supply) in the relevant
busbar system (for a centre fed busbar, using the highest of the fault currents for the two sections nearest the supply). Using this
fault current, the disconnection time is found from the CPD database, and this is then used to find the I2t on the supply side of the
busbar system, as follows:
 Disconnection time less than 0.1 s: I2t is the energy let‐through in A2s from the CPD database for the fault current
(IFLMin);
 Disconnection time greater than 0.1 s: I2t is (IFLMin)2 x disconnection time.
The following check is then made:
Irms2 x trms  I2t
where: Irms, trms are the busbar short time withstand current and time.
Where a busbar fails the check an error message will be displayed.

Peak withstand
The busbar has to withstand the stresses associated with the maximum peak value of the maximum prospective fault current. This
peak value (Ipk) occurs in the first half‐cycle of fault current and is calculated as follows:

where:
Ifault(max) is the maximum rms fault current at the load end of the first section of busbar (the one nearest the supply) in the
relevant busbar system.
The following check is then made:
Ipk  Ifaultpk
where: Ipk is the busbar peak fault current withstand.
Where a busbar fails the check an error message will be displayed.
Earth Fault Calculations
The earth fault calculations cover four areas:
 Impedance calculations;
 Automatic disconnection check;
 Additional protection (by RCD) check;
 Circuit protective conductors (CPCs) adiabatic check.
Purpose of Earth Fault Calculations
BS 7671:2008 (2011) contains a chapter (Chapter 41) entirely devoted to requirements for ‘Protection Against Electric Shock’. The
chapter describes measures for protection against shock using both Basic Protection (insulation, barriers, etc.) and Fault Protection
(Automatic Disconnection of Supply and Additional Protection). Basic protection measures are outside the scope of ProDesign, being
mechanical in nature – obstacles, insulation etc. The only exception to this being the use of RCDs additional to the basic protection.
RCDs used for this purpose must have a sensitivity (In) of 30 mA and operate within 40 ms at 150 mA (415.1.1). A user can specify a
30 mA RCD in any circuit but no checks are carried out in ProDesign related to the use of RCDs for the purpose of protection
additional to the basic protection. However, where an RCD is used, ProDesign will check automatic disconnection of supply using the
RCD tripping characteristic.
The purpose of the earth fault calculations in ProDesign is to check in every circuit in a network that shock protection is provided by
automatic disconnection of supply within the times given in Table 41.1.
ProDesign is not suitable for the design of IT systems (systems having a source with no earth connection or a high impedance earth
connection) and therefore does not comply with (411.6).
Earth Fault Current
To find the value of earth fault current at any point in a network, a sum is made of the earth fault impedances in the network
between the Source of Supply (including the source impedance) and the point at which the earth fault is assumed to occur, i.e., the
path through which the earth fault current will flow. The summed earth fault impedance (Zs) is then divided into the nominal phase
to earth voltage (Uo) to find the fault current (Ief):
Earth Fault Current Ief = Uo/Zs
When performing earth fault calculations all conductor resistances are calculated at full load temperature.
The value of the nominal voltage (Uo) is taken from the Single Phase Voltage setting in the Source dialog.
Earth Fault Loop Impedance
For each circuit in any network, the total earth fault impedance, known as the earth fault loop impedance (Zs), is calculated using:
Zs = Ze + Z1 + Z2
where:
Ze = external earth impedance;
Z1 = line conductor impedance;

Z2 = circuit protective conductor (CPC) impedance.
Fig. 1 shows the path of an earth fault in a TN‐C‐S system and the impedances through which the fault current flows. The source
impedance Ze comprises both the line impedance (Z0) and the impedance of the PEN conductor (ZPEN). Z0 will include the transformer
phase winding and the external line conductor cable.
For a network connected directly to a transformer, Ze would be the transformer phase winding only.
For a circuit directly connected to the source of supply, Ze is taken from the data entered into the source dialog by the user.
For other circuits, Ze is the earth fault loop impedance Zs for the previous circuit, i.e., the circuit on the supply side of the circuit
under consideration.
Earth Fault Disconnection
For each circuit it is necessary to verify, using the calculated value of Earth Fault Loop Impedance Zs, that the CPD will disconnect
within a specified time under earth fault conditions (411.4.5, 411.5.4, Table 41.1).
This is checked using:
Zs  (Uo / Ia) or Zs x Ia  Uo
where:
Zs = earth fault loop impedance;
Uo = nominal voltage line to earth;
Ia = earth fault current causing operation of the circuit protective device (CPD) within a specified time.
Generally, Ia is the current causing operation of the CPD but where an RCD is used this is replaced by the RCD sensitivity In.
The specified times for disconnection at Uo = 230 V are:
 5 s (TN) and 1 s (TT) for sub‐main circuits and final circuits > 32 A;
 0.4 s (TN) and 0.2 s (TT) for final circuits ≤ 32 A.
See Table 41.1 for disconnection times for other voltages.
ProDesign automatically selects the appropriate disconnection time according to the circuit type for the circuit under consideration.
Additionally, the user can set shorter times for final circuits.

Earthing Arrangements
In addition to the earthing connection defined at the active supply source, it is also possible to define a local earth connection at a
board (Switchboard, Distribution Board, Consumer Unit). How a board is earthed is defined in the Earthing tab.

The default condition is for the Earthing Arrangement to be set to ‘Earth at Supply Source Only. No Local earthing at Board’. In this
condition the board external earth loop impedance is calculated from the sum of: the external impedance (Ze) at the distribution
system supply connection; the total line conductor impedance (Z1) to the board; the total cpc impedance (Z2) back to the supply
connection. Therefore, Board external earth impedance = Ze + Z1 + Z2.

Fig. 1 shows the existing arrangement, where the earth fault loop impedance Zs would be:
Zs = ZL1 + ZL1A + ZL1B + ZcpcB + ZcpcA + ZE
and the return earth path impedance ZR would be:
ZR = ZcpcB + ZcpcA + ZE [Fig. 3]
Fig. 2 shows an arrangement with a local earth at Board 2 which will be possible with the this development. The board earth
connection EL will have an impedance ZEL defined in the Board form.
The earth fault loop impedance can now be calculated as:
1. Simplified Assumption: Zs = ZL1 + ZL1A + ZL1B + ZcpcB + ZEL
2. Full evaluation: Zs = ZL1 + ZL1A + ZL1B + ZcpcB + [(ZcpcA + ZE) x ZEL]/( ZcpcA + ZE + ZEL)

i.e., the return path includes the impedance of the local earth connection EL in parallel with the sum of the impedances
of cpcA and the source earth conductor E.
And the return earth paths:
1. Zs = ZcpcB + ZEL [Fig. 4]
2. Zs = ZcpcB + [(ZcpcA + ZE) x ZEL]/( ZcpcA + ZE + ZEL) [Fig. 5]
Using the settings in the Board form (see below), the user will be able to model all three of the earthing arrangements described
above:
 Earth at Supply Source Only: applies the existing method unchanged (return circuit as Fig. 3).
 Local Earth at Board:
o ‘Calculate for local earth only’ checked: return path calculated from local earth, supply source earth
ignored (return circuit as Fig. 4);
o ‘Calculate for local earth only’ not checked: parallel paths between local earth and supply source
earth calculated (return circuit as Fig. 5);
The various calculations will be handled in the Zbus module – see Appendix for further details.
NOTE 1: to calculate the parallel paths between the local board earth and the supply source earth (return circuit as Fig. 5), the
impedance of the supply earth conductor (E) is required. This a part of the external impedance (Ze) defined in the Source form which
also includes the transformer winding and line conductor impedances.
For the purposes of the calculation, it might be reasonable to ignore the transformer winding impedance (much lower than the
supply cable impedances) and assume the supply cable line and earth conductors have the same impedance. Therefore the
impedance used for the supply earth conductor would be the Ze value divided by 2. However, where the supply cable is armoured
with the armour being the earth conductor or combined neutral‐earth conductor, this would not be the case.
NOTE 2: the difference in calculating for a TT connection with no supply earth conductor (E) and a TN supply (includes E) needs to be
taken into account. The return path in Fig. 5 applies for a TN connection but for a TT supply, the return path would be as in Fig. 6
below.

Maximum Earth Fault Loop Impedance
ProDesign finds the maximum earth fault loop impedance (Max Zs) by inspecting the tripping characteristic for the CPD to find the
level of current (Ia) that causes the device to operate at exactly the required disconnection time (5 s, 0.4 s, etc.). Ia is found from the
maximum tolerance of the characteristic and gives the slowest operation – see Fig.1.

Max. Zs = Uo / Ia
where: Max. Zs = maximum earth fault loop impedance;
Uo = nominal voltage line to earth;
Ia = fault current that causes disconnection in exactly 5, 0.4 or 0.2 seconds as appropriate.
Checking Earth Fault Loop Impedance
ProDesign checks for each circuit that the value of the earth fault loop impedance Zs does not exceed that of Max. Zs, thus ensuring
that disconnection will occur within the specified time.
If Zs exceeds the permitted value, there are three possible outcomes:
 The external impedance Ze is greater than Max. Zs: the disconnection time will be excessive. It will not be possible to
correct this by increasing the section of either the line or CPC conductors in the circuit. Therefore, an error message
is displayed to alert the user of this condition.
 The CPC Size is set to ‘Auto’ and Ze is less than Max. Zs. ProDesign will attempt to rectify the problem if possible by
increasing the section of the CPC up to the size limit set in the Maximum Separate CPC Size Settings dialog
(Preferences | Calculations | Maximum CPC Sizes. The possible outcomes depend on the CPC configuration selected
by the user (see Network Settings | Conductors | Cables | CPC Tab).
 The user has selected a specific CPC Size in the Cable dialog then an error message is displayed to alert the user of
this condition.
Additional Protection
Together with the requirement to disconnect automatically in a specified time as described above, additional protection in the form
of an RCD is necessary for certain final circuit types (411.3.3):
 Socket‐outlets with a rated current not exceeding 20 A. They are exempted where, either the sockets are used
under the supervision of skilled or instructed persons, or in the case of a socket specifically labelled or identified for
use with a specific item of equipment.
 Mobile equipment with a current rating ≤ 32 A for use outdoors.
An RCD used for this additional protection has to have a rated residual current not exceeding 30 mA and an operating time not
exceeding 40 ms at 5 times the rated residual current (415.1).
Disconnection using earth fault protection
When selecting protection for a circuit it is possible to select, either an RCD in addition to the overcurrent protective device, or an
overcurrent protective device that includes an earth fault protection function. RCDs and earth fault protection are available with
earth fault current settings ranging from as little as 10 mA to hundreds of amperes. Some devices also have settings for time delay
rather than instantaneous operation.
An RCD can be usefully employed in circuits where, for example, the level of earth fault current is low and consequently
disconnection by means of a fuse or circuit‐breaker cannot be achieved. It can have high sensitivity to earth fault currents and be
unaffected by phase fault currents.
Where an RCD is selected, ProDesign assesses the disconnection time using both the overcurrent protective device characteristic
and the RCD characteristic and uses the results from the device that gives the shortest disconnection time.

Earth Fault Adiabatic Calculation
Purpose of calculation
This calculation is a check to ensure that the cross‐section of the CPC is sufficient to allow it to withstand the energy let‐through of
the Circuit Protective Device (CPD), i.e., fuse or circuit‐breaker under earth fault conditions.
Where an RCD is selected in addition to an overcurrent protective device, the disconnection time and energy let‐through data will
correspond to the device that provides disconnection, almost always the RCD.
Description of Calculation
The calculation determines the minimum section required to ensure that the heating effect of the CPD energy let‐through under
earth fault conditions does not cause the temperature of the CPC conductor to exceed its limiting temperature.
The formula used (543.1.3) is:
S = (I2t) / k
where: S = the minimum section of the conductor in mm2;
I = the earth fault current in amperes*.
t =the CPD disconnection time at the earth fault I*;
k = a factor (k) which ‘takes account of the resistivity, temperature coefficient and heat capacity of the conductor material,
and the appropriate initial and final temperatures’. k factors are given in (Tables 54.2 to 54.6).
*where the CPD disconnection time is less than 0.1 s, I2t is the CPD energy let‐through in ampere squared seconds (A2s). Where the
disconnection time is greater than 0.1 s, I2t is the earth fault current squared times the disconnection time.
If the CPC fails the adiabatic test an error message will be displayed. The CPC that has been selected for earth fault disconnection
purposes will be tested and no attempt will be made by the calculation routine to change its size or configuration.

Data for the calculation is obtained as follows:
 For disconnection times greater than 0.1 s, the protective device actual disconnection time is taken from the
maximum tolerance of its operating characteristic at the calculated fault current – this can be seen in the Graph
View with settings: ‘Overcurrent + Time/Current’, or ‘Earth Fault + Time/Current’ where the circuit has residual
current protection. (See also: ‘Graph View’.)
 For disconnection times less than 0.1 s, the energy let‐through is taken from the device I2t characteristic at the
calculated fault current – this can be seen in the Graph View with settings: Earth Fault + Energy/Current. (See also:
‘Graph View’.)
CPC Cable Equivalent Section
Where the CPC configuration comprises two parallel conductors of dissimilar materials (for example, a steel cable armour plus a
separate or integral copper conductor) a complication arises because the k factors for the two conductors are different. This means it
is not possible to calculate S=(I2t)/k directly. This is overcome in ProDesign by converting the armour section to a ‘Cable Equivalent’
section compared to the line conductor and then using the line conductor k factor for the armour in the calculation. This Cable
Equivalent section has the same thermal withstand capability as the original steel section for the purposes of the adiabatic.
This is done using:
Cable Equivalent section mm2
= Actual Section mm2 x (armour k factor / line conductor k factor)
Table 54.7
As an alternative to the calculation method described above (Table 54.7) offers a simple rule‐of‐thumb method of CPC sizing that
avoids any calculation. ProDesign does not make use of Table 54.7; there are two principal objections to its use:
1. It is generally uneconomical. It calls for the following minimum CPC sections:
 the same section as the line conductor (line conductor < 16 mm2);
 16 mm2 (line conductor 16 to 35 mm2);
 half the section of the line conductor (line conductor > 35 mm2).
The calculated size is invariably less than that given in Table 54.7.
2. Sizing CPCs to Table 54.7 only deals with the adiabatic requirement and does not necessarily ensure satisfactory earth fault
disconnection.

Impedance Matrices
ProDesign uses the Zbus matrix method to analyse and calculate impedances. Once conductors have been sized, the Zbus routine
converts the project to an impedance network. The impedance network always starts from the Reference Node, node 0. Each
element in the project is mapped as an impedance.
An example project is shown below in both ProDesign schematic and derived impedance network forms.

Calculation takes place at nodes. The Zbus matrix yields the resolved network impedance at every node. In fact there are five
matrices which are constructed which are required due to circuit phasing and wiring and the different fault levels being calculated.
To evaluate Max and Min phase fault levels in TP, TPN and SP circuits requires four impedance matrices.
 Phase impedances at 20ºC and at full operating temperature
 Phase & Neutral impedances at 20ºC and at full operating temperature
 The fifth matrix requires the CPC impedances at full operating temperature.
Zbus Viewer
Users of ProDesign100 or above can view the Zbus matrices and calculated impedances using the Zbus Viewer. This is accessed
through the Calculation menu.

This will invoke the matrix dialog
The dialog has seven tabs :
 Nodes
 Conductor Impedances
 Ia. Phase Fault Max TP
 lb. Phase Fault Min TP
 IIa. Phase Fault Max TPN
 IIb. Phase Fault Min TPN
 III. Z2 CPC.
Three phase + neutral circuits will use matrix Ia for the phase max fault levels and matrix IIb for phase min fault levels.
Three phase only circuits will use matrix Ia for the phase max fault levels and matrix Ib for phase min fault levels.
Single phase circuits will use matrix IIa for the phase max fault levels and matrix IIb for phase min fault levels.
All circuits will use matrices Ib and III for the earth fault levels.
The ‘Nodes’ tab lists the correlation between project elements and the node mapping.

The ‘Conductor Impedances’ tab lists the conductor impedances Phase and Phase‐Neutral at both operating temperature and at
20°C and the CPC impedances at operating temperature. The impedances are in ohms and are for the actual conductor lengths. The
red corner mark in some cells indicates that the complex impedance values (R+jX) can be viewed by hovering the cursor over the red
mark
The [Ia Phase Fault Max TP], [lb Phase Fault Min TP’], [IIa Phase Fault Max TPN], [IIb Phase Fault Min TPN] and [III Z2 CPC] tabs
display the Zbus matrices. Impedances are in per‐unit on a 100MVA base. The key elements of the matrix are the diagonal. The
element at [1,1] is the resolved network impedance to node 1, element [2,2] is the resolved network impedance to node 2 etc.
The diagonal is highlighted in yellow. Hover the cursor over any of these highlighted cells and an information box will appear. The
info box gives the individual items impedance, the overall impedance magnitude at that node and the phase fault max fault level.
Clicking on any highlighted cell will also display this information in the lower half of the dialog.
The data shown in the tabs can also be printed or exported to Excel for further use.

Harmonics
An increasing number of types of electrical and electronic equipment generate harmonic currents. Desktop computers and electronic
fluorescent lighting are common load types that create triple harmonics. In distribution systems supplying loads that create
significant levels of triple harmonics, conductors selected using conventional sizing rules can become dangerously overheated.
Triple harmonics are those with a frequency 3, 9, etc., times that of the fundamental system frequency (50/60 Hz) – 3rd, 9th, etc.,
harmonics.
From the point of view of cable sizing an unfortunate effect of triple harmonics is that the peaks and troughs of the harmonic
waveforms in each phase of a three phase circuit are aligned. Therefore, the sum of the phase harmonic currents will be three times
the level of harmonic current in each phase.
This results in a much higher level of current flowing in the neutral conductor than would be the case for a circuit with no harmonic
content. For this reason it is necessary to take harmonics into account when sizing conductors to avoid the possibility of dangerous
overheating when the designed network is put into service.
The problem is associated with three‐phase and neutral circuits. Single‐phase circuits, where the neutral current will always be equal
to the phase current, require no special consideration.
In ProDesign a rating factor Ch is applied for levels of 3rd harmonic current above 15 %. In each Load dialog there is an input for the
harmonic current level.
Multi‐core Cables and Busbars
The factor Ch is applied for multicore cable sizing as described in BS 7671:2008 (2011), Appendix 4, 5.5. This method assesses the
rating of the whole cable, taking into account the current levels (and consequent temperature rises) in the line conductors as well as
in the neutral.
BS 7671:2008 (2011), Appendix 4, 5.5 contains a table that gives the value for the rating factor depending on the level of harmonic
current as a percentage of the phase current:
The method used considers the total thermal effect of the current flowing in all the conductors (phases and neutral) of a multi‐core
cable or busbar. Depending on the level of harmonic current, the busbar or cable sizing will be based on the line conductor (< 33 %)
or the neutral conductor (≥ 33 %).
The rating factors given in BS 7671:2008 (2011) are not valid where the phase unbalance of load currents exceeds 50%. Therefore, an
error message is displayed for such conditions.
NOTE: the derating method described is based on assessment of 3rd harmonic currents only, higher order harmonics are not
considered.
The rating factors are applied as follows:
Calculate the neutral harmonic current Ihn = (3h x Ibph)/100
where: h = percentage 3rd harmonic; Ibph = phase design current.
Calculate the minimum cable rating (Iz) using the harmonic correction factor Ch from the table:
3rd harmonic < 33%: Iz  [In / (Cg x Ca x Ci x Cf x Ch)]
3rd harmonic  33%: Iz  [Ihn / (Cg x Ca x Ci x Cf x Ch)]
Harmonic Current and Neutral Protection
Where cable size selection is based on the current in the neutral conductor (level of third harmonic current is greater than 33 %), it is
a requirement that a four‐pole protective device with overcurrent protection of the neutral be used.
ProDesign will give a warning message for this condition if the circuit is protected by fuses, since excess current in the neutral will not
lead to disconnection of the line conductors.

Also, a note is displayed where the protective device is a circuit‐breaker. This reminds the user that a device with protection in the
neutral pole should be used.
Single‐core cables
BS 7671:2008 (2011) Appendix 4, 5.5 does not give guidance for the sizing of single‐core cables for harmonic currents. In ProDesign,
for circuits with single‐core cables, the neutral conductor is sized independently from the phase conductors. The phase conductors
are sized as normal – ignoring the proportion of harmonic content present. The neutral conductor is then sized on the basis of the
sum of two current components:
 Non‐harmonic neutral load current due to phase current unbalance (Iun); the complex sum of non‐harmonic
currents for each of the phases.
 Harmonic neutral current (Ihn).
This current is calculated in the same way as that described above for multi‐core cables.
The complex line currents are added to give the total neutral current Intot = Iun + Ihn
The minimum neutral cable size is then found from the relevant cable data table using the installation method for the phase cable,
i.e.: It  Intot
Accumulation of Harmonic Loads
Cable sizing correction applies only to three phase and three phase and neutral circuits. For final circuits, the harmonic content for
cable sizing is taken from the value entered in the Load dialogs. For each sub‐main circuit, the percentage of harmonic load for each
phase (resulting from the harmonic content of loads connected downstream) is calculated. The example below summarises the
method used.
The loads and the corresponding percentage harmonic contents are shown for each final circuit (e.g, 10 A, 20 %). Loads connected to
DB 3 are all single‐phase (e.g., L1), all remaining loads are three‐phase (L1,2,3).
The procedure finds, for each circuit starting from final circuits and working back to the source, the total load and percentage
harmonic for each phase.
Cable 4
There is only one load per phase so:
L1: Total load = 10 A; % Harmonic = 20 %

Cable 3
Only three‐phase loads present so, values the same for each phase.
L1,2,3:
Total Load = 20 + 10 = 30 A
% Harmonic
= [(Load 3 x % Harmonic 3) / Total Load] + [(Load 4 x % Harmonic 4) / Total Load]
= [(20 x 30) / 30] + [(10 x 36) / 30] = 20 + 12 = 32 %
Cable 2
L1:
Total Load = Cable 4 + Load 1 + Load 2 = 10 + 30 + 16 = 56 A
% Harmonic
= [(Load Cable 4 x % Harmonic Cable 4) / Total Load]
+ [(Load 1 x % Harmonic 1) / Total Load] + [(Load 2 x % Harmonic 2) / Total Load]
= [(10 x 20) / 56] + [(30 x 20) / 56] + [(16 x 40) / 56] = 3.57 + 10.71 + 11.43 = 25.71 %
L2:
Total Load = 15 + 30 + 16 = 61 A
% Harmonic = [(15 x 30) / 61] + [(30 x 20) / 61] + [(16 x 40) / 61]
= 7.38 + 9.84 + 10.49 = 27.71 %
L3:
Total Load = 5 + 30 + 16 = 51 A
% Harmonic
= [(5 x 25) / 51] + [(30 x 20) / 51] + [(16 x 40) / 51] = 2.45 + 11.77 + 12.55 = 26.76 %
Diversity
BS 7671:2008 (2011) Section 311 states that diversity may be taken into account when assessing the maximum of an installation.
Details of how to make diversity settings are contained in the section Project Settings | Diversity Settings. This section describes how
the settings are applied.
The diversity settings made at a board or a busbar tap‐off modify the sum of final circuit load currents calculated at that
switchboard, distribution board or consumer unit.
A diversity settings made at a load modifies the proportion of load design current added to the total load at the board to which it is
connected. The diversity setting does not affect the design of the final circuit.
In a well designed network, the diversity settings should modify the connected load current in each sub‐main circuit to closely
approximate the anticipated maximum demand.
The example below describes how settings are applied and calculated.
Diversity Example

The user has selected ‘User Defined’ as the Diversity method at DB1.
In the table, the diversities shown are the ones the user has set for the premises selected in Preferences | Diversity Settings.

The diversities for the motors are different for the largest, 2nd largest and remaining loads of that type. When assessing diversity
‘Standby’ loads are disregarded. So, in this case, the diversities applied to the motor loads will be:
Motor 1 – 1.00 (largest load);
Motor 2 – 0.00 (Standby);
Motor 3 – 0.85 (3rd largest load but 2nd largest, when Motor 2 is disregarded, therefore 0.85 not 0.65).
For Load 1, Load 2 and Load 3 the user has applied a diversity setting at the Load dialog.
The load for DB 2 has been set at 40 A using the ‘Define Load’ setting. No diversity is applied.
The diversity at DB 1 is set at 0.9.
Results:
Cables 3 to 8 will be sized for the individual circuit design currents (Ib) ignoring any diversity settings.
The total diversified load at DB1 is calculated as follows:
DB 2 = 40 A
Load 1 = 16 x 0.95 x 0.90 = 13.68 A
Load 2 = 25 x 1.00 x 0.80 = 20.00 A
Load 3 = 20 x 0.80 x 0.90 = 14.40 A
Motor 1 = 32 x 1.00 x 1.00 = 32.00 A
Motor 2 = 20 x 0.80 x 0.00 = 00.00 A
Motor 3 = 16 x 0.85 x 1.00 = 13.60 A
Total = 40.00 + 13.68 + 20.00 + 14.40 + 32.00 + 00.00 + 13.60 = 133.68 A
The total connected load at DB 1 will be:
40 + 16 + 25 + 20 + 32 + 20 + 16 = 151 A
The design current for the cable feeding DB1 will be the diversified load at DB1 times the diversity setting at DB1:
Ib for Cbl_1 = 133.68 x 0.9 = 120.3 A
Transformer Load Check
Where a transformer has been defined as the active source supplying the network being designed, a check is carried out to ensure
that the diversified load current to be supplied by the transformer does not exceed its load capacity.
The check is based on the transformer secondary winding load rating calculated from the system voltage and transformer rating
defined in the Transformer dialog as follows.
Secondary load rating (Itxsy):
Itxsy = (Rating x 1000) / (3 Vsy)
where: Rating is the rating of the transformer in kVA (as entered in the Fault Conditions tab);
Vsy is the transformer secondary voltage in V (as entered in the Voltage tab).
The calculated value is displayed in the Protection tab of the Transformer dialog:
If the total network diversified load current exceeds the calculated rating, an error message will be displayed.

Generator Load Check
Where a generator has been defined as the active source supplying the network being designed, a check is carried out to ensure that
the diversified load current to be supplied by the generator does not exceed its load capacity.
The check is based on the generator load rating calculated from the system voltage and generator rating defined in the Generator
dialog as follows.
Generator load rating (Ig):
Ig = (Rating x 1000) / (3 VL)
where: Rating is the rating of the generator in kVA (as entered in the Fault Conditions tab);
VL is the three phase voltage in V (as entered in the Voltage tab).
The calculated value is displayed in the Protection tab of the Generator dialog:

If the total network diversified load current exceeds the calculated rating, an error message will be displayed.
For any board (Switchboard, Distribution Board, Consumer Unit) with diversity set at ‘Define Load’, the Defined Load Threshold
settings define the level at which a note will be displayed in the Errors and Warnings dialog, advising when the load connected to the
board has become excessive.
Local or global settings can be applied to any board; by default the Global Setting will be applied.

The global settings are made in the Defined Load Thresholds dialog (Menu: Preferences | Calculations). There are separate settings
for the different board types:

Example:
the board on the single‐line diagram or defining them in the board circuit diagram) exceeded 132 A (120 x 110/100), a Note would be

Discrimination
The discrimination checks ensure that, wherever a fault might occur in the network, the protective device nearest the fault will
operate to disconnect it rather that the next device upstream. Discrimination is evaluated using the maximum prospective fault
current at the load end of the circuit protected by the downstream protective device. For example, in the diagram below, for the
calculated level of fault current, protective device B should operate to clear the fault. At the same time, device A should not trip.

Two methods of discrimination check, energy‐based and time‐current, are available. These methods are complementary and both
should be used to ensure a comprehensive evaluation of discrimination.
The number of discrimination checks performed, how they are made, and when they are to be made, is determined by the settings
in the Discrimination Settings dialog. Select Calculations | Discrimination Check in the Preferences menu. For more details on
settings, see: Discrimination Settings in the section on Project Settings.
When the selected checks are made depends on the setting in the Discrimination Settings dialog. The checks can be set to occur
following the general network check. Alternatively, the checks can be set to be performed only when requested either from the
menu item Calculate | Discrimination Check or by clicking on the Discrimination button on the Calculate toolbar:

Energy‐based Discrimination Check
The energy‐based check is essential to ensure discrimination between devices, such as fuses and MCBs, which respond
instantaneously, with no intentional time delay, to short‐circuit currents. Assessment of short‐circuit tripping behaviour and resulting
discrimination levels for such devices depends on the levels of energy (A2s) flowing through the devices and cannot be determined
by inspection of time‐current characteristics.
How is the check made?
When ‘Energy‐based check’ is selected in the Discrimination Settings dialog, each time the discrimination checks are performed, an
energy‐based check is made for discrimination under short‐circuit conditions. This check determines the level of discrimination
available between current‐limiting protective devices with instantaneous short‐circuit trip settings.

Because the protection settings on these devices have no intentional time‐delay, verification of discrimination is not possible by
inspection of the tripping characteristics on a graph to determine whether, for a given level of fault current, the downstream device
will trip to disconnect the fault without the upstream device operating.
Manufacturers produce tables listing levels of discrimination between current‐limiting devices, based on test results for devices at
various levels of fault energy under short‐circuit conditions. ProDesign uses these manufacturers’ tables (where available) when
performing the energy‐based discrimination check.
Discrimination tables for the following manufacturers are currently used by ProDesign:
ABB, Dorman Smith, GE Power Controls, Merlin Gerin, Moeller, Siemens, Terasaki
Example:
The example below shows a table entry for a Type ABC250, rating 250A circuit‐breaker upstream and a Type XYZ100, rating 50A
circuit‐breaker downstream. The level of discrimination is given as 23 kA. Providing the fault level at the downstream circuit‐breaker
does not exceed 23 kA, discrimination can be assured. For fault levels greater than 23 kA, an error message will be produced and the
Cable report will show: Discrimination – not OK.
Where there is no manufacturer’s data available for energy‐based discrimination between two protective devices, a warning
message is displayed to this effect. This is likely to occur for two devices of different manufacture.
Where circuits are protected by devices with time delayed short‐circuit protection settings it is not necessary to make an energy‐
based check; discrimination will occur providing the device tripping characteristics do not overlap – this can be verified by inspection
on a graph (see: ‘Time‐Current Discrimination Check’ below).
Time‐Current Discrimination Check
Time‐current discrimination is normally determined by a visual inspection of the time‐current tripping characteristics for two
successive devices to ensure that the characteristics do not overlap, i.e., there are no levels of current for which operation of the
upstream device will be initiated before the downstream device clears the fault.
Evaluating time‐current discrimination
Time‐current discrimination between two protective devices can be checked by visual inspection of their time‐current tripping
characteristics. Providing the characteristics do not overlap, i.e., there are no levels of fault current for which the upstream device
may operate more rapidly than the downstream device, time/current discrimination is assured [A].
Where an overlap does occur, discrimination will fail over the range of current covered by the overlap. However, where an overlap
occurs at levels of fault current greater than the maximum prospective fault current (Ipf) at the downstream protective device, there
is no likelihood of a discrimination failure in practice [B].


How is the check made?
When ‘Time‐current check’ is selected in the Discrimination Settings dialog, each time the discrimination checks are performed, a
time‐current check is made. The check carries out the visual inspection of characteristics electronically, eliminating the necessity of
making visual checks. For every protective device in the network, its tripping characteristic is compared to the characteristic of the
upstream device. For each instance where overlapping characteristics are detected, an error message is generated describing the
extent of the overlap in terms of the level of current at which the overlap starts to the level of current at which it ends.
The scope of the check extends up to the two following limits:
 The level of maximum prospective short‐circuit current (Pscc) at the downstream device. Overlaps beyond this level
will not lead to failure of discrimination because they are beyond the theoretical limit of fault current that can flow
through the two devices.
 Times below 0.07 seconds. Tripping times represented on the characteristic below this level may give useful data
about the total operating time of a device for a given level of current, but cannot be used to reliably check
discrimination. Discrimination in this area can only be properly checked using energy‐based data.
How overlaps of characteristics are evaluated and reported on will depend on the settings Time‐current settings in the
Discrimination Settings dialog at the time of the check.
Example A: where the settings are: Upstream = minimum; Downstream = maximum; Minimum Time Margin = 0 ms: the full
characteristics will be compared, including the full range of minimum and maximum tolerances. Any area of overlap of two
characteristics will be reported as a discrimination failure.
If the Minimum Time Margin is set to, say, 10 ms: any two characteristics that are separated by a time margin less than 10 ms will
give be reported as a discrimination failure.
Example B: where the settings are: Upstream = nominal; Downstream = nominal; Minimum Time Margin = 0 ms: the tolerances are
ignored, and a discrimination failure will be reported for any area where the nominal tripping time of the downstream device
exceeds the nominal tripping time of the upstream device.
Protective Device Setting Check
During the discrimination check a useful check is also made regarding the level of short‐circuit setting compared to the Pscc in the
relevant circuit. If the short‐circuit protection has been set to a level exceeding the Pscc, it will never operate resulting in the circuit
having no short‐circuit protection. Where this condition is detected, a Note will be displayed in the Errors and Warnings dialog.
Discrimination Check Dialog
During the discrimination check, the Discrimination Check dialog summarising the progress of checks will be displayed.

At the end of the check procedure, if any failures have been detected, the Errors and Warnings dialog will be displayed listing the
details of those failures. Also, the Discrimination Check dialog will remain displayed until the Cancel button is clicked.
The Discrimination Check dialog contains the following:
 A progress bar showing the percentage of the checks that have been completed.
 The locations of the two devices currently being checked.
 A check list of the checks completed divided into energy‐based and time‐current items. This shows the number of
circuits checked and the failures detected.
 A check box to allow the dialog to be closed automatically at the end of any future checks.
 During the check process a Cancel button is available to enable the check process to be terminated.
Displaying device characteristics
Once any discrimination checks have been made it may well be necessary to view a number of characteristics curves and to make
adjustments to their settings. There are a number of ways this can be done:
1.
In the Protection tab for the relevant circuit, click on the View Graph button to display the graph view showing the characteristics of
the protective device, the one upstream and the downstream device (the one with the highest setting of those devices immediately
downstream). The settings for any one of these devices can be adjusted and saved to the ProDesign project by clicking on the ‘Save
to ProDesign’ button.
NOTE: if either the upstream or downstream device has its rating set to Auto and the project has not been calculated, its
characteristic will not be displayed.
2.
Select a circuit on the single‐line diagram and click the View Graph button on the Calculate toolbar. This has the same effect as
described in 1. above.
3.
Select a network component other than a circuit (e.g., Load) on the single‐line diagram and click the View Graph button on the
Calculate toolbar. This will display the graph view showing the characteristics of the protective devices along a route‐back‐to‐source
(i.e., for each of the devices between the point indicated and the network supply source. The settings for any one of these devices
can be adjusted and saved to the ProDesign project by clicking on the ‘Save to ProDesign’ button.
4.
Select a network component and click the Protect button. This will create a route‐back‐to‐source discrimination study which can be
viewed, saved and printed in Protect.
NOTE: this study is independent from the ProDesign project from which it was created. Therefore, any changes in the study, such as
changes to settings, will have no affect on the settings in the ProDesign project from which it originated. Conversely, any subsequent
changes in the ProDesign project will have no effect on the Protect study.
Protect Export – Circuit Selector
When you click the Protect Export button or View Graph button in ProDesign while a Distribution Board or Consumer Unit containing
outgoing circuits is highlighted pop‐up dialog will appear asking you to select an outgoing circuit for export to Protect.

If you want to include an outgoing circuit then click on the required row and click OK. Alternatively, you can de‐select the ‘Include
and outgoing circuit’ check box.
Source Calculations
REC Supply Fault Level Calculator
Sets the fault level conditions for the distribution system supply source when the Apply button is clicked.
The fault level calculator estimates the prospective fault current level at the point of supply (the Source in a ProDesign network; the
board’s cut‐out) of a distribution system connected to the LV supply network of a regional electricity company (REC).
Estimated fault levels are based on a declared fault level at the LV Distribution Main (or sub‐station, where applicable) being
attenuated by the impedance of the service line between the distribution main and the point of supply.
There are three possible supply arrangements. For each of these there is a different level of declared prospective fault current (Ipf) at
the point where the service line is connected to the REC distribution network:

Supply type Connection to: Pscc (kA / PF)
230 V, 1‐phase + N LV Distribution Main 16 / 0.55
400 V, 3‐ph / 3‐ph+N LV Distribution Main 18 / 0.50
400 V, 3‐ph / 3‐ph+N LV Sub‐station 25 / 0.23
For each of the three supply arrangements, attenuated fault levels are taken from a table according to the service cable cross‐section
and length.

NOTE: the Service Cable length entered into the calculator should be the length of service cable within the boundary of the
consumer’s premises. The remaining length is subject to change by the REC and its inclusion in the calculated length may result in an
underestimation of the future level of Pscc.
TT Calculation Requirements
The following requirements for distribution systems with TT system supplies are covered by the calculations when the supply source
is selected as ‘TT’.
Earth Fault Disconnection Times (Table 41.1)
Different disconnection times to those for TN systems are applied as described in Table 41.1. This requirement is ignored in a
network where: Protective Equipotential Bonding connections comply with 411.3.1.2. This can be specified in the Source dialog.
RCD protection for final circuits ≤ 32 A
Where an RCD is used to obtain earth fault disconnection in a final circuits rated ≤ 32 A, the Max Zs value is taken from Table 41.5.
Electrode resistance should be less than or equal to 200 Ohms
NOTE 2 of Table 41.5 in BS 7671:2008 (2011) advises that an electrode with a resistance greater than 200 ohms may not be stable.
Therefore, an error message will be generated for this condition.
Bonding conductor adiabatic check
The bonding conductor connecting the earthing electrode to the supply terminals is checked to ensure that it meets the adiabatic
test.
TT Supply Fault Level Calculator
The electrode resistance is calculated as described in the section Electrode Resistance Calculator and then, when the Apply button is
clicked, used to calculate the source earth fault conditions, as described in the section Calculating Earth Fault Impedance.
Electrode Resistance Calculator
Calculations for plate type

Calculations for rod type
Calculating earth fault impedance
The TT Supply Fault Level Calculator produces the impedance of the earth connection (bonding conductor and electrode) ZEC. To
calculate the total external earth fault impedance and the earth fault current, the value produced by the calculator is added to the
supply transformer impedance (ZT) and the impedance of the supply line conductor (ZPE).
The Phase Fault Current (Ip) and/or the Phase Ze etc. is taken from the Prospective Fault Conditions panel. When the Apply button in
the calculator is clicked, the Earth Ze and earth fault current data inserted into the Prospective Fault Conditions panel, is calculated
from the earth connection impedance ZEC from the calculator, added to a proportion of the phase impedance, as described below.
The proportion of phase impedance added to the earth connection impedance ZEC depends on whether the supply is single‐phase or
three‐phase (set in the Voltage tab).

Three‐phase supply
The phase fault current for a three‐phase or three‐phase and neutral supply is the symmetrical fault current, calculated using:
Isym = Uo / Phase Ze.
The impedance Phase Ze is made up of the sum of the transformer and the supply line conductor impedance (ZT + ZPE).
The earth impedance Earth Ze is determined by adding to Phase Ze the earth connection impedance ZEC, i.e.:
Earth Ze 3‐phase = ZT + ZPE + ZEC
Single‐phase supply
The phase fault current for a single‐phase supply is the phase to neutral fault current, calculated using:
Iph+n = Uo
/ (ZPE + ZNE).
The impedance Phase Ze is made up of the sum of the transformer and the supply phase and neutral conductor impedances, ie.:
Phase Ze = (ZT + ZPE + ZNE).
The earth impedance Earth Ze is determined by adding the earth connection impedance ZEC, to the Phase Ze minus the neutral
conductor impedance ZNE, i.e.:
Earth Ze = ZT + ZPE + ZEC
The values of the separate impedances that comprise Phase Ze are not known. It will be assumed that the line and neutral conductor
impedances are equal (ZPE = ZNE) and that, compared to the cable impedances, the transformer impedance is negligible (ZT = 0). Any
inaccuracies will be very small compared to the electrode resistance.
Therefore:
Earth Ze 1‐phase = 0.5 Phase Ze + ZEC
A single supply source can be used to represent a number of identical parallel sources. This feature applies to a Source of Supply,
Transformer or Generator connected to a Switchboard, either directly or through a conductor. Duplicate parallel supplies can be set.
Each parallel supply is a duplicate of the one defined in the dialog. This includes source type, phase and voltage settings, fault
settings, protective device settings, and all conductor parameters.
Selecting Parallel Supplies
To define parallel sources, in the Identical Parallel Supplies panel in the Voltage tab of the source dialog, check Parallel Sources and
select the number of parallel sources:

Calculation of Fault Conditions
Where parallel supplies are used, calculation of fault conditions at the switchboard and the main cables need to take into account
the fault contribution from all supplies connected simultaneously.
The example below is a supply arrangement with two identical parallel transformers each connected to a switchboard through a
supply cable.
 A. Fault contribution from one source. The level of fault contributed by each transformer will be the same as when
only one transformer is connected to the system. This is the fault condition experienced by the supply circuit‐
breaker for a fault at its load terminals.
 B. Through fault in supply cable. The maximum fault current experienced by either supply cable will be for a fault at
the load end of the cable, with the transformer connected to that cable supplying the fault current. For
arrangements with more than two parallel transformers, the maximum fault current will result from a fault at the
supply end of the cable, with fault contribution from all the transformers except the one connected to that cable.
 C. Fault at switchboard. The fault level is the sum of the fault contribution from the two transformers, decremented
by the impedances of the supply cables.

Reports
ProDesign provides a wide variety of reports. These are intended to assist during the design process and to provide comprehensive
documentation for a completed design. The types of reports are:
 Errors and Warnings: these are automatically displayed at the end of the calculation process to alert the designer of
any problems found;
 Quick Results: allows the quick display of the values of key parameters for all or part of the network, as required;
 Display Results: allows selected parameters to be displayed next to selected circuits;
 Reports Wizard: allows simple custom reports to be designed and produced;
 Full Reports: a wide range of reports used to document a completed design.
Errors and Warning Report
At the end of the calculation process, if any problems are found, the Errors / Warnings message box will be automatically displayed:

The box can be left on the screen, if required, while fault finding is carried out.
The box can also be displayed by clicking Reports | Errors / Warnings.
The box contains a list of messages: errors, warnings and notes. Error messages relate to issues that are considered to be essential to
compliance with BS 7671:2008 (2011). Warning messages are advisory, informing the designer of conditions that are not necessarily
non‐compliant but should be taken into account. Notes are low priority messages for information only which can be disabled by the
user.
The ‘Notes’ category can be disabled in the Preferences | Calculations menu.

The box contains the following:
 A list of error and warning messages grouped together by categories denoted by headings, e.g. ‘Sub‐mains Voltage
Drop’.
 Error, warning and notes messages containing the following fields:
 Reference: the reference of the network component;
 Calculated values: calculated values relevant to the highlighted problem;
 Description: a message describing the problem;
Amtech Group Reports  241

 Status: Error, Warning or Note. The messages are also colour coded: red for errors, blue for warnings and green for
Notes.
 List box located above the error and warning messages containing a list of the categories for which error or warning
messages are present. Selecting an item from the list scrolls the Errors and Warnings to the beginning of the block
of messages for the category selected.
 Show: contains two check boxes, ‘Errors’ and ‘Warnings’ which can be checked or not to determine what is
displayed. One of the two boxes must always be checked. The default condition is both boxes checked.
 The number of Errors and Warnings present. The count is unaffected by the status of the ‘Show’ check boxes.
 Cable and Busbar report buttons as appropriate. Clicking one of these report buttons will launch the report selector
dialog. If a warning message is selected when the button is clicked then the component associated with the
message will be the subject of the report.
 Print button: click to create a printed version of the list of messages. The contents of the printout will correspond to
the displayed list as filtered by the ‘Show’ Errors and Warnings check boxes.
 Exit button: closes the dialog.
Find Function
Double‐clicking an error or warning message will cause the drawing to scroll to a position where the network component the
message relates to is centred in the window. Additionally, the network component will be flashing.
Quick Results
Quick Results displays key parameters for selected circuits without the need to produce reports, making it useful for diagnostic
purposes during the design process.
Displaying Quick Results
Quick Results can selected for display from one of the following menus:
 Selecting Quick Results from the Calculation menu:
242  Reports Amtech Group

 Right‐click in an empty area of the drawing and select Quick Results from the floating menu:
The project will be automatically calculated and then the Quick Results menu will be displayed:
The circuits listed depend on what objects are selected on the drawing at the time Quick Results are selected from the menu, as
follows:
 One or more circuits selected: the details for those circuits are listed;
 One or more boards selected: the details for all the circuits connected to the selected board are listed;
 No circuits selected: the details for all the circuits in the project are listed.
All the parameters available to the Quick Results feature are contained in data fields, each of which are displayed either in Quick
Results or in the Field Chooser.
Each of the columns in Quick Results contains a data field with the header containing the name of the parameter and the values of
the parameter for each of the circuits listed below. It is possible to change the order of the fields and which of the fields are or are
not displayed. The Field Chooser is used to select the fields to include or exclude in Quick Results.
Changes made to the layout and content of Quick Results, as described below, will be saved with the project.

Field Chooser
The Field Chooser is displayed by clicking on the Field Chooser button in Quick Results.

All the parameter fields available for use in Quick Results but not currently included, are listed in the top panel of the Field Chooser.
When a parameter in the list is clicked to select it, a text description of its function is shown in the lower panel.
Moving Fields
A field can be moved from the Field Chooser to Quick Results, as follows:
 Click the button in Quick Results to display the Filed Chooser.
 Click and drag the field to be included into the data area of Quick Results. A green arrow will indicate the point at
which the selected field would be inserted:
 Move the mouse until the arrow indicates the required insertion point and release the mouse button. The field will
be inserted:
A field can be removed from Quick Results by reversing the above procedure to drag a heading from Quick Results and drop it in the
top panel of the Field Chooser.
A field can be moved within Quick Results by dragging its column header horizontally and dropping it in a new position. As described
above, as it is moved, a green arrow indicates the insertion point.

Adjusting Column Width
The width of any of the columns in Quick Results can be adjusted using the mouse to click and drag the right‐hand border of the
header:

Display Results
Using Display Results, calculation results can be displayed on the drawing for any network component, e.g., Cable Consumer Unit,
etc. The values of any results that have been selected for display will be updated each time the project is calculated.
Results can be displayed in either of two formats:
 Text alongside: the text appears alongside the component, and can be formatted to appear vertically or
horizontally
 Text in box: the text appears in a box connected to the component by a line.
Setting Display Results
To set the results to be displayed:
Select the components for which results are to be displayed, using one of the following methods:
 Click on a single component to select it;
 Using Shift/Click, select a number of components;
 To select all the components in the network, ensure that no components are selected.

Right‐click to display the floating menu.
Click on Display Results; the Display Results dialog is displayed.


The dialog contains two main areas:
 Display Results Properties;
 Settings tabbed sheets.
Setting Display Results Properties
The Display Results properties can be set in the panel at the top of the Display Results dialog.
The results can be set to appear as one of the following:
 Text Vertical: the results appear as text vertically arranged alongside the selected network components. The text
initially appears at a default position. The position can then be adjusted as required.
 Text Horizontal: the results appear as text horizontally arranged alongside the selected network components. The
text initially appears at a default position. The position can then be adjusted as required.
 Text in box: the results appear enclosed in a box attached to the related component by a line. The box initially
appears at a default position. The position can then be adjusted as required. NOTE: the setting ‘Text in box’ is only
available when a single component is selected. The box background can be set to be transparent or opaque.
 Hide: the selected results are hidden.
The Sample box contains an image that changes as the text setting changes, providing a guide to the resulting appearance.
When the results are set to appear as ‘Text Vertical’ or Text Horizontal’, the separator between each reported item can be set as
Comma, Semi‐colon, Colon, Back Slash, Forward Slash, Space or Vertical Bar.

If the selected component is a single cable, the Apply Back to Source setting is available. When set the selected results are displayed
for each cable along a route from the selected cable back to the active source.
Setting Results to be displayed
The Display Results dialog will contain a tabbed sheet of settings for each of the component types selected. To select a data item for
display, click the box alongside. Items with ticked boxes will be displayed. The example below shows the how the following data
items are selected and displayed:
 Design Current for each phase, (alternatively, by selecting ‘Max.’, the load current in the highest loaded phase could
have been displayed);
 Diversity setting;
 References of the phases to which the component (Load) is connected.

Moving the Results Box
To move a box containing results, click and drag on any point within the box and move it to its new position. Click on clear part of the
drawing background to confirm the move.

Reports Wizard
The Reports Wizard allows custom reports to be created. The format of the reports is similar to those produced by Quick Results.
The Custom Reports feature enables you to create customisable sets of data for exporting in Microsoft Excel, CSV or HTML formats.
To produce a report, first a template is selected or created describing the data items to be included in the report, then the actual
report is produced and made available for viewing and printing. Data to be included can be selected from all the parameters for
which values are calculated in ProDesign.
Once a template has been created, it can be re‐used to produce a report of the same format for any other ProDesign project. A
selection of templates defining different report formats can be created and re‐used as required.
Producing Reports
Clicking the Reports Wizard button on the Calculate toolbar launches the Report Wizard:

To produce a report, proceed as follows:
Step 1. Select a Template:
From the Available Templates list, select a template. If no templates have been previously produced, there will be only the Master
template listed. Selecting the Master template will allow any of the entire range of parameters to be included in the report. Click the
Next button.
Step 2. Select Report Values:
If the Master template was selected in the first step, all the data groups will be listed in the Included box. This means that some or all
of the data from each group (Distribution Board, Busbar CPC etc.) will be available for inclusion in the report. Click on the Next
button.


Step 3. Select Components:
At the end of Step 3, the parameters required in the report need to appear in the Included list. There are two ways to include the
required items:
 To include all the items listed as Available, click the Include All button. The Remove All button can be clicked to
reverse the action of the Include All button.

 To include a single item, click on the item in the Available list and drag and drop it into the Included box.

When all the desired items are listed under Included, click the Next button and the report will be created and displayed.
Viewing and Printing Reports
Tabs for each of the data groups are located at the top of the Reports dialog. Clicking on a tab displays the parameters for that
group. The scroll bars can be used to move around to view all areas of the report. Alternatively maximise the view by clicking on the
maximise button:
.
When printing the report, Landscape or Portrait format can be selected by clicking the appropriate radio button. The entire report
can be printed, clicking either All or Current will determine whether all the tabs or just the current one will be printed
The contents of the report can be modified by clicking the Back button and changing the selection of items listed under Included.
Creating a Report Template
To create a report template, proceed as follows:
Launch the Reports Wizard:
Click the Reports Wizard button on the Calculate toolbar to launch the Report Wizard. Step 1 of the dialog is displayed. Do
not select a template. Click the Next button.


Select the items to be included in the template:
Step 2 of the dialog is displayed. All data groups are shown in the Available list. Click and drag the groups to be included across to the
Included list.

Each of the groups contains individual data items. To exclude any of these items, click on the ‘+’ next to the name of the group to
expand the listing to show the individual items. Click and drag an item back to the Available list to exclude it from the template.
Continue to modify the groups and the items within them listed under Included until the template contents are as required.

Save the template:
Click the Save As Template button. Type in a name for your template. Click OK to save it. Click OK to continue.

View the report created by the template:
Click the Next button, Step 3 of the dialog will be displayed. Include all the data listed under Available (click Include All) or selected
items by dragging them into the Included list and click Next to view the report.
A template, once created, can be used at any time to produce a report by selecting it from the Available Templates list – see
Producing Reports above.
Changing the field order
The order of the data fields can be changed by simply dragging a field to its new location. If you wish to hide a column simply drag it
to the ‘Hidden Columns’ area of the screen.

Full Reports
Full reports are selected from the Reports menu. The menu lists the items for which reports are available. For each of the items a
sub‐menu lists the report types available:

Viewing and Printing
When selecting a report, a report selector dialog appears in which all the components in the project of the type to be reported are
listed.

Selecting Items for Report
Check boxes allow all the components to be reported, or selective categories, e.g., Final Circuits only. Also, by selecting rows in the
listing, a report can be produced for one or more selected items.
Economy Printing
Selecting Economy produces reports in a format that will use less ink or toner.
Economy selected:
Economy not selected:
Viewing Reports
When viewing reports, the toolbar features provided the facilities listed below (from left to right):
 Export: all the reports to be saved in formats such as: Microsoft Word and Adobe Acrobat.
 Refresh: refreshes the view.
 Navigation Buttons: Go to First Page; Go to Previous Page; Go to Next Page; Go to Last Page.
 Go to Page: insert the number of the target page and press the return key.
 Total Number of Pages.
 Find Function: text search facility.
 Zoom: controls the zoom level of the view.
Printing Reports
Clicking the Print button displays a standard Print dialog. NOTE: check the printer paper size is set to A4. (Letter size, for example,
will cause clipping of the page content.)
Document Control
The header of each report shows data taken from the Project revision feature (see: Project Settings > Project Revision) that can be
used to identify the project and its current status at the time the report was created.

The footer provides information on the date of printing and the program version used for the calculation.
Source Details
The report contains data grouped in boxes as follows:
Source Identity
The Id No and Name of the Source as defined in the Source dialog.
Parallel Operation. Where the source is selected as Parallel Supplies, the number of parallel supplies is shown.
NOTE: This Option is only available in ProDesign versions ProDesign100 and above.
Source Type
Type of source as defined by the settings in the Fault Conditions tab of the Source dialog, e.g.: REC Supply from LV Main. Active:
indicates whether the source was the active source used in the calculation when the report was produced.
Supply Voltage
Shows the single phase and three phase voltage of the supply as defined in the Voltage tab of the Source dialog.
A summary of the global project voltage drop settings as set in the Voltage Drop Settings dialog.
Fault Level Data
Shows the phase and earth fault conditions at the supply and at interconnections with the main board:
A. The fault contribution from the source (the values set in the Fault Conditions tab of the Source dialog).
B. Level of through fault in main cable. Used for adiabatic calculations.
C. Fault at board.
For more details on these parameters for parallel supplies, see: Calculations | Source Calculations | Identical Parallel Supplies. NOTE:
Network Load Data
 Diversified Load: the sum of all final circuit loads modified by diversity settings.
 Connected Load: the sum of all final circuit loads ignoring any diversity settings.
 Absorbed Power: the power consumption of the total diversified load given in kW, kVA, and kVAr.
Network Conductor Energy Loss
The heat losses (I2r) in the network conductors, based on conductor resistances at the actual operating temperature in each circuit. It
is assumed that the load current is continuous (i.e., 8760 hours per annum).
The losses are given for conductors carrying the design current and, for comparison purposes, what they would be if the conductors
were fully loaded.
Transformer Details
Transformer Identity
The Id No and Name of the transformer as defined in the Transformer dialog.
Parallel Operation. Where the source is selected as Parallel Transformers, the number of parallel transformers is shown.
Transformer Details
The rating of the transformer in kVA as defined in the Fault Level tab of the Transformer dialog.
The percentage impedance of the transformer as defined in the Fault Level tab of the Transformer dialog.
The rating of the transformer secondary winding calculated from the secondary voltage defined in the Voltage tab of the
Transformer dialog and the rating of the transformer in kVA. IL = kVA / (√3 x VL)

The rating of the transformer primary winding calculated from the rating of the transformer secondary winding and the primary and
secondary voltages defined in the Voltage tab of the Transformer dialog. Ipy = Isy x (Vsy / Vpy)
The secondary load current, i.e., the total design current for the whole network.
The primary load current calculated from the secondary load current and the primary and secondary voltages defined in the Voltage
tab of the Transformer dialog. Ipy = Isy x (Vsy / Vpy).
Active: indicates whether the transformer was the active source used in the calculation when the report was produced.
Supply Voltage
Shows the single phase and three phase voltage of the supply at the primary and secondary windings of the transformer as defined
in the Voltage tab of the Transformer dialog.
Fault Level Data
Shows the phase and earth fault conditions at the transformer secondary terminals and at interconnections with the main board:
A. The fault contribution from the transformer (the values set in the Fault Conditions tab of the Transformer dialog).
B. Level of through fault in main cable. Used for adiabatic calculations.
C. Fault at board.
Protection
Details of the device protecting the transformer, located at the transformer primary or secondary connections, as defined in the
Protection tab of the Transformer dialog.
Network Load
As for Source Details report.
Generator Details
Generator Identity
The Id No and Name of the Generator as defined in the Generator dialog.
Parallel Operation. Where the source is selected as Parallel Generators, the number of parallel generators is shown.
Generator Details
The generator rating in kVA and percentage impedance as defined by the settings in the Fault Conditions tab of the Generator dialog.
Active: indicates whether the generator was the active source used in the calculation when the report was produced.
Supply Voltage
Shows the single phase and three phase voltage of the supply as defined in the Voltage tab of the Generator dialog.
Fault Level Data
Shows the phase and earth fault conditions at the generator secondary terminals and at interconnections with the main board:
D. The fault contribution from the generator (the values set in the Fault Conditions tab of the Generator dialog).
E. Level of through fault in main cable. Used for adiabatic calculations.
F. Fault at board.

Network Load
UPS Details (Source Only) Report
UPS Identity
The Id No and Name of the Generator as defined in the UPS dialog.
UPS Details
The rating of the UPS. For parallel units: the number of parallel units (N) designated to cover the design load; the number of reserve
units to provide redundant capacity in excess of the design load; e.g. for a design load 150 kVA, four parallel units each with a rating
of 50 kVA might be provided to give three units to cover the load and a reserve unit, i.e. N + 1, where N = 3.
Supply Voltage
The voltage, phasing and frequency of the supply provided by the UPS unit.
Voltage drop limits applicable to the supplied network.
Fault Level
Levels of phase and earth faults contributed by the UPS unit or a number of parallel units.
Network Load Data
Summary of total network loads.
The heat losses (I2r) in the network conductors, based on conductor resistances at the actual operating temperature in each circuit. It
is assumed that the load current is continuous (i.e., 8760 hours per annum).
The losses are given for conductors carrying the design current and, for comparison purposes, what they would be if the conductors
were fully loaded.
UPS Details (Distribution) Report
UPS Identity
The Id No and Name of the Generator as defined in the UPS dialog.
Type
Online or Offline.
Status
UPS active or on bypass.
Input Supply / Bypass Supply
As supply connected to UPS input.
UPS Output
Phasing and voltage as in settings dialog.
Rating
UPS rating in kVA. [a] indicates rating set to Auto.
Cable Identities
The identities of the cables connected to the UPS inputs and outputs.

Maximum Charging Current
The maximum normal charging current.
Inrush Multiplier
The multiple of the normal charging current experienced when the battery charge is completely depleted.
Output Harmonic
3rd harmonic content in the inverter output current.
Fault Output
The maximum output fault current for: 1 cycle; 60 seconds; continuous – sustainable for 10 min.
Earthing
Describes earth connection; Local or system earth at supply source. Impedance of the local earth connection.
Protective Devices
Descriptions of protective devices on UPS and Bypass outputs.
Voltage drop limits as applicable to network connected to UPS output.
Distribution Board Report
Board Data
For each Board, the board Id No. and Name is shown.
Circuit Data
For each circuit the following is reported:
Way
The board way to which the circuit is connected.
Phase
The phase or phases to which the circuit is connected.
Id No./Name
The identity of the circuit.
Connected Load
The total connected load for the circuit.
PF
The load power factor.
3rd Harmonic %
The percentage of 3rd harmonic current in the load connected to the circuit.
Protective Device
The nominal rating (In), overload setting (Ir) and Type (Fuse, MCB, etc.) of the circuit protective device.
RCD
The trip setting of the residual current device (mA).
Cable Type
Description of the circuit cable type.
Size
The size of the circuit cable in mm2.

Cores
The circuit cable makeup details.
Example: 2 x 4 x 1c = 2 conductors in parallel; four conductors, i.e., L1, L2, L3, N; single‐core cable.

Sep. CPC
The size in mm2 of a separate conductor used as the circuit protective conductor.
Length
The length of the circuit cable.
Distribution Board Schedule
Board Data
For each Board the following data is reported:
Id No. / Name
The board identity.
Board Rating
As defined in the Optional Data tab of the Distribution Board dialog.
Model No.
Fault Rating
No. of Ways
The number of board ways as defined in the Details tab of the Distribution Board dialog.
Spare
The number of unoccupied ways in the board expressed as a percentage.
Incomer Details
Where the board incomer is a protective device, the manufacturer, type and rating of the device is shown.
Total Connected Load
The total connected load per phase ignoring any diversity settings.
Total Diversified Load
The total connected load per phase multiplied by any diversity settings.
Circuit Data
Way
Phase
Id No./Name

Load Diversified/Connected
The total connected load per phase multiplied by any diversity settings. / The total connected load per phase ignoring any diversity
settings. (Report 1 and Report 2)
PF
The load power factor. (Report 1 and Report 2)
3rd Harmonic %
The percentage of 3rd harmonic current in the load connected to the circuit. (Report 1 and Report 2)
Protective Device
The nominal rating (In), overload setting (Ir) and Type (Fuse, MCB, etc.) of the circuit protective device. (Report 1 and Report 2)
Cg
The group rating factor used in the cable sizing calculation. Values less than 1 are applied for circuits grouped with other circuits
and/or cables in parallel. (Report 2)
Ca
The ambient temperature rating factor used in the cable sizing calculation. (Report 2)
RCD
The trip setting of the residual current device (mA). (Report 1 and Report 2)
Cable Size
The size of the circuit phase cable in mm2. (Report 1 and Report 2)
Cores
The circuit cable makeup details. (Report 1 and Report 2)
Cable Type
Description of the circuit cable type. (Report 1 and Report 2)
Grouped with other circuits
The number of other circuits in the group that are included with this circuit. (Report 2)
Sep. CPC
The size in mm2 of a separate conductor used as the circuit protective conductor. (Report 1 and Report 2)
Length
The length of the circuit cable as defined in the Cable tab of the Cable dialog. (Report 1)
Design Length
Phase Sep. CPC mm2
The size of the circuit cable and size of separate conductor used as CPC, both in mm2. (Report 3)
Connected To:
The network component at the load end of this circuit. (Report 3)
Overcurrent Protective Device
Description and rating of the circuit protective device. (Report 3)

Earth Fault Protective Device
Description and trip rating of the circuit earth fault protective device. (Report 3)
Consumer Unit Report
Board Data
Id No. / Name
The board identity.
Phase
The phase to which the board is connected.
Circuit Data
The circuit data is split up according to the section to which it is connected. The header at the beginning of each section listing shows
the section number (numbered 1, 2, 3 from the supply connections), whether the section is RCD protected, and the trip rating of the
RCD.
Way
Id No./Name
Connected Load
The design current of the load connected to the way.
PF
3rd Harmonic %
The percentage of 3rd harmonic current in the load connected to the circuit. (Report 1 and Report 2)
Protective Device
RCD
The trip rating of an RCD protecting the circuit.
Cable Type
Size
Size of the circuit cable in mm2.
Cores
The circuit cable makeup details. (Report 1 and Report 2)
Sep. CPC

Length
Consumer Unit Schedule
Board Data
Id No. / Name
The board identity.
Board Rating
As defined in the Optional Data tab of the Consumer Unit dialog.
Model No.
Fault Rating
No. of Ways
The number of board ways as defined in the Details tab of the Consumer Unit dialog.
Spare
The number of unoccupied ways in the board expressed as a percentage.
Split Load
Reports ‘Yes’ if the consumer unit has more than one section.

Incomer Details
Where the board incomer is a protective device, the manufacturer, type and rating of the device is shown.
Circuit Data
The circuit data is split up according to the section to which it is connected. The header at the beginning of each section listing shows
the section number (numbered 1, 2, 3 from the supply connections), whether the section is RCD protected, and the trip rating of the
RCD.
Way
Phase
The phase to which the circuit is connected.
Id No./Name
settings.

PF
3rd Harmonic %
Protective Device
RCD
Cable Size
The size of the circuit phase cable in mm2.
Cores
Cable Type
Length
The length of the circuit cable as defined in the Cable tab of the Cable dialog.
Switchboard Report
Board Data
Id No. / Name
The board identity.
Circuit Data
Phase
Id No./Name
Load Diversified
Load Connected
PF
3rd Harmonic %

Protective Device
Cg
The group rating factor used in the cable sizing calculation. Values less than 1 are applied for circuits grouped with other circuits
and/or cables in parallel. (Report 2)
Ca
The ambient temperature rating factor used in the cable sizing calculation. (Report 2)
RCD
Cable Type
Cable Size
Cores
Grouped with other circuits
The number of other circuits in the group that are included with this circuit. (Report 2)
Sep. CPC
Length
Design Length
Switchboard Schedule
Board Data
Id No. / Name
The board identity.
Board Rating
As defined in the Optional Data tab of the Switchboard dialog.
Model No.
Fault Rating

Circuit Data
Phase
Id No./Name
settings.
PF
3rd Harmonic %
Protective Device
RCD
Cable Size
Cores
Cable Type
Sep. CPC
Length
Cable Calculation
Reported items are arranged in boxes according to subject areas, as described below. A separate single page report is produced for
each cable. At the top of the report, before the first box, the following two items are shown:
Error Messages
Where the cable is subject to one or more error conditions, an abbreviated error message is shown. Note: only one error condition is
shown, although there may be multiple errors. The Errors and Warnings dialog gives full details of all errors.

Active Source
The Id No. of the source active at the time the calculation took place. (Where parallel sources have been selected, the total number
in parallel is shown. NOTE: This Option is only available in ProDesign versions ProDesign100 and above.)
Circuit
Cable
The cable identity.
Connection
The Id Nos. of the network components between the which the cable is connected.
Load
The type of load connected to the cable and the design current.
Comments
Text entered in the Comments tab of the Cable dialog.
Length to First Fitting
For a radial lighting circuit, shows the circuit length to the first fitting as set in the Details tab of the Load Details dialog. In the
calculation for a radial lighting circuit, the voltage drop for the length to the first fitting is calculated in the normal way. Over the
remaining length, the calculated voltage drop is halved to approximate the effect of the reduction of the load current along the
length of the circuit.
Protective Device
Details of the overcurrent protective device for the circuit are shown together with the trip rating of residual current protection
where installed.
The Rating and Overload Setting are annotated with the following:
[a] indicates that an Auto setting is applied. This means that when the project is calculated the appropriate setting will be
automatically made to meet protection requirements for the circuit. The report shows the value of the automatic setting.
[f] indicates a fixed setting value applied by the user. The value will be unaffected by the calculation.
[m] indicates that the overload setting is set to maximum. This means that, even if the design current is relatively low, the cable will
be sized to handle a level of continuous load current equal to the maximum overload setting.
Conductors
Phase Conductor
The cable type, makeup, size and length are shown. The following example describes the meaning of the makeup details:
The Size is annotated with one of the following:
[a] indicates that an Auto setting is applied. This means that when the project is calculated the cable size will be automatically
selected to meet the load current and installation conditions. The report shows the automatically selected size.
[f] indicates a fixed size selected by the user. The value will be unaffected by the calculation.
Neutral Conductor
The size of the neutral cable is shown.
The Size is annotated with one of the following:
[a] indicates that an Auto setting is applied. This means that when the project is calculated the cable size will be automatically
selected to meet the neutral load current and installation conditions, and also be at least equal to the phase conductor size. The
report shows the automatically selected size. For a multicore cable the neutral conductor size will result from the automatic
selection of the phase conductor size (for most cable types the phase and neutral conductor sizes will be the same).
[f] indicates a fixed size selected by the user. This condition applies to single‐core cables only.

[d] indicates that the neutral conductor has been set to Double. This means that two conductors will be provided for the neutral
connection, each conductor the same size as the phase conductor.
Installation Method
The installation Method is shown, including the number of the method which corresponds to the method numbers listed in BS
7671:2008 (2011). Also shown are:
 Configuration for single‐core cables, e.g.: flat, trefoil.
 Plastic or Metal for conduit, trunking or ducting.
 Distance through which the cable is run through thermal insulation.
 For cables on tray and similar supports, the way the cables are arranged on the tray and the orientation of the tray,
e.g.: Horizontal Flat Touching.
Rating Factors
The rating factors shown are used in the cable sizing calculations to modify the required cable tabulated current rating depending on
installation conditions such as temperature, etc.
The rating factors and the rules for their use are described in BS 7671:2008 (2011), Appendix 4.
Temperature
The ambient temperature in which the cable is installed. In the case of enclosed methods, e.g., conduit, this is the temperature of
the air surrounding the enclosure.
Ca is the rating factor for ambient temperature for cables installed in air. Normally, Ca = 1 for an ambient temperature of 30 °C.
Cg is the rating factor for ambient temperature for cables installed in the ground. Normally, Cg = 1 for an ambient temperature of 20
°C [BS 7671:2008 (2011)], and Cg = 1 for an ambient temperature of 15 °C (BICC method).
On the same line as the temperature and factor, the source of the data is given in square brackets.
Grouping
The number of circuits in group is shown, i.e., the number of circuits installed within a distance of not more than two cable
diameters from each other. The number shown is that entered into the ‘Total number of grouped circuits’ setting in the Grouping tab
in the Cable dialog.
Cg is the rating factor for grouped cables/circuits. The value shown is based on the number of parallel cables in this circuit multiplied
by the number of circuits in group, i.e., the total number of cables/circuits grouped together. The total number used for the lookup
of Cg can be modified using the setting in the Grouping tab in the Cable dialog. The source of the data is given in square brackets.
For cables installed on tray or similar supports, where applicable, the number of supports and the number of cables on each of the
supports is shown. These correspond to the settings made in the Grouping tab in the Cable dialog.
Where cables are installed in groups, there are two different methods according to BS 7671:2008 (2011), Appendix 4 that can be
used to apply the factor Cg: ‘Subject to Simultaneous Overload’ or ‘Not Subject to Simultaneous Overload’ depending on the setting
selected in the Grouping tab in the Cable dialog.
For cables installed in the ground, the rating factor for grouping also takes into account Spacing. The value of the rating factor Cg
shown reflects both the number of grouped cables and the space between them.
Depth of Lay
For cables installed in the ground, a rating factor (Cd) is applied to account for the difference in current‐carrying capacity of the cable
according to the depth at which it is installed.
Thermal Resistivity
For cables installed in the ground, a rating factor (Cs) is applied to account for the difference in current‐carrying capacity of the cable
according to the rate at which the surrounding soil is able to conduct heat away from the cable, i.e., its thermal resistivity.
Buried Circuit Factor
For cables installed in the ground according to BS 7671:2008 (2011) methods the rating factor Cc is used to apply a factor of 0.9.
User Defined
Where the selected installation method is ‘User Defined’, a user‐defined rating factor is applied in the Cable tab of the Cable dialog.

Run Through Thermal Insulation
Where the selected installation method is ‘Run Through Thermal Insulation’ a rating factor (Ci) needs to be applied according to the
distance through which the cable is run through the insulating material (BS 7671:2008 (2011), Table 52.2).
Harmonics
Where the load in a cable includes a proportion of 3rd harmonic current, a rating factor (Ch) is applied according to the table in BS
7671:2008 (2011), Appendix 4, 5.5.
BS 3036 Fuse
Factor Cf is used to compensate for the use of a BS 3036 fuse, for which a factor of 0.725 is applied.
Cable Sizing
The key variables in the cable sizing calculations are shown. Cable sizing complies with BS 7671:2008 (2011), Appendix 4.
Sized For
For multicore cables, depending on the level of current flowing in the neutral conductor (caused by unbalanced phase currents
and/or harmonic current), the sizing of the cable could be based on either the neutral current or the phase current. The message at
the top of the box states on which basis the calculation was performed.
Voltage Drop Limit
A message shows the voltage drop limit applicable to the individual cable, and whether the setting is to comply with BS 7671:2008
(2011), Appendix 4, 6.4, or according to a user‐defined limit. Settings are made in the Voltage Drop Settings dialog (Preferences /
Calculations / Voltage Drop) and the Voltage Drop tab of the Load Details or Motor Details dialogs.
Design Current
The Design Current (Ib) for a final circuit is the value entered in the Load (A) setting in the Load Details or Motor Details dialogs. For a
sub‐main cable, it is the total diversified load current calculated for that cable.
Device Rating
The nominal rating (In) of the circuit protective device, which has to be equal to or greater than the design current, i.e., In ≥ Ib.
Overload Setting
For a circuit protective device with an adjustable overload, this is the value (Ir) to which it is set. The overload setting has to be equal
to or greater than the design current, i.e., Ir ≥ Ib.
Min. Cable Capacity
This is the minimum required cable capacity (Iz) taking into account the load current and all installation conditions. It is found by
adjusting the device rating (or overload setting for an adjustable device) using the various rating factors (see Box 4 above), according
to the formulae in BS 7671:2008 (2011), Appendix 4. The actual formula used will depend on whether cables are grouped, and
whether ‘Subject to simultaneous overload’ has been selected or not.
For cables defined as installed in the ground according to a ‘BICC’ method, the minimum cable capacity is found by simply dividing all
the rating factors into the device rating (or overload setting for adjustable devices), i.e., In / (Ctg x Cgg x Cd x Cs).
Actual Cable Rating
The tabulated rating (It) of the selected cable. The rating is taken from the table for the particular cable type (Table 4D1, etc.) and
the column in that table that corresponds to the Reference Method applicable to the selected installation method, and the number
of cables or phases.
The actual rating must be equal to or greater than the minimum cable capacity, i.e., It ≥ Iz.
Load Current and Voltage Drop
Design Current
The design current and power factor is shown for each phase and neutral. The neutral current is the vector sum of the three phase
currents, and will be zero for a circuit with balanced phase currents.
3rd Harmonic Current
The level of harmonic current is shown for each phase and neutral. The neutral harmonic current will be the arithmetic sum of the
harmonic currents in each of the phases.
The total current flowing in the neutral will be the sum of the design current and the harmonic current.

Voltage Drop – This Circuit
For each phase the calculated single‐phase voltage drop is shown in absolute and percentage (a percentage of the system voltage)
terms. The voltage drop is calculated according to BS 7671:2008 (2011), Appendix 4, Section 6 and includes corrections for operating
temperature and power factor. Voltage drop calculations are based on currents calculated for each phase from the vector sum of the
phase current and neutral current.
Voltage Drop – From Source
For each phase the total voltage drop from the source, up to and including the circuit being reported, is shown.
Earth Fault
Circuit Protective Conductor
The conductor or conductors used as the circuit protective conductor are described. Conductor sizes are annotated with one of the
following:
[a] indicates that an Auto setting is applied. For a separate conductor this means that when the project is calculated the conductor
size will be automatically selected to meet the earth fault disconnection requirements (subject to the Max. CPC Size setting). For an
integral conductor the conductor section will be that for the cable size selected; the cable size will relate to the current‐carrying
capacity requirement and will not be affected by the earth fault disconnection requirement.
[f] indicates a fixed size selected by the user. The value will be unaffected by the calculation.
Earth Fault Loop Impedance
The values of the component parts of the earth fault loop impedance: Ze , Z1, Z2 are shown, as well as the earth fault loop
impedance Zs. The value of Zs shown is the vector sum of its component parts.
Also shown is the maximum earth fault loop impedance (Max. Zs). The value of Max. Zs is calculated by dividing the current required
to obtain disconnection in exactly the specified time by the phase to neutral voltage, into the phase to neutral voltage. The
disconnection current is found from the maximum tolerance of the protective device characteristic.
Example: the maximum disconnection time for the circuit is 0.4 s; on the maximum tolerance of the characteristic for the protective
device, the disconnection current (Ia) corresponding to a time of 0.4 s is 90 A. Therefore: Max. Zs = Uo/Ia = 230/90 = 2.5556 
Where the circuit protection includes overcurrent protection and an RCD or other earth fault protection, the current for the device
with the lowest disconnection current for the required disconnection time will be used.
In order to comply, the calculated earth fault loop impedance has to be equal to or greater than the maximum earth fault loop
impedance, i.e., Zs ≥ Max. Zs.
Disconnection Time
The disconnection time from the characteristic is found on the maximum tolerance of the device characteristic using the earth fault
current. The earth fault current is calculated by dividing the earth fault loop impedance into the phase to neutral voltage, i.e., Uo/Zs.
The maximum disconnection time for circuits are found in BS 7671:2008 (2011), Table 41.1
Adiabatic Check
The circuit protective conductor is subject to the adiabatic check described in BS 7671:2008 (2011), 543.1.3. This is a check to ensure
that the conductor will not be damaged by the heat energy generated resulting from the earth fault current.
The check takes the form of a comparison between the section of the conductor to be installed, and the minimum acceptable section
calculated thus: Min. S = √(I2t)/k. For compliance: Actual S ≥ Min. S.
The section or sections (mm2) of the conductors used are shown together with their total section. Also shown, for comparison, is the
Min. S.
NOTE: the value of k used in the Min. S calculation is always the same as that for the phase conductor. Where a protective conductor
with a material different to that of the phase conductor is used its section has to be converted to be equivalent to the phase
conductor material; this converted value is shown in the Adiabatic Check section.
Example: phase conductor copper, thermosetting insulation, k = 143; CPC steel wire armour, actual section = 131 mm2, k = 46.
The section of armour shown for the Adiabatic check will be: 131 x 46/143 = 42.14
Earth Fault Current
Earth fault current is calculated by dividing the earth fault loop impedance into the line to earth voltage, i.e., Uo/Zs.

Phase Fault
Phase Fault Current
The maximum and minimum levels of prospective fault current are calculated at each point in the network.
Maximum Phase Fault Current
The maximum value is calculated assuming the lowest likely conductor operating temperature (20 °C) resulting in the lowest
resistance; and the fault configuration that gives rise to the highest level of fault current. For a three‐phase or three‐phase and
neutral circuit, the configuration used for the calculation is a three‐phase symmetrical fault. For a single‐phase circuit a phase to
neutral fault is assumed.
Minimum Phase Fault Current
The minimum value is calculated using the conductor resistance increased by a multiplier to account for a rise in temperature due to
the flow of fault current. Also, the fault configuration giving the lowest level of current is used. For a three‐phase circuit the
configuration used for the calculation is a phase to phase fault. For a three‐phase and neutral circuit, the phase to neutral
configuration is used. For a single‐phase circuit a phase to neutral fault is assumed.
Protective Device Breaking Capacity
The ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) of the circuit protective device is shown. This is the highest level of fault current that the device
is capable of interrupting safely. This should be equal to or greater than the maximum phase fault current at the source end of the
circuit, otherwise an error message will be given.
Where it is lower than Icu, the service breaking capacity (Ics) is recommended to be equal to or greater than the maximum phase
fault current at the load end of the circuit. This is recommended as good practice but is not a requirement.
Cascaded Rating
For certain combinations of upstream and downstream circuit‐breaker it is possible for the downstream device to operate at levels
of fault current higher than its ultimate breaking capacity (Icu). These combinations are certified by the manufacturer and listed in
cascade rated or series rated tables. In the Protection tab of the Cable dialog, the Cascade Rated selection for the CPD Breaking
Capacity is enabled only when a cascaded combination of devices has been selected.
The cascaded rating has to be equal to or greater than the maximum phase fault current at the source end of the circuit.
Adiabatic Check
The line conductors in each circuit are checked to ensure that the adiabatic requirement is met, i.e., the fault current does not cause
the permitted limiting temperature of the conductor to be exceeded. The check complies with BS 7671:2008 (2011), 434.5.2.
Where the fault current is disconnected in less than 0.1 s, the CPD Energy Let‐through is compared to the amount of thermal energy
the cable can withstand without damage, the Adiabatic Limit k2S2. Excessive let‐through energy will result in an error message.
Where the fault disconnection exceeds 0.1 s, the Max. Disconnection Time, calculated using k2S2/I2, is compared with the Actual
Disconnection Time. Where the actual disconnection time exceeds the maximum an error message will be shown.
The check is performed either using the line fault current or the earth fault current depending on which gives the highest level of
energy let‐through.
Cable Analysis
The Cable Analysis report provides a detailed two page account of cable sizing results for each cable in the project. The data is
arranged in boxes, as follows:
Circuit Details
Shows the cable references, the network components between which the cable is connected, and the load type to which the cable is
connected.
Project Settings
The references of the active source at the time the report are shown; the type of source, e.g., TN, transformer, etc.; the voltage drop
limits settings. Also, where the switching of interconnections between supply sources and the switchboard are saved, the name of
the Switching Scenario containing the settings.
(Where parallel sources have been selected, the total number in parallel is shown. NOTE: This Option is only available in ProDesign
versions ProDesign100 and above.)

Cables
The cable details, including: the type, length and size of the line conductors. Also, the sizes and configuration of circuit protective
conductors used.
Cable Sizing
The cable type, size, installation method and reference method.
Cables in Parallel
Where parallel cables are used, if ‘Parallel Cables Spaced’ is selected, it is assumed that the individual cables will be spaced more
that two cable diameters; consequently derating for grouping will not be applied.
If parallel cables are not spaced they will be subject to the application of the grouping rating factor Cg. This can be seen in the Rating
Factor table below.
Subject to simultaneous overload
Where cables are installed in groups, the way the rating factor Cg is applied is defined in BS 7671:2008 (2011) Appendix 4, 5.1.2.
with Equation 2 being used where a number of the cables in the group may be overloaded at any one time: setting ‘Subject to
simultaneous overload’ checked. An example of such a condition would be parallel cables where all the cables in one circuit would
be subject to overload together.
Where the cables in the group would not be expected to be simultaneously overloaded (setting ‘Subject to simultaneous overload’
unchecked) either Equation 3 or 4 would apply. This would generally give a more economic result.
In the table listing cable sizing Parameters, the Rule alongside the value of Iz shows which equation is being applied.
Rating Factor table
For all the rating factors used in the cable sizing calculations, the table shows the value of the factor used in the calculation, the
condition governing the setting, and where applicable, the BS 7671:2008 (2011) table from which the value is obtained.
Rating Factor Ca
The factor is dependent on the ambient temperature surrounding the installation; air or ground temperature depending on the
installation method.
Rating Factor Cg
The value of the factor will depend on the installation method and the number of cables/circuits being grouped together. ‘Derating
for x circuits/cables’ reports the number used to determine the value of Cg. This is normally the same as ‘Total number of Grouped
Circuits’ but it can be reduced at the discretion of the user in the Grouping tab of the Cable dialog.
Rating Factor Cc
Set at 0.9 when the cable is installed in the ground using Installation Methods 70 to 73 as described in BS 7671:2008 (2011).
Rating Factor Ch
Used to adjust cable ratings for circuits with loads containing a percentage of 3rd harmonic current.
Rating Factor Ci
Where cable is run through an appreciable thickness of thermally insulating material, Ci is used modify the required cable rating to
compensate for the reduction in heat dissipation.
Thermal Resistivity Factor Cs
For ground installation methods adjusts the required cable rating according to the level of soil resistivity.
Cable Spacing Factor Cgg
For ground installation methods adjusts the required cable rating according to the spacing between grouped cables.
Depth of Lay Factor Cd
For ground installation methods adjusts the required cable rating according to the depth at which the cables are to be installed.
NOTE: for BS 7671:2008 (2011) Installation Methods 70 to 73 the depth is fixed at a value of 0.7 m. Data is not given for other
depths.
BS 3036 Fuse Factor Cf
Set at 0.725 when a BS 3036 fuse is used.

Parameters table
The nominal rating (In) of the circuit protective device must be equal to or greater than the design current (Ib). For a device with an
adjustable overload, its setting (Ir) must be equal to or greater than the design current (Ib). The required cable rating (Iz) is calculated
from the overcurrent protective device rating modified by the various applicable rating factors. A cable size must be selected from
the tables (BS 7671:2008 (2011) Table 4D1A, etc.) for the selected installation method, with a tabulated rating (It) that is equal to or
greater than the required rating (Iz).
Error Condition
Values marked with an asterisk (*) indicate an error condition.
Voltage Drop
Per Unit Cable Impedance (mV/A/m)
Values of resistance and reactance are taken from BS 7671:2008 (2011) Tables 4D1B, etc. The correct values are found in the column
in the table for the method of installation (Reference Method) being employed.
Total Cable Impedance (mΩ)
The total impedances are found by multiplying the per unit values by the total length of the cable.
Correction factor (Ct)
The rating factors Ca and Cg, together with the cable maximum permitted normal operating temperature (tp), the design current (Ib)
and the cable tabulated rating (It), are used to calculate the operating temperature correction factor (Ct) as defined in BS 7671:2008
(2011) Appendix 4 Section 6.1. The factor is applied as described in Section 6.3 to adjust the tabulated cable resistance (based on, for
example 90 C) to the resistance at the actual operating temperature at the actual load current (which may be lower than the
tabulated current).
Cable Energy Loss (W)
The amount of heat dissipation (I2r) in the cable both at the design current and when fully loaded.
The values of power factor (PF) are used to apply correction for load power factor as described in BS 7671:2008 (2011) Appendix 4
Section 6.2 and 6.3.
Voltage Drop
The calculated voltage drops shown in ProDesign reports are line‐to‐neutral values, e.g., L1 means L1 phase to neutral. It should be
borne in mind that where any of the line load currents differ (unbalanced loads), there will be current flow in the neutral conductor
and, for each phase, the voltage drop will be calculated from the complex sum of the line current and the neutral current.
This tends to complicate any hand calculation made when evaluating the results shown. However, providing the phase load
imbalance is small, a standard hand calculation result should provide a good approximation. Finally, remember when using a
calculation giving a three‐phase voltage drop value, it is necessary to divide by 3 to obtain a comparable result for the voltage drop
in each phase.
Protective Devices
Protective Device Settings
The type, rating, and all settings of protective device overcurrent and earth fault functions are shown.
The protective device Rating (In) can be: Auto [a] – automatically set ; Fixed [f] – set to a fixed value by the user.
The protective device Overload Setting (Ir) can be: Auto [a]; Fixed [f]; Max. [m] – set to its maximum setting (usually the same as the
device rating).
Overcurrent Protection
The details shown are relevant to the protection of the cable in the circuit, for overcurrent, earth fault and adiabatic conditions; also
the fault rating of the device used to protect the cable.
Protective Device Sizing
For a device with a fixed overload, its Rating (In) must be equal to greater than the Design Current (Ib), i.e., In ≥ Ib.
For a device with an adjustable overload, the Overload Setting Ir must be equal to or greater than the Design Current Ib, i.e., Ir ≥ Ib.
For a motor circuit, the device Motor Rating must be equal to greater than the design current (Ib), i.e., Motor Rating ≥ Ib.

Breaking Capacity
The Breaking Capacity of a fuse must be equal to or greater than the maximum fault current* in the circuit being protected, i.e.,
Breaking Capacity ≥ Maximum Fault Current.
The Ultimate Breaking Capacity (Icu) of a circuit ‐breaker must be equal to or greater than the maximum fault current* in the circuit
being protected, i.e., Icu ≥ Maximum Fault Current.
*The maximum fault current is the greater of the following: prospective short‐circuit fault current (Pscc); earth fault current (Ief).
Service Breaking Capacity
It is recommended that the Service Breaking Capacity (Ics) should be equal to or greater than the maximum fault current* at the load
end of the circuit. The principle is, that after interrupting the maximum possible level of fault current that could occur at or beyond
the load terminals, the condition of the circuit‐breaker should be such that it could safely operate to interrupt a further fault. See BS
EN 60947‐2 for more details.
Cascade Rating
A circuit‐breaker can be safely installed in a circuit where the maximum fault current* is greater than its ultimate breaking capacity
providing it has a Cascaded Rating (otherwise known as Back‐up or Series rating) equal to or greater than the maximum fault
current*.
A Cascaded Rating can only be selected where the manufacturer declares a cascaded rating for particular circuit‐breaker working in
conjunction with a nominated upstream circuit‐breaker type. The reported value is shown as ‘No’ unless ‘Cascade Rated’ is selected
in the Protection tab of the Cable dialog.
The Line Conductor Adiabatic Check ensures that, in the event of a fault current, the protective device will disconnect the fault
before the heat energy generated by the fault current raises the temperature of the line conductors to a level liable to cause them to
be permanently damaged.
The fault current could be caused by either a phase fault or an earth fault condition.
Where the disconnection time is instantaneous (<0.1 s), the energy let‐through (A2s) (from manufacturer’s data) is compared to the
cable withstand (k2S2). The cable is protected if: A2s≤k2S2.
Where the disconnection time is not instantaneous (>0.1 s), a Max. Disconnection Time is calculated using: k2S2/Ifmin2. Providing the
actual disconnection time is less than the maximum time, the cable is protected. Generally, using the minimum fault current is
considered to provide the most arduous test, the principle being that a lower fault current will give rise to a longer disconnection
time, which will potentially result in a higher temperature rise. ProDesign performs the test for both maximum and minimum fault
currents and earth fault current.
Error Condition
Earth Fault Protection
Earth Fault Loop Impedance Zs
The values of all the separate components of Zs are shown. Note: the values are the vector sums (Z = r + jx), therefore the total (Zs)
shown will not be the arithmetic sum of the values shown for Ze, Z1 and Z2, except when the earth fault power factor is 1.0.
Max. Earth Fault Loop Impedance Max. Zs
The value is obtained by inspection of the maximum tolerance of the characteristic of the protective device. The disconnection
current (Ia) corresponding to the maximum permitted disconnection time (e.g., 0.4 s) is found from the characteristic, and Max. Zs is
found from Uo / Ia (see BS 7671:2008 (2011) Appendix 3).
An error will be indicated where Zs is greater than Max zs.
Earth Fault Disconnection Time
The actual disconnection time is found from the maximum tolerance of the characteristic of the protective device for the calculated
level of earth fault current.
The maximum disconnection time depends the applied voltage, supply type and circuit type. E.g., Uo = 230 V, TN supply, final circuit
with Ib ≤ 32 A; maximum disconnection time = 0.4 s (see BS 7671:2008 (2011) 411.3.2).
An error will be indicated where the actual disconnection time exceeds the maximum for the circuit type.

Circuit Protective Conductor (CPC) Details
The table shows the k value, actual section, and equivalent section for each of the conductors used as CPC.
The k value is obtained from BS 7671:2008 (2011) Tables 54.3, 54.4, 54.5.
The actual section will be the size of a separate or integral conductor or, in the case of a cable armour, the total cross‐section of the
steel or aluminium strands comprising the armour.
The equivalent section becomes a necessary part of the adiabatic calculation where two CPC conductors with different k values are
to be used. For example, where the armour is used with an integral conductor, the k value for the armour may be 46 (k2) and for the
integral conductor 143 (k1). To perform the adiabatic check S = (I2t) / k, it would be necessary to convert both CPC conductors to
the same k base.
The equivalent section of the armour to the same base as the integral conductor will be: actual section x k1/k2. So, if the actual
section were 128 mm2, the equivalent section would be 128 x 46/143 = 41.17 mm2. This section can then be added to the integral
conductor section to check that the total section meets the minimum section requirement.
An error will be indicated where the Total CPC is less than the minimum (Min. S)
Error Condition
Cable Schedule
For each cable the following items are reported.
Id No./Name
Connected From/To
The network components between which the cable is connected.
Cores
CSA
Cable Type
Length
CPC Separate/Integral
The size in mm2 of a separate conductor used as the circuit protective conductor and/or an integral conductor used as CPC.
Volt Drop
The calculated voltage drop for the specified length of cable as a percentage of the applied phase to neutral voltage.
Protective Device
RCD
Busbar Summary
The following items are reported.

Id No./Name
The identity of the busbar.
Location
Text from the Location box in the Optional tab in the Busbar dialog.
Rating
The current rating of each busbar system at its rated temperature.
Length
The total length of busbar in each busbar system.
Diversified Load
The diversified load current for each phase in the highest loaded busbar section. The diversified load is the total connected load
factored by any diversity settings, which may be made at any tap‐off, board or load.
Protective Device
The rating and type of the next protective device directly upstream from the busbar system, i.e., the device which is effectively
protecting the busbar. Its rating should be equal to or greater than the diversified load in the highest loaded busbar section.
CPC
Type of busbar connection used to provide a circuit protective conductor, i.e., integral busbar, busbar casing, or busbar + casing – the
choices available depending on the facilities provided by the selected busbar type.
Busbar Calculation
Data relating to the selection of the complete busbar system are arranged in boxes according to subject areas, as described below.
At the foot of the report there is a table showing data relevant to each individual section of the busbar system.
A separate report is produced for each separate busbar system.
Busbar
The busbar system reference, the reference of the cable supplying it and the supply source active at the time the report is produced.
Also, shown are Location, Function and Comments, the details of which can be entered in the Optional Data and Comments tabs of
the Busbar dialog.
Protective Device
Details of the overcurrent protective device directly upstream of the busbar system which is effectively providing its protection.
The Rating and Overload Setting are annotated with the following:
[a] indicates that an Auto setting is applied. This means that when the project is calculated the appropriate setting will be
automatically made to meet protection requirements for the circuit. The report shows the value of the automatic setting.
[f] indicates a fixed setting value applied by the user. The value will be unaffected by the calculation.
[m] indicates that the overload setting is set to maximum. This means that, even if the design current is relatively low, the cable will
be sized to handle a level of continuous load current equal to the maximum overload setting.
Busbar Details
Type
The busbar type, rating , no. of phases, no. of poles and length are shown.
The busbar rating is the declared by the manufacturer for the normal ambient operating temperature. It can be set:
[a] Auto setting: from the ratings available for the selected busbar type, the calculation process will select the lowest rating that
satisfies the sizing requirements (see Busbar Sizing below).
[m] Manual setting: a fixed value of busbar rating has been selected by the user.
Installation Method
Busbars can be installed in a horizontal or vertical run. Generally, busbars designed to be run horizontally will have lower rating
when run vertically. Conversely, busbars designed to be used as risers will normally be fully rated when installed vertically.
Depending on the manufacturer data, a rating factor may be applied when ‘Vertical’ is selected (see Correction factors below).

Fault Ratings
Busbars need to be adequately rated to withstand the peak level of current during the first half‐cycle of a fault current (kA peak). The
calculation compares the prospective peak fault current with the peak withstand of the busbar and if the busbar rating is not
adequate an error message will be generated.
Similarly, the busbar needs to withstand a level of fault current for a period of time (kA rms/s). The calculation checks if the
prospective fault current (kA rms) is within the rating for the busbar and that the energy let‐through of the device (I2t) protecting the
busbar does not exceed the withstand declared for the busbar. Again an error message results from a failure of this test.
CPC
Type of busbar connection used to provide a circuit protective conductor, i.e., integral busbar, busbar casing, or busbar + casing – the
choices available depending on the facilities provided by the selected busbar type.
Rating Factors
The rating factors shown are used in the busbar sizing calculations (see Busbar Sizing below).
Temperature
The ambient temperature in which the busbar is installed. The rating factor Ca will have a value of 1.00 at the ambient temperature
on which the manufacturer bases the busbar load rating.
Installation Factor
The value of the rating factor is dependent on the Installation Method (Horizontal/Vertical) and the manufacturer data (see Busbar
Details above).
Harmonics
Where the load in the busbar includes a proportion of 3rd harmonic current, a rating factor (Ch) is applied, the same as for cables,
according to the table in BS 7671:2008 (2011), Appendix 4, 5.5.
Busbar Sizing
The variables used in the busbar sizing calculations are shown.
Design Current
The Design Current (Ib) is the total diversified load current in the most heavily loaded section of the busbar system.
Device Rating
The nominal rating (In) of the circuit protective device directly upstream of the busbar system, which has to be equal to or greater
than the design current, i.e., In ≥ Ib.
Overload Setting
For a circuit protective device with an adjustable overload, this is the value (Ir) to which it is set. The overload setting has to be equal
to or greater than the design current, i.e., Ir ≥ Ib.
Actual Cable Rating
The load rating (It) of the selected busbar type. The rating is provided by the manufacturer.
The load rating must be equal to or greater than the protective device rating divided by the rating factors described above, i.e.:
It ≥ In/(Ca x Ch x Installation Factor)
or for a protective device with an adjustable overload:
It ≥ Ir/(Ca x Ch x Installation Factor).
Busbar Sections
A table contains the following for each of the busbar sections.
From/To
The references of the components (end feed, centre feed or tap off) between which the busbar section is connected.
Length
The length of the busbar section.

Fault Level
The level of fault current at the tap off at the end of the busbar section. The maximum (calculated at 20 °C conductor temperature)
and minimum levels (calculated at the conductor average fault temperature) are shown.
Zs
The earth fault loop impedance Zs at the tap off at the end of the busbar section.
Voltage Drop
The percentage voltage drop at the tap off at the end of the busbar section. The value given is the total from the supply source to
this point.
Section Load
The diversified load in the busbar section.
Busbar Schedule
For each busbar system, the report contains a panel containing general data followed by a table listing data for each tap off.
Busbar
The busbar system reference, the reference of the cable supplying it and the supply source active at the time the report is produced.
The Location, Function and Comments, the details of which can be entered in the Optional Data and Comments tabs of the Busbar
dialog.
The busbar type description and rating.
Tap Off
Id No./Name
The references of the tap off.
Connected To
The references of the cable connected to the tap off.
Protective Device
The type of overcurrent and earth fault protective devices installed at the tap off.
Load
The diversified and total connected load in the circuit connected to the tap off.
Loads Summary
The report first summarises the loadings at each board and then for the total project.
Board Loadings
Id No./Name
The references of each of the boards.
Voltage
The voltage at the board
Connected Load
The total connected load and power factor in each phase for each board. The total connected load is the sum of all connected loads,
ignoring any diversity settings.
Diversified Load
The diversified load and power factor in each phase for each board. The diversified load is the sum of all connected loads factored by
any diversity settings. Diversity settings can be applied either at a board or at individual loads.
Overall Diversity
For each board, the total of all diversity settings applicable in each phase.

kW
For each board, both the connected and the diversified power loadings in kW.
kVAr
For each board, both the connected and the diversified reactive power loadings in kVAr.
kVA
For each board, both the connected and the diversified apparent power loadings in kVA.
Project Loadings
The total connected load and power factor in each phase at the supply source.
The total diversified load and power factor in each phase at the supply source.
Power
The total project power consumption in kW, kVAr, kVA.
Loads Schedule
For each board, the report lists data relevant to the board followed by a table containing data for each final circuit connected to the
board.
Board Data
Id No./Name
The references of the board.
Board Rating
The load current rating of the board as provided by the user in the Optional Data tab of the Board dialog.
Fault Rating
The fault rating of the board as provided by the user in the Optional Data tab of the Board dialog.
No. of Ways
The total number of available ways in the board.
Spare %
The percentage of the total number of ways not occupied by circuits.
Model No.
A text description as provided by the user in the Optional Data tab of the Board dialog.
Board Load
The total connected and diversified loads connected to each phase of the board.
Circuit Data
Id No./Name
The references of the load.
Load type
The load type description.
Connected Load
The connected load and power factor.
Diversity
The load diversity setting, applied in the Details tab of the Load dialog.

Motor Rating/Efficiency
For motor loads, the electrical rating of the motor and its efficiency.
3rd Harmonic
The percentage of third harmonic current in the circuit load current.
Lamps
For Street Lighting circuits, the no. of lamps in the circuit and their power rating.
Loads Analysis
A pie chart graphical representation of the percentage and types of loads for the whole project and for each board.
The loads are divided into Lighting, Heating/Cooling, Motors, General Loads.
Street Lighting Schedule
Id No./Name
The references of the street lighting load.
Phase
The phase to which the street lighting load is connected.
Cable
The size of the cable supplying the street lighting load.
No. of Cores

Cable Type
The type of cable supplying the lighting load.
Length
The length of the cable supplying the lighting load.
Separate CPC
The size of separate circuit protective conductor used. N/A indicates that a separate CPC is not used (e.g., integral conductor of a
multicore cable used as CPC).
Protective Device
Shows the rating and type (Fuse/MCB/MCCB) of protective device.
RCD
The residual operating current (IΔn) of a residual current device where used. N/A indicates that no RCD is being used.
Circuit Chart
There are two boxes at the top of the report, one containing board data, the other incomer details. Below these is a table listing data
for all the circuits connected to the board. There is a separate report for each board.
Board Data
Id No./Name
The references of the board.
Board Rating
The load current rating of the board as provided by the user in the Optional Data tab of the Board dialog.

Fault Rating
The fault rating of the board as provided by the user in the Optional Data tab of the Board dialog.
No. of Ways
The total number of available ways in the board.
Spare %
The percentage of the total number of ways not occupied by circuits.
Model No.
A text description as provided by the user in the Optional Data tab of the Board dialog.
Ze
The external earth fault loop impedance at the board incoming terminals. The note ‘Local Earthing at Board’ is shown where the
board has a local earth connection.
Circuit Details
Way
Phase
Cable/Load Id No./Name
The references of the circuit cable or the load to which it is connected, depending on the selection of report: Circuit Chart | Cable or
Circuit Chart | Load.
Protective Device
The nominal rating and overload setting of the circuit protective conductor. Where the device is not equipped with an overload
setting, this is indicated by ‘N/A’.
RCD
The residual operating current (IΔn) of a residual current device where used. N/A indicates that no RCD is being used.
Conductors
The size of the line conductors and the size of separate circuit protective conductor used. N/A indicates that a separate CPC is not
used (e.g., integral conductor of a multicore cable used as CPC).
Protective Device Settings
For each protective device the report contains the following data.
Id No./Name
The references of the cable being protected by the circuit protective device.
Max Phase Fault Current
The maximum calculated level of fault current at the point to which the device is connected.
Earth Fault Current
The calculated earth fault current through the cable being protected by the circuit protective device.
Breaking Capacity
The maximum level of fault current that the protective device is able to interrupt. If this value is not equal to or greater than both
the max. phase fault current and the earth fault current, an error message will be produced.
Device
The type of circuit protective device.

Rating
The nominal rating (In) of the circuit protective device.
Design Current
The diversified load current Ib in the cable being protected by the circuit protective device.
Settings
Details of all the protective device protection settings. These are listed under four headings:
 Overload (L). Settings intended to operate for overload conditions, i.e., excess current in an undamaged circuit.
 Selective Short‐circuit. Settings intended to operate for fault conditions with a time‐delay to allow discrimination
(selectivity) with a device nearer the load.
 Instantaneous. Settings intended to operate for fault conditions without any intentional time‐delay. May not
provide discrimination with a device nearer the load.
 Earth Fault (G). Settings intended to respond to earth faults only.
For each setting, the identity of the setting together with the setting value is given. This data corresponds to that in the graphical
representation in Protect and the detail on the physical device.
Protective Device Commissioning
For each protective device the report contains the following data.
Id No./Name
The references of the cable being protected by the circuit protective device.
Max Phase Fault Current
The maximum calculated level of fault current at the point to which the device is connected.
Earth Fault Current
The calculated earth fault current through the cable being protected by the circuit protective device.
Breaking Capacity
The maximum level of fault current that the protective device is able to interrupt. If this value is not equal to or greater than both
the max. phase fault current and the earth fault current, an error message will be produced.
Device
The type of circuit protective device.
Rating
The nominal rating (In) of the circuit protective device.
Design Current
The diversified load current Ib in the cable being protected by the circuit protective device.
Settings
Details of all the protective device protection settings. These are listed under four headings:
 Overload (L). Settings intended to operate for overload conditions, i.e., excess current in an undamaged circuit.
 Selective Short‐circuit. Settings intended to operate for fault conditions with a time‐delay to allow discrimination
(selectivity) with a device nearer the load.
 Instantaneous. Settings intended to operate for fault conditions without any intentional time‐delay. May not
provide discrimination with a device nearer the load.
 Earth Fault (G). Settings intended to respond to earth faults only.
For each setting, the identity of the setting together with the setting value is given. This data corresponds to that in the graphical
representation in Protect and the detail on the physical device.

Commissioning Information
Space is left on the report for hand written commissioning information, such as the name and signature of the commissioning
engineer and the commissioning date. There is also a space for Comments.
Energy‐based Discrimination
This is one of two reports relating to discrimination and covers discrimination between devices under fault conditions. For fuses this
is determined by consideration of energy levels in the devices. For circuit‐breakers results are based on data supplied by the
manufacturer of the devices.
Results are given for each pair of devices between which discrimination needs to be considered.
Both reports needs to be considered when making a complete assessment of discrimination.
Id No.
The reference of both the protective devices: upstream (nearest the supply) and downstream (nearest the load).
Protective Device Type
The type description of both the upstream and the downstream protective device.
Rating
The nominal rating In of both the upstream and the downstream protective device.
Discrimination Data
Fuse Protection
When the upstream device is a fuse the following data is shown:
For the downstream device, the let‐through energy is shown: the total amount of energy let‐through (A2s) the fuse in the process of
totally interrupting the fault current.
For the upstream device, the pre‐arc value is shown: the quantity of energy required to cause the fuse element to melt.
Providing the let‐through energy is less than the pre‐arc, discrimination will be maintained.
Status shows the result of the discrimination check: Ok or Error.
Circuit‐breaker Protection
When the upstream device is a circuit‐breaker the following data is shown:
The discrimination limit declared by the manufacturer.
The maximum prospective fault current (Pscc) at the point of installation of the downstream device.
Providing the Pscc does not exceed the discrimination limit, discrimination will be maintained.
Status shows the result of the discrimination check: Ok, Error or No Data.
NOTE: where the devices in a pair are not produced by the same manufacturer and no discrimination data will be available. In such
cases ‘No Data’ will appear in the Discrimination Limit and Status columns.
Time‐Current Discrimination
This is one of two reports relating to discrimination. The time‐current operating characteristics of each pair of devices is compared
and any overlaps are reported (overlaps represent conditions under which the downstream device could operate causing a loss of
discrimination).
Results are given for each pair of devices between which discrimination needs to be considered.
Both reports needs to be considered when making a complete assessment of discrimination.
Id No.
The reference of both the protective devices: upstream (nearest the supply) and downstream (nearest the load).
Protective Device Type
The type description of both the upstream and the downstream protective device.
Rating
The nominal rating In of both the upstream and the downstream protective device.

Characteristics Overlap
For any overlap the range of current over which the overlap occurs is given. Over such a range, discrimination cannot be assured.
Overlaps above the Pscc (see below), which do not affect discrimination, are not considered.
Pscc
The maximum prospective fault current at the point of installation of the downstream device.
Status
Shows the result of the discrimination check: Ok, Error.
Voltage Drop – Circuits
This is one of two reports that provide data on voltage drops at all parts of a project.
The report contains a panel giving general data followed by a table that shows the voltage drops and related data for each circuit in
the project.
Active Source
The reference of the supply source active at the time the report was produced.
Supply Type
The type of supply relevant to standard voltage drop limits as defined in BS 7671:2008 (2011), i.e., Public, Private.
Voltage
The voltage at the supply as defined by the user in the Voltage tab of the Source dialog. The reported voltage drops are calculated
beginning from the value given.
Conductor Auto‐sizing
The sizing of cables and busbars can be carried out to comply with current‐carrying capacity only, or with both current‐carrying
capacity and voltage drop. These settings are made in the Voltage Drop Settings dialog (Preferences | Calculations | Voltage Drop).
Circuit Id No./Name
The circuit references.
Cable/Busbar
Shows whether the conductor in the circuit is a busbar or cable.
Size/Rating
The size of the cable in the circuit or the rating of the busbar. [a] denotes the size/rating set to Auto; [f] denotes the size rating fixed
by the user.
No. in Parallel
In the case of cables, the number of parallel conductors.
Length
The length of the circuit conductor.
Load
The diversified load Ib and power factor in each phase of the circuit.
Voltage Drop
Each voltage drops is shown as an actual value and as a percentage of the supply voltage.
The voltage drops are shown in each phase and both in ‘This circuit’ and ‘From Source’. ‘This circuit’ means only the voltage drop
within the length of this circuit. ‘From Source’ means the total voltage drop from the project supply terminals to the load end of this
circuit.
Conductor Loading
The load (Ib) in the circuit as a percentage of the current‐carrying capacity of the circuit conductor.
Conductor Temp.
The operating temperature of the circuit conductor at the stated load (Ib).

Voltage Drop – Loads
This is one of two reports that provide data on voltage drops at all parts of a project.
The report contains a panel giving general data followed by a table that shows the voltage drops and related data for each load in
the project. For each load, details are given for all circuits from the supply up to and including the final circuit.
Active Source
The reference of the supply source active at the time the report was produced.
Supply Type
The type of supply relevant to standard voltage drop limits as defined in BS 7671:2008 (2011), i.e., Public, Private.
Voltage
The voltage at the supply as defined by the user in the Voltage tab of the Source dialog. The reported voltage drops are calculated
beginning from the value given.
Conductor Auto‐sizing
The sizing of cables and busbars can be carried out to comply with current‐carrying capacity only, or with both current‐carrying
capacity and voltage drop. These settings are made in the Voltage Drop Settings dialog (Preferences | Calculations | Voltage Drop).
Load Id No./Name
The load circuit references.
Circuits
Lists the references of all circuits from the source to the load final circuit.
Cable/Busbar
Shows whether the conductor in the circuit is a busbar or cable.
Size/Rating
The size of the cable in the circuit or the rating of the busbar. [a] denotes the size/rating set to Auto; [f] denotes the size rating fixed
by the user.
No. in Parallel
In the case of cables, the number of parallel conductors.
Length
The length of the circuit conductor.
Load
The diversified load Ib and power factor in each phase of the circuit. The load type (Lighting, Non‐Lighting) as it is relevant to the
voltage drop limits set down in BS 7671:2008 (2011).
Actual Voltage Drop
Voltage drops are shown as actual values and as percentages of the supply voltage.
Per Circuit: the actual voltage drop is given for each circuit between the supply and the load.
Total: the cumulative voltage drop at the end of each circuit between the supply and the load.
Voltage Drop Setting
Limit: the limit set for voltage drop from the supply to the final circuit.
Setting: describes whether the voltage drop limit is the standard value from BS 7671:2008 (2011) or one set by the user.
Voltage at Load
Actual: the actual voltage at the terminals of the load (supply voltage minus voltage drop).
Limit: the minimum permissible voltage at the load terminals (supply voltage minus voltage drop limit).

Zs Measurement
ProDesign calculates the earth fault loop impedance for each circuit in a project. When the results given by the design project are
compared with the actual installation, it is necessary to correct the calculated design results to the temperature at which the
measurements are made. The report shows both uncorrected and corrected values so that a comparison can be made.
Data for circuits are grouped by boards (or the supply in the case of the main cable). For each board there is a list with a header
identifying the board to which the listed circuits are connected.
Distribution Board
The references of the board (or supply in the case of the main cable) to which the circuits in the following list are connected.
Circuit Details
The references of the circuit.
The system voltage.
The maximum earth fault disconnection time for the circuit.
Uo: Line to earth voltage (the Single Phase Supply Voltage in the dialog for the project Active Source);
Max. Disconnection Time: as in BS 7671:2008 (2011), Table 41.5 for the circuit type, or as set by the user in the Load Details dialog.
ProDesign Calculated Values
For each circuit the report lists:
 Max Zs: the maximum permitted earth fault loop impedance calculate from the System Voltage divided by the
minimum Earth Fault Current (Ief) required to disconnect the protective device in the Max. Disconnection Time.
 Ief: The minimum earth fault current required to ensure disconnection in the specified maximum time.
 Corrected Zs: the earth fault loop impedance calculated by ProDesign corrected (using a factor of 0.8) to give an
equivalent impedance at room temperature (0.8 x Uo/Ief).
BS 7671:2008 (2011) Appendix 14
 Ia: the level of earth fault current required to ensure disconnection within the max. disconnection time (obtained
from the protective device characteristic in ProDesign);
 Corrected Max. Zs: the maximum earth fault loop impedance corrected (using a factor of 0.8) to give an equivalent
impedance at room temperature (0.8 x Uo/Ia).
Measured Earth Fault Loop Impedance
 Zs (m): space to record the measured earth fault loop impedance – its value should be equal to or less than the
Corrected Max Zs shown in the previous column.
 Comments: space to insert comments.
Cable Energy Loss
The report shows energy losses in the cables in each circuit and the combined total of all the circuit losses for the whole project.
Additionally, estimated levels of CO2 emissions caused by these losses are reported. Reported values are shown for a range of duty
cycles from 20 to 100 %.
CO2 Emissions
The annual level of CO2 emissions attributed to the cable energy losses are calculated by multiplying the annual losses by a
conversion factor.
The conversion factor used is 0.537 and is taken from:
http://www.nef.org.uk/greencompany/co2calculator.htm
The value used is based on the forecast mix of generating methods to be used to provide power to the grid in the next five years.
Emissions are calculated as follows:
Annual CO2 (kg) = WTA x 0.537

Motor Starting Voltage Drop Assessment
The report shows voltage drop levels for both normal load conditions and during motor starting. The motor starting voltage drop
takes into account the increased current during the starting of the motors set to ‘Assess Voltage Drop on Starting’ in the Details tab
of the Motor dialog.
The following details are shown for all circuits affected by the increase in voltage drop during starting.
Circuit References
The Id No. and Name of each circuit.
Motor References
The Id No. and Name of each motor or, for each sub‐main circuit, the references of the connected distribution board.
Rating
For each motor circuit, the rating of the motor in kW.
Phase
The circuit phase connections.
Starting Current
The starting current and power factor.
Running Current
The starting current and power factor; i.e., the normal load current/power factor.
Voltage Drop – With Motor Starting
The voltage drop during motor starting shown both as a voltage and as a percentage of the system voltage. The cumulative value of
voltage drop from the source to the load terminals is shown as well as the voltage drop in the circuit.
Voltage Drop – Without Motor Starting
The voltage drop under normal load conditions.
Harmonic Assessment
The report shows levels of harmonic current at each board. The values shown are summed from the values entered by the user in
the Details tab of Load and Motor dialogs.
For each board the following information is listed.
Board References
The Id No. and Name of each board.
3rd Harmonic (%)
The third harmonic content as a percentage of the load current, shown for each line and neutral.
3rd Harmonic (A)
The third harmonic current, shown for each line and neutral.
Notes
A text file lists the titles and contents of any Notes placed on the single‐line diagram.
The report shows power factor correction unit details, such as existing power factor and target conditions. The capacitance (in kVAr)
required to meet the target power factor is also shown.
For each power factor correction unit the following information is listed.
Id No./Name
The references of the power factor correction unit.
Target Power Factor
The target power factor, as entered by the user in the power factor correction unit dialog.

Existing Conditions
The existing conditions at the board to which the power factor correction unit is connected. Expressed in kW, kVAr, kVA and power
factor.
Target Conditions
The conditions which will exist at the board to which the power factor correction unit is connected if the suggested capacitance is
applied. Expressed in kW, kVAr, kVA and power factor.
Capacitance Required
The capacitance (in kVAr) required to meet the target power factor.


Autodesk Revit Interface
Overview
Revit MEP is a Building Information Modelling (BIM) application produced by Autodesk www.autodesk.co.uk/
Circuit information defined in Revit MEP can be exported to ProDesign creating an outline electrical schematic. The tools in
ProDesign can then be used to perform comprehensive design calculations. The results calculated by ProDesign can be returned to
Revit and associated with the relevant circuit components in the original Revit model.
This feature requires Autodesk Revit MEP and Amtech ProDesign to be installed on the same computer.
Amtech ProDesign can be configured to link with:
 Autodesk Revit MEP 2013
 Autodesk Revit MEP 2014

The workflow supported by this feature is as follows:
Export from Revit to ProDesign
 User creates a Autodesk Revit MEP model for a specific project which includes electrical circuits connected to panel
boards
 In Revit, the user selects the Export to ProDesign option, found in the Add‐ins menu
 An export file is created
 In ProDesign, user selects an ‘Import from Revit’ option, found in the File menu
 The imported Panel (Boards) and circuits are represented as a schematic in ProDesign. Electrical information, where
available from Revit, is associated with the ProDesign components.

Return from ProDesign to Revit
 User selects the ‘Return design to Revit option’ from the ProDesign File menu
 ProDesign detects previously created data transfer file containing project and cable parameters and populates it
with ProDesign parameters.
 In Revit, the user selects ProDesign cable parameter import function from the Add‐in menu
 Cable parameters from ProDesign are associated with matching ‘circuit’ component in the Revit model. Matching is
performed using Revit unique component ID numbers
 You can then use the ProDesign generated shared parameters to enhance your Revit MEP Panel Schedules.

The Revit project can be re‐exported to ProDesign if required following design revisions. Any boards and circuits added to the Revit
project will also be added to the ProDesign project. Existing boards and circuit properties in ProDesign will be retained and not
overwritten/updated.
Amtech Group Autodesk Revit Interface  287

Configuring the Revit/ProDesign interface
The link between Autodesk Revit and Amtech ProDesign has to be enabled before any data can be transferred. This setup is
performed through the ‘Configure ProDesign/Revit link’ option in the ProDesign ‘File’, ‘Autodesk Revit’ menu option.
Ensure that Autodesk Revit MEP is not currently open. The Revit/ProDesign Add‐in functions cannot be configured while Revit is
open.
The ‘Configure Revit link’ menu option does the following:
 Checks whether either Autodesk Revit MEP 2013 or 2014 are installed on the same computer as Amtech ProDesign
 Asks the user to decide which version of Revit MEP should be linked with (where more than one version is detected)
 Adds a ‘RevitLink’ folder under the user’s ‘My Documents\Amtech\ProDesign’ folder to contain the data transfer
files
 Adds an ‘Amtech Group’ menu group in the Autodesk ‘Add‐ins’ menu ribbon. This contains import and export
functionality

288  Autodesk Revit Interface Amtech Group

ProDesign will search your PC to determine if Autodesk Revit MEP 2013 or 2014 are installed. The detected versions of Revit MEP will
be listed in the drop down list.
Select the version of Revit that you want to link with ProDesign and click ‘OK’.
‘Amtech Group’ menu group will be added to the Revit MEP ‘Add‐ins’ menu ribbon. This contains import and export functionality
Working with multiple versions of Revit MEP
The link can only be configured to work with one version of Revit at a time. The current configuration is displayed on the
configuration dialog.
If you use both 2013 and 2014 versions of Revit MEP than you should switch the ProDesign configuration to the appropriate version
before exporting from Revit. A warning message will be displayed if you try using the Amtech tools in an un‐configured version of
Revit.

Exporting from Revit to ProDesign
An Autodesk Revit MEP design which contains electrical circuits and boards (panels) can be exported to Amtech ProDesign. Electrical
circuits are displayed in the Revit MEP System Browser. Circuits listed under the ‘Power’ category in the System Browser can be
exported to ProDesign.
You are required to select a primary board to export. All boards fed from the selected primary board will be exported.
Export from Revit
In the Revit ‘Add‐in’ menu select ‘Export to ProDesign’ from the Amtech Group menu option.
Details of the current Revit project and the electrical circuits that it contains are displayed.
The boards in your Revit project (known as Panels or ‘Electrical Equipments’) are listed on the left. You are required to select a
primary board to export. All boards fed from the selected primary board will be exported.
Select the required primary board, i.e. the board that you wish to start your ProDesign project with. The sub‐boards and circuits are
listed on the right for your reference.

Click ‘Export’ to create the data transfer file.
A Revit/ProDesign data transfer file (*.PDMEP) will be created.
 The default location for this file will be ‘\My Documents\Amtech\ProDesign\RevitLink’
 The default file name will be the same as the Revit project file
Once created, the *.PDMEP data transfer file should not be subsequently renamed, deleted or moved. ProDesign needs to be able to
find the *.PDMEP file. Otherwise ProDesign is unable to send parameters back to Revit MEP.
Circuit order
There are two methods of controlling the order in which circuit are exported:
 From System Browser. This option exports circuits in the order displayed in the Revit System Browser. This is the
default option. Please note that the Revit System Browser sorts circuits alphanumerically, not by logical way/phase
connection.
 From Panel Schedule. This option uses the circuit order defined on the Revit Panel Schedules. You are required to
enter the label used at the top of the Panel Schedule Way/Phase column (for example, Circuit Number or Circuit
Reference). This option is disabled if no Panel Schedule exists for the selected board.
Importing from Revit into ProDesign
In ProDesign, open a blank project, then select the ‘Import from Revit’ option from the ‘File’, ‘Autodesk Revit’ menu.

Select the appropriate Revit export file (*.PDMEP) by clicking ‘Browse’ on the Revit Import dialog.
Click ‘Import’.
You will be prompted to save the ProDesign project. You may wish to use the same file name as the Revit project.
A basic schematic will be created using Distribution Board, Cables and internal final circuits. Some electrical parameters, where
available, will be imported from the Autodesk Revit design. You will need to add a source of supply to the project. This can be
connected directly to the primary board.
You can now use ProDesign to define the circuit parameters, such as cable type and installation methods, grouping arrangements,
and protective devices.
Please note:
 Any circuits added manually to the ProDesign project will not be returned to Revit.
 The interconnections between the boards, sub‐main cables and internal loads should be maintained; do not
disconnect/reconnect boards or circuits. Otherwise it may be impossible for the application to identify target
circuits when returning electrical properties to the Revit project.
Returning the ProDesign design to Revit
Once you have completed and calculated your electrical design in ProDesign you can return the design to Autodesk Revit MEP. This
will add electrical parameters to each matching circuit component in the originating Revit project.
Select the ‘Return design to Revit’ option from the ProDesign ‘File’, ‘Autodesk Revit’ menu.

ProDesign will attempt to locate the Revit transfer file (*.PDMEP) that was used to create the ProDesign project. If this file can be
found then a message stating that the file has been updated will appear.

In the Revit ‘Add‐in’ menu select ‘Import from ProDesign’ from the Amtech Group menu option.
Select the appropriate data transfer file. The default location for this file will be ‘\My Documents\Amtech\ProDesign\RevitLink’.
A dialog will appear confirming details of the imported ProDesign data file, and a count of the matched circuits.
When the import is complete, ProDesign derived parameters will be associated to the circuit components which existed in your
original Revit project.
ProDesign parameters
Electrical parameters imported from ProDesign will be added to the properties for circuits in Revit. They can be found under the
Circuit ‘Electrical’ properties section.
Autodesk Revit will create the ProDesign generated circuit ‘Electrical’ properties section in all circuits in the Revit project; even those
which were not included in the export to ProDesign. Therefore, excluded circuits will contain blank electrical parameters.
You can use the ProDesign generated shared parameters to enhance your Revit MEP Panel Schedules.

Exporting new circuits from Revit to an existing ProDesign project
You can re‐run the export from Revit to ProDesign. This allows you to add new circuits to a ProDesign project that has been
previously created by the Revit link process.
The process is the same as described under ‘Exporting from Revit to ProDesign’. It is important that you:
 Select the same primary board as in the previous export
 Select the same Revit/ProDesign transfer file (*.PDMEP) as used in the previous export
When importing into ProDesign you should select the ‘Merge with existing ProDesign project’ option. Then browse to the previously
created ProDesign project. This must be the same project as created in the previous Revit to ProDesign export process.
The additional circuits/boards detected in the data transfer file will be listed. Click Import to proceed.
 A Source component will need to be added to the ProDesign project if any changes are detected in the data transfer
file
 If there are new boards in the updated data transfer file then the ProDesign schematic will be regenerated.
 The ProDesign project will be re‐initialised if the phase of any circuit has changed. All properties for all circuits will
be returned to their default import values.
 Any additional final circuits will be added to the appropriate board(s).
 Existing circuits in the ProDesign project will not be altered by this process (unless the phase of any imported
circuits has changed).

Show History
The transfer of circuit details between Revit and ProDesign can be performed numerous times. The Show History option in the Revit
MEP Amtech Add‐in menu displays a history of what was exported and when it was exported.

Frequently Asked Questions
How do I find my Amtech Licence number?
Your Amtech Licence number can be found within the software in the following locations:
 In the 'About…' option found in the software 'Help' menu.
 In the 'Contact Amtech' option found in the 'Support' Menu.
The number is also found on the Software Licence Card supplied with your initial package.
Why do I get ‘Earth Loop Impedance’ error messages?
There is a requirement for a circuit to be automatically disconnected under earth fault conditions within the time specified by BS
7671:2008 (2011), Table 41.1. The overcurrent protective device has to provide that disconnection, unless the circuit is equipped
with an RCD. The level of earth fault current has to be sufficient to ensure that the operating time of the protective device is less
than the specified maximum disconnection time. This is checked by:
 calculating the circuit earth fault loop impedance Zs (Zs = Ze + Z1 + Z2);
 dividing Zs into the line to earth voltage to find the level of earth fault Ief (Ief = Uo/Zs);
 using earth fault current to find the disconnection time from the protective device tripping characteristic;
 comparing the disconnection time with the permitted maximum;
 a time exceeding the permitted maximum leads to an error message. The error message gives the maximum level of
impedance (Max Zs) that will allow compliance.
Common conditions leading to a failure to comply are:
 Extensive circuit length – leads to high impedance of line conductor (Z1) and CPC (Z2);
 Inadequate CPC – some CPC configurations (e.g., Conduit only) may under certain conditions lead to a low value of
Z2 contributing to a low value of Zs;
 High external impedance (Ze) – (e.g., TT system or a circuit at the end of an extensive distribution system) may
mean that even with large conductor sizes (i.e., low Z1 and Z2 values) within the circuit, disconnection may be
problematical.
 Circuit‐breaker with high fault tripping level (e.g., Type D mcb). Note that in most cases for circuit‐breakers, if the
level of earth fault current is insufficient to operate the short‐circuit protection function, disconnection will
probably be non‐compliant.
 Combinations of any of the above.
In most cases, the provision of residual current protection will solve the problem.
Why do I get ‘Earth Fault: Adiabatic’ error messages?
In addition to the requirement that a circuit should disconnect within a specified time under earth fault conditions, it is also
necessary to ensure that the thermal energy (I2t) absorbed by the circuit protective conductor (CPC) during the earth fault does not
exceed a limiting value. Energy levels above the limit may lead to the conductor being permanently damaged. This is checked by:
 comparing the section (mm2) of the CPC with the minimum section (Min S) required to safely withstand the
calculated energy level without damage;
 the Min S is calculated to be equal to √(I2t)/k; where I2t is the protective device energy let‐through (for
disconnection times less than 0.1 s) or the earth fault current squared times the disconnection time (for
Amtech Group Frequently Asked Questions  295

disconnection times greater than 0.1 s); k is a constant for a particular CPC type from BS 7671:2008 (2011), Tables
54.3, 54.4, 54.5;
 where the CPC section is less than Min S, an error message will be generated.
It is also possible to use BS 7671:2008 (2011), Table 54.7 to determine the value of Min S. However, use of Table 54.7 can lead to
excessively large CPCs, whereas finding the value by calculation will always give the most economical choice. Therefore, ProDesign
does not use Table 54.7.
Adiabatic failures often result from relatively low levels of earth fault current. Where the level of fault current is sufficient to cause
rapid disconnection by the protective device, the amount of energy sustained by the CPC is usually well within its limits. In contrast,
low levels of earth fault current lead to prolonged disconnection times during which the total amount of heat energy generated may
be considerable.
This is illustrated by the following example using actual manufacturer’s data:
 Type D MCB, 40 A rating. Earth fault current = 900 A, disconnection time less than 0.1 s; I2t = 11 x 103. A 1.0 mm2
thermoplastic insulated copper cable would comply (k2s2 = 1152 x 1.02 = 13.2 x 103).
 Type D MCB, 40 A rating. Earth fault current = 400 A, disconnection time = 2 s; I2t = 4002 x 2 = 320 x 103. A 6.0 mm2
thermoplastic insulated copper cable would be required (k2s2 = 1152 x 62 = 476 x 103)
Why do I get an Icu/Ics Failure?
ProDesign checks protective devices in compliance with BS EN60947‐2 or, for mcbs, BS EN60898. Part of this standard requires that
device manufacturers test their protective devices under fault conditions to comply with two breaking capacities, Icu and Ics.
Icu
The Ultimate Breaking capacity of the device. The highest level of fault current under which the device can safely operate.
Ics
The Service Breaking capacity, a value of fault current up to which the device will be suitable for reuse (subject to certain limitations)
after interrupting a short circuit fault.
ProDesign checks against both limits and generates an error where fault conditions are excessive.
296  Frequently Asked Questions Amtech Group

Why do I get an Energy‐based Discrimination Failure?
Two types of discrimination check are available in ProDesign: Time‐current and Energy‐based. These can be included or not in the
discrimination check according to the settings in Preferences | Calculations | Discrimination Settings.
The Time‐current check compares the time‐current characteristic curves of successive devices and reports any overlapping areas
where failure of discrimination would occur.
However, the information provided by the time‐current characteristic curves cannot be used to check discrimination between
current limiting devices (fuses, MCBs and many MCCBs) under short circuit conditions – energy‐based discrimination. To determine
discrimination between current‐limiting devices under short‐circuit conditions, an assessment of the fault energy flowing through
the devices has to be made. The method of assessment is different for fuses and circuit‐breakers.
For fuses, the amount of energy let‐through under fault conditions by the downstream fuse is compared to the amount of energy the
upstream fuse can withstand before its element melts (Pre‐arc limit).
For example, discrimination between a 125 A BS 88 fuse upstream and a 100 A fuse downstream will fail. The energy let‐through by
the 100 A fuse will be 60,000 A2s, which is greater than 25,000 A2s which is the Pre‐arc limit for the 125 A fuse. With a 160 A
upstream fuse (Pre‐arc = 62,000 A2s), discrimination would be OK.
Generally for BS 88 fuses, for discrimination to be successful, the upstream fuse should be two current rating sizes above the
downstream fuse.
For circuit‐breakers, evaluation of energy‐based discrimination can only be made by the manufacturer. Therefore, all circuit‐breaker
energy‐based discrimination checks in ProDesign are based on manufacturers discrimination data tables.
For each upstream/downstream circuit‐breaker combination, the tables give the discrimination limit, i.e., the level of fault current up
to which discrimination will be maintained. If the tabulated limit is less than the calculated fault current at the downstream device, a
discrimination error will be reported.
How do I enter the length for a Ring Final Circuit?
The full length of the cable run from the board around the ring and back to the board should be entered in the Length setting in the
Cable dialog. The Cables in Parallel setting in the Grouping tab should not be checked.
The cable sizing, voltage drop and fault current calculations take into account the ring circuit topology. For voltage drop purposes
loads are assumed to be distributed equally around the ring.
What are the Min & Max fault levels in the report?
In reports, ProDesign gives two levels of fault current, Maximum and Minimum, at each end of a cable, Source and Load end.
Maximum fault levels are calculated at 20°C and assume that the fault occurs under 'cold' conditions when conductor resistances will
be at a minimum. This results in the highest possible level of fault current.
The maximum fault current at the source end of the circuit is used to check equipment fault ratings, such as circuit‐breaker or fuse
breaking capacity.
Minimum fault levels assume an average temperature under fault conditions equal to the difference between the assumed initial
temperature of a particular cable and the maximum permitted final temperature. For example a PVC insulated cable would be (70 +
160)°C / 2 = 115°C.
This results in a multiplication factor being used for each particular type of cable when calculating impedances under fault conditions
and in the above example this would be:
1 + (115 ‐ 20) x 0.004 = 1.38 (temperature coefficient of copper = 0.004 per °C at 20°C).
Therefore impedance values shown in reports for minimum fault currents will always be for temperatures greater than 20°C. This
should be remembered when checking against 'cold' values.
The minimum fault current at the load end of the circuit is used in the assessment of phase fault adiabatic checks.

How is Zs Calculated?
The example below describes the calculation processes used to calculate the earth fault loop impedance Zs. The resistive (R) and
reactive (X) elements of the fault loop components are separately processed and summed then, in the final step, the resistive and
reactive totals are summed algebraically to give the total impedance (Zs).
Example
Phase conductor type: Multicore, 90 °C thermosetting insulated/sheathed, non‐arm Cu Table 4E2; Size = 240 mm2; Length = 40 m.
Circuit Protective Conductor (CPC) type: Thermosetting insulated non‐armoured Cu; Size 50 mm2.
Circuit protective device (CPD): BS 88 Fuse; Rating = 500 A.
Calculate the earth fault loop impedance Zs.
Zs = Ze + Z1 + Z2
where:
Ze = external fault impedance; Z1 = phase conductor impedance; Z2 = CPC impedance.
R X Z Comments
Ze: external earth fault loop impedance (set in the
0.0041 0.0202
Source dialog)
Z1: 3ph cable impedance from table 4E2B, col. 4
0.1750 0.1250
[m/m @ 90 °C]
0.1010 0.0722 Line conductor [m/m / √3]
Corrected for temperature [r @ 20 °C = r90 / (1 + (90
0.0789 0.0722
– 20) x 0.004)]
Corrected for fault temperature [using multiplier 54C
0.1010 0.0722
= 1.28 in Table E2]
0.0040 0.0029 Z1: Calculated for 40 m circuit length []
Z2: impedance for 2 conductors from Table 4E1B,
0.9900 0.2700
col. 5 [m/m @ 90 °C]
0.4950 0.1350 Single conductor [/2]
Corrected for temperature [r @ 20 °C = r90 / (1 +
0.3867 0.1350
(90 – 20) x 0.004)]
Corrected for fault temperature [using multiplier 54C
0.4950 0.1350
= 1.28 in Table E2]
0.0198 0.0054 Calculated for 40 m circuit length []
0.0279 0.0285 0.03988 Zs: R = re + r1 + r2; x = xe + x1 + x2; Z = √(R2 + X2)

How is the Cable Equivalent Size of the CPC Size Calculated?
The earth fault adiabatic calculation: Min S = √(I2t)/k, is performed for each circuit. For this purpose the value of k for the type of
circuit protective conductor (CPC) is required.
In cases where two different conductors (e.g., steel wire armour plus integral conductor [incorporated in the cable], or steel conduit
plus separate copper conductor) are used, each of the conductors will have different k values. The adiabatic calculation can only be
performed with a single k value. To deal with this the section (cross‐sectional area in mm2) of both conductors is converted to a value
equivalent to a single k value which can then be used in the adiabatic calculation.
To standardise the adiabatic calculation, even in cases where a single conductor is used, an equivalent section is calculated for the
CPC based on the k value of the line conductor.
Example – armour used as CPC:
Line conductor: 4‐core, 70 °C thermoplastic insulated, SWA, 400mm² copper. Table 4D4. k = 103 (BS 7671:2008 (2011), Table 43.1).
CPC: Steel wire armour; actual section = 467 mm2; k = 51 (BS 7671:2008 (2011), Table 54.4).
CPC equivalent section = actual section x armour k / line conductor k = 467 x 51/103 = 231.2 mm2.
The calculation for the minimum section: Min S = √(I2t)/k; uses k = 103.

Example – armour + integral conductor used as CPC:
As the previous example but with one of the cable conductors used in parallel to the armour.
Armour equivalent section (as before) = 231.2 mm2.
Integral conductor: k = 103 (BS 7671:2008 (2011), Table 54.3).
Integral conductor equivalent section = 400 x 103/103 = 400 mm2.
CPC equivalent section = Armour equivalent section + Integral conductor equivalent section = 231.2 + 400 = 631.2 mm2.
Why can't I add any more Boards?
Each level of ProDesign has a limit to the number of boards that can be entered. This limit is indicated by the number in the product
name. For example, ProDesign 13 has a 13‐board limit.
How does Amtech calculate cable sizes for ring final socket circuits?
The rules described in BS 7671:2008 (2011), 433.1.103 are applied, as follows:
 The circuit must be protected by a protective device of 30 A or 32 A rating;
 The line and neutral conductors must be copper with a minimum size of 2.5 mm2 (1.5 mm2 for mineral insulated;
 The current‐carrying capacity of the cable must not be less than 20 A. NOTE: the required current‐carrying capacity
is equal to the nominal rating of the circuit protective device divided by any relevant rating factors. For example: if
the circuit is to be installed in a group of two cables at an ambient temperature of 35 °C, the minimum current‐
carrying capacity may typically be 20/(0.8 x 0.94) = 26.6 A. This would require a 6 mm2 cable (twin and earth) rather
than the usual 2.5 mm2.
Can ProDesign calculate 110V centre tapped systems?
No. ProDesign cannot calculate 110V systems where the voltage to earth is 55V.
Can ProDesign calculate DC circuits?
No. ProDesign (IEC) is designed to calculate 50Hz/60Hz AC circuits only.
What is the purpose of ‘Length to First Fitting’ in the Lighting, Radial Circuit?
Use of the ‘Length to First Fitting’ setting is intended to improve the estimation of voltage drop in the circuit. The circuit is
considered in two parts, the first being the run of cable to the first fitting and the second remaining length along which the light
fittings are connected.
In the first part the cable is carrying the full circuit load current. In the second part, the load current along the run decreases,
together with the voltage drop, as the connection point for each fitting is passed. The result is that the voltage drop along the total
length of the circuit will be less than that for a circuit with all the load connected to the end of the cable.
An estimate of the overall voltage drop in the circuit is obtained by calculating it normally for the ‘Length to First Fitting’ first part,
then halving the calculated value for the remaining length.
For example, in a radial lighting circuit of 20 m total length with 10 m to the first fitting, the voltage drop would be 0.5 + (0.5/2) =
0.75 times the voltage drop in a conventional circuit of the same length.
How can I prevent voltage drop requirements leading to cable sizes too large to be
terminated?
In networks with extensive cable lengths and similar situations that lead to increases in cable sizes to ensure compliance with voltage
drop limits, it is important to avoid ending up with cables too large to be terminated in the equipment it is connecting.
To avoid this, use the Limit Maximum Cable Size setting in the Voltage Drop tab of the Load or Motor dialog. Normally set at No
Limit, this can be set to any size which then defines the maximum size at which the cable can be automatically set.
The Template feature can be used to define various load types each with their own cable size limits.

I need to use a range of circuit‐breakers that does not appear in ProDesign?
The protective device database in ProDesign contains most of the devices in current use in UK. If a required manufacturer does not
appear in the list in the Protective Devices Selector, try unchecking Supported Manufacturers Only in the Device Selection Filters at
the base of the selector panel.
Supported Manufacturers are those that regularly supply updated information on their products to ProDesign and check that the
data is correctly presented. Every effort is made to ensure that the information for non‐supported manufacturers is correct but that
information is not routinely updated and validated.
Also, the Hide Obsolete CPDs filter, when checked, ensures that products that are no longer available are not made available for
inclusion in a new design. Such products are retained for design checks on as‐fitted existing projects; their use in new designs should
be avoided.
After trying the filters, if the required product is still not listed, one of the devices in the Generic section might provide a suitable
substitute. The characteristics of the Generic device and the required product should be compared using the manufacturer’s data.
In the event that the required device is not listed and there is no suitable substitute, contact ProDesign Support.
Can I avoid repeatedly going through a long list of protective device manufacturers to find

just the small number that I use?
The manufacturer list shown in the Protective Devices Selector can be modified using the Preferred Protective Device Manufacturers
dialog (menu: Preferences | Protective Devices | Preferred Manufacturers).
Select just the manufacturers you require to be displayed; go to the Protective Devices Selector uncheck Supported Manufacturers
Only and check Preferred Manufacturers Only. The list will now only contain the selected Manufacturers.
Why do I get a message reporting no data when checking energy‐based discrimination?
The most likely cause is that the devices being evaluated are produced by different manufacturers.
For circuit‐breakers, evaluation of energy‐based discrimination can only be made by the manufacturer. Therefore, all circuit‐breaker
energy‐based discrimination checks in ProDesign are based on manufacturers discrimination data tables. Each set of tables contain
only devices produced by the one manufacturer, so there will be no information for devices from two different manufacturers.
Similarly, there will be no data where the upstream device is a circuit‐breaker and the downstream device is a fuse.
See also: Why do I get an Energy‐based Discrimination Failure?
Why, when using a circuit‐breaker in a motor circuit, is the rating is reported as zero?
If a standard distribution circuit‐breaker is used for protection in motor circuit, its overload tripping characteristic may not co‐
ordinate correctly with the motor overload in the starter; most commonly premature tripping may occur during starting.
Most circuit‐breaker manufacturers recommend specific types with tripping characteristics compatible with motor operation, which
have substantial motor ratings. At the same time the other types, will have zero motor ratings indicating their unsuitably for motor
operation.
Generally, the recommended circuit‐breaker type for motor circuits will have no overload tripping function, just an instantaneous
trip. The motor starter overload then provides overload protection and the circuit‐breaker fault protection. Consult the
manufacturer for recommended types.
The motor rating of a protective device in a motor circuit can be checked in the Protective Devices Selector. When a Rating is
selected in the right‐hand column, its motor rating is shown below.
Why is the tabulated rating of a cable the same both when using a single cable and when
parallel cables?
Cable sizing in ProDesign is aimed at finding a cable with a suitable tabulated rating as listed in Tables 4D1A etc, in BS 7671:2008
(2011). The tables give ratings for single cables (one multicore cable or, for single‐core cables, one conductor per phase). Therefore,
all the reported data, such as the required rating (Iz) and the tabulated rating (It), are given for a single cable. In this way, the results
presented can be used to easily understand how the appropriate cable has been selected from the tables.
In the case of parallel cables, the data is divided by the number of parallel cables, to give the requirement for each of the cables. This
can then be used to find the correct size in the tables.

For example, for a single cable, where the cable sizing calculation finds the required rating (Iz) should be 120 A, a cable size listed
with a tabulated rating (It) of 128 A would be suitable. For two parallel cables, the required rating would be 120/2 = 60 A. Two
parallel cables each with a tabulated rating of 62 A would be suitable.
I am unable to make connections in a new drawing. What is wrong?
The single line diagram in ProDesign can be arranged in one of two ways, either with the supply source near the top of the drawing
with the other components connected radially downwards, or with the supply near the bottom with the drawing connected radially
upwards.
The preferred arrangement is set in the Preferences | Drawing menu as either ‘Source feeds from Top’ or ‘Source feeds from
Bottom’. Unless the drawing is constructed in agreement with the logic of the selected setting, it will not be possible to successfully
make connections between components.
There are visual guides provided to indicate correct connection on the drawing. Red and blue crosses (ensure that the menu item
View | Show Unconnected Ends is selected) indicate unconnected components. A blue cross indicates the load end of a component;
the cross disappears when a successful load connection is made. Similarly, a red cross indicates a location where a supply end
connection is required.
Also, any component that has no load end connection will be coloured red/brown. Once it is connected it will be coloured black, or
an appropriate phase colour.
Is there a way to make common changes to large numbers of components without having to
visit all their dialogs?
The best way to make multiple changes is to use the Data Entry feature (Menu: Edit | Data Entry) which contains lists of all cables,
loads and motors and all associated settings. For example, to change all the cables in a network from one type to another: select all
the cables (click the first in the list, then Shift‐Click the last); select the new cable type from the Type list box; all cables will then be
changed to the new type.
There is also a feature that allows Templates to be applied to one or more cable, load or motor.
Is it possible to edit ProDesign reports?
The printed reports produced by ProDesign are intended to be a record of a project at the time of a calculation and cannot be
modified. However, it is possible to export a report as text file and then edit it.
To export a report: display the report preview in the normal way; click the Export button (the first button in the toolbar below the
title bar); in the export dialog type a filename; select a file type (.doc to preserve the formatting), then click Save. The exported file
can then be opened as a document and edited.

Amtech Group Limited End‐User Licence Agreement

This Agreement and the attached terms and conditions constitute the entire Agreement between Amtech Group Limited and the
Customer concerning the Services. By proceeding with the purchase of the Services, the Customer confirms that they have read,
understood and agreed to this Agreement. Each party confirms that it has not relied upon any representations not recorded in this
Agreement. No variation of this Agreement will be valid unless confirmed in writing by authorised signatories of both parties. The
Schedule (the “Schedule”) forms part of this Agreement and is therefore subject to the terms and conditions within this Agreement.
1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. The meaning given to terms shall apply throughout this Agreement, and
1.2. ‘British Standards’ means material identified as having been supplied by or on behalf of the British Standards
Institution.
1.3. ‘Concurrent Users’ means multiple users, each covered under a single licence.
1.4. ‘Data’ means the information products and/or information services purchased by, and/or subscribed to by the
Customer as set out in the Schedule.
1.5. ‘Designated Equipment’ means the machine (s) and the locations identified to and agreed by the Licensor in writing.
Where no equipment is designated at the time of this Agreement, the Customer undertakes to identify equipment for
this purpose within 21 days of this Agreement.
1.6. ‘End User’ means an individual enabled by the Customer to use the Services in accordance with this Agreement. The
total number of authorised End Users will be the quantity of licences granted to the Customer by the Licensor as set
out in the Schedule (“Number of Licences”).
1.7. ‘Fault’ means an error in the Services constituting a material deviation from the criteria for performance of the Services
described in the specification in the Schedule.
1.8. ‘Initial Support Period’ means the period during which support will be provided by the Licensor to the Customer to the
extent described in the Schedule. Such Initial Support Period will commence on the Start Date.
1.9. ‘Initial Term’ means the period starting on the Start Date and lasting for the period specified on the Schedule. If no
period is specified, the Initial Term is one year.
1.10. ‘Fees’ means the amount (exclusive of VAT) payable by the Customer to the Licensor in respect of the Services and as
set out in the Schedule.
1.11. ‘Customer’ means the person or organisation purchasing the Services as named on the Schedule .
1.12. ‘Licensor’ means Amtech Group Limited whose address is Bank House, 171 Midsummer Boulevard, Central Milton
Keynes, MK9 1EB.
1.13. ‘Material’ means the content of the Services, including without limitation all text, data, diagrams, images, computer
programs, thesauruses, metadata and other works, including any physical media used to carry the same.
1.14. ‘Network User’ means permitted number of End Users connected to the server on a single file server concurrently.
1.15. ‘Payment Date’ means the date upon which payment of the Total Cost shall be due, and subject to clause 6 of this
Agreement.
1.16. ‘Sage’ means The Sage Group plc of Sage (UK) Limited, North Park, Newcastle upon Tyne, NE13 9AA.
1.17. ‘Sage Link’ means optional function in the Software enabling the Data to be exported to computer systems supplied by
Sage.
1.18. ‘Services’ means the Software and/or Data purchased and/or subscribed to by the Customer and any support for the
Services provided by the Licensor, as set out in the Schedule.
1.19. ‘Single User’ means the single primary user.
1.20. ‘Software' means the software products (including Third Party Software) and/or software services (including Third
Amtech Group Amtech Group Limited End‐User Licence Agreement  303

Party Software) purchased by the Customer as set out in the Schedule. Software includes any part of the Software, any
modification of the Software, any back‐up copy of the Software, any updates to the Software provided by the Licensor
and/or acquired by the Customer and any related documentation including any Third Party Software.
1.21. ‘Site’ means each and any geographical site (or the number of sites, as the case may be) under the control of the
Customer, at which the Customer and its authorised End Users may use the Services.
1.22. ‘Start Date’ means the first day the Services become available to the Customer as specified on the Schedule.
1.23. ‘Subscription Period’ means, in relation to the Services (or part of the Services) which are provided on a subscription
basis as detailed on the Schedule, a minimum period of twelve months from the Start Date and continuing thereafter
from month to month until cancelled by either party giving three months written notice.
1.24. ‘Third Party Software’ means all Software owned by a third party but licensed for distribution by the Licensor as part of
the Software.
1.25. ‘Total Cost’ means the total annual sum (exclusive of VAT) payable in respect of the Services or any other amount
substituted under clause 6 if the Schedule specifies that the Services are to be paid for on an annual basis.
1.26. ‘Update’ means an instalment of Software or Data supplied to the Customer.
2. TERMS APPLICABLE TO ALL SERVICES
2.1. The Licensor grants to the Customer a non‐exclusive non‐transferable licence to install and operate the Software on the
Designated Equipment to the Number of Licences and no more.
2.2. This Agreement covers elements of the Services which may be variously sold as goods, supplied as services and
licensed. No term implied into this Agreement by statute or otherwise as regards any one or more of such elements
shall apply to any other element by virtue of being provided under this same Agreement.
2.3. If the Customer purchases the Services on a subscription basis, the Customer’s rights to use the Services are limited to
the Subscription Period. Customer may have the option to extend this Subscription Period or convert to a perpetual
licence, at the Licensor’s fees from time to time. If the Customer extends their Subscription Period, they may continue
using the Services until the end of their extended Subscription Period.
2.4. The Customer may not make any use of the Services except as expressly authorised in this Agreement. The Licensor
reserves the right to verify the validity and use of licences on Designated Equipment as and when required.
2.5. In particular, without limitation, the Customer shall not, and shall take steps to ensure that its End Users do not: (a)
modify, alter or adapt the Services or the Material; (b) copy, disclose or otherwise use any part of the Services or the
Material or any passwords or licence keys issued to the Customer otherwise than as expressly permitted in this
Agreement; (c) translate or decompile any Services, Material, Software, computer program or any website used for the
delivery of the Services, nor combine or incorporate any such computer program with or in any other; (d) submit,
publish, display or disclose any Material on any website whether by means of photocopies, screenshots, screen
scraping, linking or in any other manner whatsoever; (e) sell, market or distribute (or allow any other party to sell,
market or distribute) the Material.
2.6. In using the Services the Customer accepts full responsibility and liability for ensuring that the End Users fully comply
with these terms and notices. The Customer shall take all necessary and reasonable steps in order to ensure that End
Users comply with the terms of this Agreement and shall promptly notify the Licensor of any failures of which the
Customer becomes aware. The Customer shall provide all reasonably necessary assistance to the Licensor to protect
and enforce the Licensor’s rights in respect of the Services against any unauthorised usage.
2.7. All intellectual property rights, including (without limit) all rights in respect of copyright, database rights, know how,
trade marks, price lists, discounts, supplier/manufacturer/customer names and information, images, product data,
source code, object code and confidentiality anywhere in the world (and whether capable of registration or not) in the
Services (“Intellectual Property Rights”) belong to or are licensed to the Licensor and the Customer shall immediately
inform the Licensor of a breach of any of the Intellectual Property Rights and assist the Licensor in defending the same.
The Customer and its End Users will not acquire any rights or interests to or in any part of the Intellectual Property
Rights. The Customer shall co‐operate fully with the Licensor by taking all steps required by the Licensor (in its sole
discretion) in connection with any infringement allegation or claim in respect of the Intellectual Property Rights,
including, without limitation, legal proceedings in the name of the Licensor or in the joint names of the parties. The
Licensor shall be responsible for the cost of any legal proceedings it initiates, and the Licensor is entitled to any
damages, account of profits and/or awards of costs recovered. The Customer shall use its best endeavours to assist the
Licensor in any legal proceedings relating to any such allegation of infringement.
2.8. The reproduction of parts of the Material may also be subject to restrictions imposed by third parties and the Customer
agrees that it shall not use any Material whether in whole or in part in any way which fails to comply with any
restrictions imposed by third parties.
2.9. The Customer shall indemnify the Licensor for any and all losses, liabilities, damages, costs, claims and expenses caused
to or incurred by the Licensor by an infringement of the Intellectual Property Rights by the Customer or by a third party
304  Amtech Group Limited End‐User Licence Agreement Amtech Group

with the Customer’s assistance or omission.
2.10. If the Customer purchases the Services on a subscription basis, this subscription is personal to the Customer and is not
capable of assignment.
2.11. The Customer shall prevent any access to and use of the Services save as is permitted by this Agreement.
2.12. The Customer acknowledges that the selection of Material and its form and structure are the intellectual creation of
the Licensor and have not been made public but remain confidential to the Licensor and other Customers of the
Services. The Customer undertakes to maintain such confidentiality, and shall remain liable and responsible for
ensuring that its employees and End Users comply with such conditions of confidentiality.
2.13. Representatives of the Licensor may enter the Customer’s premises (including the Sites) at all reasonable times to verify
the Customer’s compliance with this Agreement. The Customer shall at all times keep accurate and up to date details
of the individual End Users to whom at any given time it has permitted access to the Services, Data and/or Material.
2.14. All physical property supplied by the Licensor, including without limitation CD‐ROMs (or other storage/transmission
devices) and operating manuals, remains the property of the Licensor. The Customer shall, at its cost, return such
property to the Licensor on demand at the end of this Agreement in good and usable condition.
2.15. The Customer shall promptly notify the Licensor if any physical property supplied for the provision of the Services is lost
or damaged. Risk in such items passes to the Customer upon its receipt of those items. Upon payment by the Customer
of its then current prices for those items, the Licensor shall replace them as soon as reasonably practicable.
2.16. The Services shall be delivered to the physical and/or electronic addresses (as applicable) agreed by the parties. The
Customer shall promptly notify the Licensor of any change in the physical or electronic addresses to which the Services
or any of them and/or any notices should be delivered, and the Licensor shall not be liable for losses resulting from the
failure by the Customer to notify the Licensor of any such change.
3. TERMS APPLICABLE TO DATA
3.1. The Licensor will provide the Data to the Customer as agreed.
3.2. The nature and content of the Data may change from time to time. In particular, the Licensor might have to remove
certain parts of the Data if the Licensor ceases to have the right to include that Data. The Licensor is not responsible or
liable for any failure of, or problems with, the Data to the extent that such failure or problem is in any way connected
with the Customer’s use of any other resources which have not been expressly pre‐approved by the Licensor.
3.3. The Licensor shall use reasonable endeavours to deliver the Data on or as soon as reasonably practicable after the Start
Date, but time is not of the essence. Where the Customer has entered into this Agreement for the supply of physical or
media carrying electronic copies of the Data, delivery of such Data shall be made to the physical and/or electronic
address(es) agreed, and it shall be the obligation of the Customer to notify the Licensor of any changes to these
addresses.
3.4. The Customer accepts full responsibility and liability for ensuring that it and, where relevant, any End Users follow(s)
the verification process specified by the Licensor within fourteen (14) days of the commencement of the provision of
the Data from the Licensor.
3.5. As part of the verification process the Customer acknowledges that the Licensor shall be entitled to collect and retain
the technical information of the Customer and, where relevant, any End User accessing the Data for the purpose of
ongoing account maintenance, subscription verification and delivery of the Data according to the terms of this
Agreement. The Customer accepts full responsibility for ensuring that it and, where relevant, any End User consents to
the processing of such technical information by the Licensor and, if the Customer and/or where relevant, any End User
does not give such consent, neither the Customer nor the End User shall be entitled to receive the Data and the
Licensor shall be entitled to terminate this Agreement without penalty.
3.6. The Licensor shall deliver the Data in the format it deems most suitable.
3.7. The Licensor reserves the right to deliver in part or whole the Data in other formats. Where a new delivery format is
made available or where the value or functionality of the Data is improved and is classified as an upgrade by the
Licensor then the Licensor reserves the right to increase the Total Cost payable in respect of affected Data at any stage
during the term of this Agreement. Changes shall be notified on 30 (thirty) days written notice.
4. TECHNICAL SUPPORT
4.1. In the Initial Support Period the Licensor shall provide advice and assistance by telephone or e‐mail (at the Licensor’s
option) concerning the use of the Services. This assistance will be available to the Customer between the hours of
9.00am and 5.00pm GMT/BST Monday to Friday (excluding Bank Holidays in England and 27 to 31 December inclusive
in any year), via such telephone number or e‐mail address as the Licensor may notify to the Customer from time to
time. The Licensor shall use reasonable skill and care in providing advice and assistance but cannot guarantee to be
able to answer every question put to it.
4.2. If (but only if) the Customer is able to demonstrate that any reported fault is a genuine Fault with the Services rather

than an error in the way the Services are being used or accessed by the Customer or End Users or in any computer
resources used by the Customer, the Licensor shall use reasonable endeavours to fix any Fault with the Services and
shall at the Licensor’s option provide the Customer with a workaround solution, a software patch or upgrade. Although
the Licensor will use reasonable endeavours to fix any Faults with the Software, Service or Data experienced by the
Customer, and to provide a workaround, it cannot guarantee the timely resolution of such faults.
4.3. After the expiry of the Initial Support Period, support will be given upon the Customer entering into a Support
Agreement on the Licensor’s standard terms and at the Licensor’s standard support fees, from time to time.
4.4. The Customer shall provide all information and assistance the Licensor reasonably asks for when attempting to provide
a solution to any Fault in the Services reported by the Customer.
5. THE CUSTOMER OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITIES
5.1. The Customer shall indemnify the Licensor, and keep it indemnified, against all losses, liabilities, damages, costs, claims
and expenses any third party makes or brings against the Licensor in connection with the Customer’s (including in
respect of its employees) or any End User’s use of the Services outside the terms of this Agreement This indemnity
includes the reimbursement of all costs and expenses incurred by the Licensor in connection with such claims and
proceedings.
6. LICENCE FEES
6.1. The Customer agrees to pay the Fees both as to time and manner of payment as required by the Licensor. If the
Customer fails to do so, the Licensor may immediately suspend or discontinue delivery of the Services and/or further
Updates and/or support services.
6.2. The Licensor reserves the right to review the Fees on each anniversary of the Agreement and shall give the Customer
30 days notice before such review becomes effective.
6.3. The Licensor reserves the right to assign any monies received in respect of this Agreement against any other amounts
outstanding in respect of other goods or services provided and suspend or discontinue delivery of further Updates, if
the Customer’s account falls into arrears. The Licensor further reserves the right to invoice the Customer through any
company affiliated to the Licensor, or through the use of any third party company or agent, provided that the Licensor
shall continue to ensure that the Services are delivered in accordance with this Agreement.
6.4. If the Fees are payable as a Total Cost, the Licensor will invoice the Customer once per year, but the Licensor may
permit part payments of the Total Cost using Direct Debit. If payment is by Direct Debit, then at least 30 (thirty) days
before the first Payment Date, the Customer shall deliver to the Licensor a properly executed banker’s direct debit
mandate (in a form acceptable to the Licensor) for payment of the Fees. Payment by Direct Debit does not permit the
Customer to terminate this Agreement with a shorter notice period than that set out in this Agreement. The Customer
agrees that it shall continue to be liable for any sums due against the Total Cost following improper termination or
stoppage of a Direct Debit by the Customer.
6.5. The Customer shall be responsible for notifying the Licensor of any change to the address to which invoices and other
notifications should be sent in connection with this Agreement, and shall indemnify the Licensor for any losses or costs
resulting from its failure to do so.
7. RESTRICTIONS ON THE LICENSOR’S LIABILITY AND INDEMNIFICATION
7.1. The Services cannot be guaranteed to be free from errors. The Customer acknowledges and accepts that there may be
errors within the Services and the Licensor is not liable for any loss or damage the Customer suffers as a result of such
errors.
7.2. Much of the Data and/or Material is obtained from third parties. While the Licensor exercises reasonable care and skill
to reproduce information provided to it accurately, the Licensor does not check that the information contained in the
Data and/or Material is correct and the Licensor shall not be liable for any loss or damage that the Customer suffers as
a result of errors in the Data and/or Material, nor for any omission from that Data and/or Material of any relevant
information.
7.3. Whilst the Licensor does regularly check the presentation of the Data and/or Material to ensure that it is accessible and
well presented, the Licensor does not take responsibility for the reliability, suitability or any other quality of product or
service described in the Data and/or Material, and no reference in the Services to any person, product or service is an
endorsement or warranty by the Licensor concerning any of these. Accordingly the Licensor is not liable for any loss or
damage the Customer suffers as a result of using or relying on any such product or service.
7.4. Neither party shall be liable for the consequences of any delays in performance of it obligations hereunder caused by
any event beyond its control, including Acts of God, war, riot or civil commotion, fire, flood, strike or labour difficulties,
sabotage, or any act or omission of the other or any third party.
7.5. [If the Services include the Sage Link then Customer may export the Data to a computer system licensed to the
Customer by Sage and access the data via that system.
7.6. The Customer understands that the Company is not acting as agent, partner or authorised representative of Sage and

that this Agreement does not form the basis of any legal relationship, whether contractual or otherwise, between the
Customer and Sage and that Sage does not accept any responsibility for any defects in the Software.
7.7. It is understood and agreed by the Customer that the Company is not liable for any charges incurred by the Customer
for reconfiguring, upgrading or otherwise modifying its hardware and operating environment for use in conjunction
with the Services.
7.8. THE LICENSOR DISCLAIMS ALL CONDITIONS, WARRANTIES, REPRESENTATIONS OR OTHER TERMS EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED OTHER THAN AS SET OUT IN THIS AGREEMENT WITH RESPECT TO THE SERVICES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO ANY WARRANTY AS TO THE FITNESS OF THE SERVICES FOR A PARTICULAR USE. THE LICENSOR GIVES NO WARRANTY
AS TO THE SUITABILITY OF THE SERVICES TO MEET THE CUSTOMER’S REQUIREMENTS AND THE CUSTOMER
ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT HAS NOT BEEN INDUCED TO ENTER INTO THIS AGREEMENT BY ANY REPRESENTATION MADE
BY THE LICENSOR AS TO THE SUITABILITY OF THE SERVICES TO MEET THE CUSTOMER’S REQUIREMENTS. ANY
CONDITION, WARRANTY, REPRESENTATION OR OTHER TERM CONCERNING THE SUPPLY OF THE SERVICES WHICH
MIGHT OTHERWISE BE IMPLIED INTO OR INCORPORATED IN THIS AGREEMENT, OR ANY COLLATERAL CONTRACT
WHETHER BY STATUTE, COMMON LAW OR OTHERWISE IS HEREBY EXCLUDED TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY
LAW. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE LICENSOR OR ITS OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, AND
AFFILIATES, BE LIABLE TO THE CUSTOMER FOR ANY SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES,
REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE LICENSOR WAS INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THE AGGREGATE
LIABILITY TO THE CUSTOMER OF THE LICENSOR OR ITS OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, AND AFFILIATES,
SHALL NOT EXCEED THE FEES PAID TO THE LICENSOR BY THE CUSTOMER DURING THE SIX (6) MONTHS PRECEDING THE
EVENT GIVING RISE TO LIABILITY, OR £5,000, WHICHEVER IS GREATER.
7.9. The Customer acknowledges that the Services have not been developed or provided to meet the Customer’s individual
requirements and that it is the Customer’s responsibility to ensure that the Services meet its requirements.
7.10. The Customer shall indemnify, defend and hold the Licensor harmless from any and all losses and expenses, including
legal fees, paid by the Licensor as a result of the negligence, gross negligence, wilful misconduct or breach of this
Agreement by the Customer.
8. TERM AND TERMINATION
8.1. This Agreement starts on the Start Date and continues in force for the Initial Term and thereafter from year to year
until terminated in accordance with this Agreement.
8.2. This Agreement may be terminated after the Initial Term (referred to in the definition of Subscription Period) by either
party giving the other three months written notice to end on a calendar month.
8.3. In addition to the rights of termination contained elsewhere in this Agreement, the Licensor may by notice in writing to
the Customer terminate this Agreement if any of the following events occur:
8.3.1. if the Customer is in breach of any term, condition or provision of this Agreement and fails to remedy such
breach within 14 days of having received written notice of such breach from the Licensor;
8.3.2. if the Customer, being a body corporate, shall present a petition or have a petition presented by a creditor for its
winding up, or shall convene a meeting to pass a resolution for voluntary winding up, or shall enter into any
liquidation (other than for the purposes of a bona fide reconstruction or amalgamation); shall call a meeting of
its creditors, or shall have a receiver of all or any of its undertakings or assets appointed, or shall be deemed by
the relevant statutory provisions under the applicable law to be unable to pay its debts or in the Customer’s
reasonable opinion such an event is reasonably likely to occur;
8.3.3. if the Customer ceases to operate;
8.3.4. if the Customer attempts to assign this Agreement.
8.4. Upon termination for any reason:
8.4.1. all rights granted to the Customer and its End Users under this Agreement shall cease;
8.4.2. the Customer must cease all activities authorised by this Agreement (and must procure that all End Users cease
all such activities);
8.4.3. the Customer must immediately pay to the Licensor any sums due to the Licensor under this Agreement; and
8.4.4. the Customer must immediately delete or remove all Software, Data and Material from all computer equipment
in its possession and immediately destroy or return to the Licensor (at the Licensor's option) all copies of the
same then in its possession, custody or control and, in the case of destruction, certify to the Licensor that it
has done so and, in each case, procure that End Users do the same.
9. FORCE MAJEURE
9.1. Neither party is in breach of this Agreement, nor liable in any way whatsoever, for any failure to perform, or delay in
performing, its obligations under this Agreement to the extent that the failure or delay results from any cause which is
beyond that party’s reasonable control. This clause does not apply to any failure or delay by the Customer to pay any

charges due under this Agreement.
10. GENERAL
10.1. The Licensor may change these terms with immediate effect if it is reasonably necessary to do so in order to comply
with any applicable law, or with the instruction of any public or regulatory body.
10.2. This Agreement is subject to English law and the courts of England have exclusive jurisdiction in respect of any dispute
arising out of or in connection with this Agreement or the Services and their use.
10.3. The failure by a party to exercise a right or remedy does not constitute a waiver of that or any other right or remedy,
and nor does any delay by a party in exercising any right or remedy. The other party shall not rely on any such failure
or delay as constituting such a waiver or as preventing the exercise of any right or remedy.
10.4. Any notice may be served personally or sent by pre‐paid registered letter or recorded delivery to the addresses most
recently given to the other party. Such notice shall be deemed to have been duly served upon and received by the
addressee, when served personally, at the time of such service or, when posted, 48 hours after the same has been
posted correctly addressed and pre‐paid.


Amtech Training
Get the most from your software with one of Amtech’s range of training courses
Receive expert tuition from our team of engineers in a relaxed, friendly atmosphere. Amtech training is suitable for all levels of
ability, from first time users to those who have had the software for a while and not yet explored all the available features.
Learn the capabilities of the software ‐ discover the many features included in Amtech software and how to apply them to your own
projects.
Learn dozens of tips, short cuts and features – these will help you make use of the software effectively and efficiently.
Learn how to produce quick, economical designs ‐ avoid over‐engineering by sizing cables, busbars and protective devices
accurately to meet the minimum criteria defined in the wiring regulations.
Learn how to produce professional documentation ‐ you will soon be able to present your clients with high quality documentation
for design or verification calculations, single line diagrams and certification (depending on your software package).
Receive your own course workbook – to help you remember what you have learned.

Courses
For more information about Amtech Training Courses see our website:
http://www.amtech.co.uk or call our Training Department on 01908 608833

Amtech's UK Training Centre
Regular scheduled courses are held in our fully equipped, air‐conditioned training centre in Milton Keynes. Each delegate has the use
of a PC loaded with the latest software. Refreshments and a buffet lunch are provided.

On site training
Training courses are also available at your premises by arrangement. Bringing these courses directly to your organisation offers many
advantages, especially for companies that have several engineers requiring training. To find out more, phone Amtech on 0800 028 28
28 or send us an email using the following address:[email protected]

CPD points
All Amtech courses attract Continuing Professional Development (CPD) hours which are credited towards an individual's CPD. The
aim of CPD is to enhance business performance and improve an individual's career prospects.

Amtech is an Institute of Electrical Engineers (IEE) Endorsed Provider and is registered with the Chartered Institute of Building
Services Engineers (CIBSE) as a course provider.

Amtech Group Amtech Training  309

Amtech PremierCare
Amtech’s unique Technical Support Service, PremierCare, brings a new dimension to customer service. PremierCare is a Quality
Assured service to customers of our software, as all Amtech software is covered by ISO 9001 TickIT for software development.

Benefits to members include
Technical support
Software service packs
Exclusive access to online technical support
Discounts
Technical Support
Get help when you need it from the largest team of Electrical Software Support Engineers in the industry. Amtech’s Technical
Support staff has a wealth of experience, understand your business and can be contacted by phone during office hours, and by fax,
email and via Amtech’s website.
A menu option link to the Amtech Support web page has a direct link to the Amtech Assistance login page.
When you click on this option from the menu it will take you to the Amtech Support web page.
On the Amtech Support page there is a link to click on that will take you directly to the ‘Live Remote Assistance’ website.
This allows the Support Engineers to view and control your machines, with your permission, from the office.
Software service packs
Products, legislation and design trends are constantly changing... Amtech software developers make sure Amtech software keeps up
to date. As a PremierCare member, you will automatically receive our service packs as soon as they are released, free of charge.
These keep your Amtech product databases right up to date – including product deletions as well as additions – so you can be sure
that you always have the most current range of approved devices in your design toolbox. You will also receive substantial discounts
on major upgrades.

Exclusive access to online technical support
Access to the members‐only area on Amtech’s website for
 free downloads including maintenance releases and database updates
 access to FAQs and valuable technical tips
 SuperCharged, the newsletter for PremierCare members, with all the latest technical tips, update information and
general news, keeping you informed of what's going on at Amtech before anyone else
 logging a support request.
Amtech Group Amtech PremierCare  311

Discounts
PremierCare members can purchase additional Amtech products and upgrades at discounted rates. These discounts also apply to
our training courses. Other special promotional offers are also available to PremierCare members from time to time.
Further information
If you wish to check your PremierCare status or to renew your membership please call
0800 028 28 28
PremierCare login
If you have current PremierCare membership and wish to access the PremierCare members’ area on Amtech’s website use the
following web address.
http://www.amtech.co.uk

312  Amtech PremierCare Amtech Group

Glossary of Terms
Active Supply
A number of alternative sources of supply can be defined as the origin of supply for a
network. Only one of these can be modeled as the ‘Active Supply’ indicated by
checking the box. Where only one source exists, the box for that source is
permanently checked.
Only available in ProDesign 100 versions and above:
The active supply can be defined as a number of identical parallel supplies.
Adiabatic
Adiabatic checks are required to determine whether conductors might be damaged
by the thermal effects resulting from the level of calculated fault conditions.
BS 7671:2008 (2011), 434.5.2 describes the adiabatic checks required for protective
conductors.
BS 7671:2008 (2011), 543.1.3 describes the adiabatic checks required for phase
conductors.
Ambient Temperature
The temperature of the free air surrounding a cable, or in the case of cables installed
in the ground, the temperature of the surrounding soil. For an enclosed method such
as ‘In conduit’ this will be the temperature of the air surrounding the conduit, not the
temperature inside it.
Basic Protection
Protection against electric shock under fault‐free conditions; use of barriers, placing
out of reach, etc.
Breaking Capacity
The breaking capacity of a circuit‐breaker is the maximum level of fault current (kA) it
can safely interrupt.
Each circuit‐breaker has two breaking capacities:
Ultimate Breaking Capacity (Icu): it is required that the circuit‐breaker should be
selected so that its Ultimate breaking capacity is equal to or greater than the
prospective fault current (Ipf) at the point at which it is installed.
Service Breaking Capacity (Ics): it is recommended that the Service breaking capacity of
a circuit‐breaker should be equal to or greater than the prospective fault current (Ipf)
at the load end of the circuit it is protecting.
Amtech Group Glossary of Terms  313

Ca
Ambient temperature rating factor used for calculating the minimum required cable
size. For cables installed in air, values for this factor are given in BS 7671:2008 (2011)
Table 4B1. For ground installations, values are given in Table 4B2.
Elevating the ambient temperature will result in a lower rating factor Ca. This may
result in an increased cable size.
Cable k2s2
Energy withstand of cable in A2s.
For example, a cable with a withstand of 12 x 104 A2s, can sustain without permanent
damage, a fault current of 1,000 A for a time of 0.12 s (1,0002 x 0.12 = 12 x 104 A2s).
Cascade Rated
Circuit‐breaker manufacturers publish tables showing combinations of pairs of circuit‐
breakers, one upstream, one downstream, where the downstream device can be used
at a location where the prospective fault current (Ipf) is higher than its breaking
capacity (Icu).
Only combinations approved by a manufacturer should be used – only these are
available in ProDesign. Also, the Icu of the upstream device must equal or exceed Ipf
at its point of installation.
Cc
The rating factor Cc = 0.9 is applied to cable sizing calculations for cables installed in
the ground (Installation Methods 70 to 73).
See BS 7671:2008 (2011), Appendix 4, Sections 3, 4 and 5.1.1.
Cd
The rating factor Cd is applied to cable sizing calculations for cable installed in the
ground. Its value varies according to the depth of lay installed – see BS 7671:2008
(2011), Table 4B4.
Cf
The rating factor Cf = 0.725 is applied to cable sizing calculations for any circuit
protected by a semi‐enclosed fuse to BS 3036.
Cg
Grouping rating factor used for calculating minimum required cable size. For cables
installed in air, values for this factor are given BS 7671:2008 (2011), Tables 4C1, 4C4,
4C6. For ground installations, values are given in Table 4C2.
Grouping a circuit with others will result in a lower rating factor Cg. This may result in
an increased cable size.
Ch
Rating factor used for calculating the minimum required cable size in the presence of
harmonic currents – see BS 7671:2008 (2011), Appendix 4, section 5.5.
314  Glossary of Terms Amtech Group

Ci
Rating factor used for calculating the minimum required cable size for cables run in
thermal insulation – see BS 7671:2008 (2011) Table 52.2.
Circuit Protective Conductor
A circuit protective conductor (cpc) connects exposed‐conductive‐parts* of
equipment to the main earthing terminal.
*Conductive part of equipment which can be touched and which is not normally live,
but which can become live when basic insulation fails.
Competent Person
A person who possess sufficient technical knowledge, relevant practical skills and
experience for the nature of the electrical work undertaken and is able at all times to
prevent danger and, where appropriate, injury to him/herself and others.
Consumer Unit
A type of single‐phase board for the control and distribution of electrical energy,
principally in domestic premises. In ProDesign a consumer unit (CU) can be split into
three sections, each with different types of residual current protection.
CPD
Circuit protective device. A fuse or circuit‐breaker providing overload and fault
current protection.
Cs
The rating factor Cs is applied to cable sizing calculations for cable installed in the
ground. Its value varies according to the thermal resistivity of the soil in which the
cable is installed – see BS 7671:2008 (2011), Table 4B3.
Current‐carrying Capacity
The maximum current which can be carried by a conductor under specified conditions
(Installation method, temperature, grouping, etc.) without its steady‐state
temperature exceeding a specified value (e.g., 90 ºC for cables with thermosetting
insulation).
Depth of Lay
Indicates the depth of installation for cables installed in the ground.
The rating factor Cd is applied in cable sizing calculations to account for different
installation depths.
For cables with Installation Methods 70 to 73, values of Cd are found in BS 7671:2008
(2011),Table 4B4.
For methods using BICC data, rating factor Cd has a value of 1.0 for a depth of 0.5 m.
For greater depths the value of the rating factor will be less than 1, and greater than
one for shallower depths.

Design Current
Design current or ‘Ib’ in Amperes. The level of current to be carried by a circuit in
normal service.
Device Rating
Circuit Protective Device rating, or ‘In’ in Amperes.
If the overload setting can be adjusted then the ‘adjusted rating’ is known as ‘Ir’.
Discrimination
Discrimination is achieved where, under overcurrent conditions, the protective device
nearest the fault operates rather than any protective device on the supply side of it,
ensuring that an overcurrent condition will be disconnected without disruption to any
other circuits in the system.
Distribution Board
An assembly containing protective devices associated with one or more outgoing
circuits fed from an incoming circuit. In ProDesign a distribution board (DB) may be
single‐phase or three‐phase, and can contain up to 100 outgoing circuits.
Diversity
It is often not desirable to size each conductor in a distribution system to support the
total connected load at that point in the network. Diversity is applied on the basis of
the anticipated loadings that are likely to result from all loads not being connected at
the same time.
Fault
A circuit condition in which current flows through an abnormal or unintended path.
The fault current may flow from line to line (phase fault) or line to earth.
Final Circuit
A circuit connected directly to current‐using equipment, or to a socket‐outlet or
socket‐outlets or other outlet points for the connection of such equipment.
Fixed Equipment
Equipment designed to be fastened to a support or other wise secured in a specific
location.
Harmonic
The presence of harmonic content in the line conductors of a three‐phase and neutral
circuit can give rise to excessive levels of load current in the neutral conductor.
I2t
The energy let‐through of a device in A2s. The total amount of energy let through by a
protective device for a given level of fault current at a stated voltage.

Ib
The design current of a circuit in Amperes. The level of current to be carried by the
circuit in normal service.
Instructed Person
A person adequately advised or supervised by skilled persons to enable him or her to
avoid dangers which electricity may create.
Ipf
Prospective fault current. The calculated fault current at a particular point in the
network. The calculation assumes a zero impedance fault, i.e., bolted fault.
Ir
The adjusted overload rating of an Overcurrent protective device, in Amperes.
Iz
The current carrying capacity of a cable under the defined installation conditions. This
is the effective rating of the cable after the relevant rating factors have been applied,
i.e., Ca, Cg, etc.
k
Factors for conductor materials from BS 7671:2008 (2011), Table 43.1. Different
values are given for different types of conductor and insulating materials.
k2s2 used in adiabatic calculations gives the short‐time withstand of a conductor in
A2s.
Max Zs
The maximum value of earth fault loop impedance (Zs) that will allow the protective
device in a circuit to disconnect an earth fault within the prescribed time.
Example: if the maximum earth fault disconnection time for a circuit is 0.4 s and a
fault current Ia = 320 A is required to operate the circuit protective device in that
time:
Max Zs = Uo/Ia = 230/320 = 0.7188 Ω
The earth fault loop impedance, i.e., the path through which fault current will flow for
an earth fault in the circuit under consideration. It comprises the sum of: Ze, the
external impedance; Z1, the line conductor impedance; Z2, the circuit protective
conductor impedance.
Zs = Ze + (Z1 + Z2).

PDA
Personal Data Assistant. A hand held computer which can be connected to a desktop
or laptop computer.

N.B. Amtech Mobile Software will only operate on PDAs which use Microsoft’s Pocket
PC operating systems.
Prospective Fault Current
Prospective Fault Current (Ipf) is the value of overcurrent at a given point in a circuit
resulting from a fault of negligible impedance between live conductors having a
difference of potential under normal operating conditions, or between a live
conductor and an exposed‐conductive‐part.
Power Factor
Power factor is the ratio of the resistance (R) and impedance (Z) in a circuit, ie.:
Power factor = cos = R/Z
Rated Current
Value of current used for specification purposes, established for a specified set of
operating conditions.
Rating Factor
Rating factors are divided into the nominal rating of the circuit protective device (In)
to determine the minimum current‐carrying capacity (Iz) of a cable in a circuit. For
example:
Iz = In/(Ca x Cg x Cc x Ci x Ch)
Rating factors:
Ca – ambient temperature;
Cc – buried installation methods 70 to 73 (Cc = 0.9);
Cd – for depth of burial;
Cf – BS 3036 protective device (Cf = 0.725);
Cg – grouping;
Ci – cable run through insulation;
Cs – for thermal resistivity of soil;
Ch – 3rd harmonic current.
Residual Current Device
A Residual Current Device (RCD) is a mechanical switching device or association of
devices intended to cause the opening of the contacts when the residual current*
attains a given value under specified conditions.
*Residual Current is the algebraic sum of the currents in the live conductors of a
circuit at a point in the electrical installation.
Skilled Person
A person with technical knowledge or sufficient experience to enable him/her to
avoid dangers which electricity may create.

Soil Thermal Resistivity
Relates to the ability of the soil, in which the cable is installed, to conduct heat energy
away from the cable.
The rating factor Cs is applied in cable sizing calculations to account for different soil
thermal resistivities.
For cables with Installation Methods 70 to 73, the values of Cs are found in BS
7671:2008 (2011),Table 4B3.
For methods using BICC data Cs has a value of 1.0 for a resistivity of 1.2 K.m/W. For
higher resistivities the value of the rating factor will be less than 1, and greater than
one for lower resistivities.
Subject to Simultaneous Overload
Where circuits are grouped, there are two available methods of calculating the rating
factor Cg to be applied:
‘Subject to simultaneous overload’: assumes that more than one of the grouped
circuits may be overloaded at any one time – applies grouping using: In/Cg.
[BS 7671:2008 (2011), Appendix 4, 5.1.2: Equation 2]
‘Not subject to simultaneous overload’: assumes that only one of the grouped circuits
will normally be overloaded at any one time (a reasonable assumption for general
distribution loads) – uses two calculations to determine Cg from which the highest
calculated value is to be used. Usually gives a reduced level of derating compared to
‘Subject to simultaneous overload’.
[BS 7671:2008 (2011), Appendix 4, 5.1.2: Equation 3, 4]
Switchboard
In ProDesign a Switchboard is intended for use as a main board connected to one or
a number of supply sources. Connections made to a Switchboard have switching
function associated with them. This allows switching scenarios to be set up, such as
normal or emergency supplies by transformer or generator. The Switchboard can also
be split into up to four sections with switchable interconnectors between each
section.
TN System
A system having one or more points of the source of energy directly earthed, the
exposed‐conductive‐parts of the installation being connected to that point by
protective conductors.
TT System
A system having one point of the source of energy directly earthed, the exposed‐
conductive‐parts of the installation being connected to earth electrodes electrically
independent of the earth electrodes of the source.
Uo
Nominal line voltage to earth. Assumed to be 230 V for grid connected systems.

UPS
An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is used to maintain the supply to an essential
service during mains supply outages. On loss of mains supply, a storage device in the
UPS continues to power the connected load. Batteries are used as the storage
component in the UPS type modeled in ProDesign.
Z1
That part of the earth fault loop impedance which comprises the impedance under
earth fault conditions of the line conductor of the circuit under consideration.
Z2
That part of the earth fault loop impedance which comprises the impedance under
earth fault conditions of the circuit protective conductor (cpc) of the circuit under
consideration.
Ze
That part of the earth fault loop impedance which is external to the circuit under
consideration. For the supply cable it will be the impedance external to the
installation. For other circuits, it is the sum of the impedance of the circuits on the
supply side of the circuit under consideration and the impedance external to the
installation.
Zs
The earth fault loop impedance, i.e., the path through which fault current will flow for
an earth fault in the circuit under consideration. It comprises the sum of: Ze, the
external impedance; Z1, the line conductor impedance; Z2, the circuit protective
conductor impedance.
Zs = Ze + (Z1 + Z2).


C
Cable 2 228
Cable 3 228
Index Cable 4 227
Cable Analysis 268
Cable Calculation 263
Cable Data Entry: Dialogs 134
Cable Data Entry: Spread Control 149
Cable Dialog 169
Cable Energy Loss 283
A
Cable Neutral Sizing 192
Accumulation of Harmonic Loads 227
Cable Phase Sizing 193
Adding Residual Current Protection 145
Cable Rating Data 201
Additional Protection 220
Cable Schedule 272
Ambient Temperature Rating Factor (Ca) 202
Cable Sizing 201, 266, 269
Annotate Toolbar 19, 49
Cable Tab 135
Annotation 68
Cable Withstand Data Calculations 187
Applying a Web Update 11
Cables 23, 59, 269
Applying Component Templates 87
Cables Dialog 27
Attachments 171
Cables in parallel 204
Automatic annotation 68
Calculate Toolbar 19, 50
Availability of Web Updates 9
Calculating earth fault impedance 237
Calculating The Project 190
B Calculation Menu 43
Board Data 256, 257, 259, 260, 261, 262, 276, 277 Calculation Method 212
Board Defined Load Threshold Exceeded 200 Calculation. 31
Board Loadings 275 Calculations Sub‐menu 41
Boards 115 Can I avoid repeatedly going through a long list of
Boards Dialog 29 protective device manufacturers to find just the
small number that I use? 300
Bonding conductor adiabatic check 236
Can ProDesign calculate 110V centre tapped systems?
Bonding Conductor Calculator 112
299
Breaking Capacity 148
Can ProDesign calculate DC circuits? 299
Breaking Capacity Check 213
Cascade Rated CPDs 214
Breaking Capacity Definitions 214
Centre Feed Unit 153
Breaking Capacity for Cascade Rated CPDs 214
Changing a Colour Setting 78
Breaking Capacity for Fully Rated CPDs 214
Changing Phase Markings 78
BS 7671:2008 (2011) Methods 205
Changing the Default Text References 69
Busbar 22, 273, 275
Changing the field order 250
Busbar Calculation 273
Check Network Logic 189
Busbar Data 207
Checking Earth Fault Loop Impedance 220
Busbar Details 273
Checking your version of software 12
Busbar Fault Rating 215
Circuit 264
Busbar Neutral Sizing 192
Circuit Chart 277
Busbar Ratings 207
Circuit Data 256, 257, 259, 260, 261, 263, 276
Busbar Schedule 275
Circuit Details 268, 278
Busbar Sections 274
Circuit Diagram 124
Busbar Settings 149
Circuit Diagram Consumer Unit 128
Busbar Sizing 192, 207, 274
Circuit Protective Device (CPD) Selection 143
Busbar Summary 272
Circuit Protective Device: Breaking Capacity 193
Busbar: Peak Fault Current Withstand 192
Circuit Protective Device: Cascade Rating 193
Busbars 59
Circuit Protective Device: Rated Current 194
Busbars Dialog 26
Circuit Protective Device: Rated Current, Motors 194
Amtech Group Index  321

Circuit Protective Device: RCD 194 Devices With Non‐graphical Data 148
Circuit Protective Device: Ring Circuit 195 Disconnection using earth fault protection 220
Circuits Tab 115 Discrimination 231
Closing the Graph View 182 Discrimination Check Dialog 92, 233
Colour Configuration 77 Discrimination Check Selection 92
Comments Tab 108, 119, 123, 149, 164 Discrimination Check Startup 92
Comments Tab ‐ Consumer Unit 133 Discrimination Data 280
Comments Tab: 153, 154 Discrimination Settings 91
Compliance With Voltage Drop Limits 209 Discrimination Settings Dialog 91
Compliant Installation: User Defined 200 Discrimination: Energy‐Based 195, 199
Component Properties 80 Discrimination: Time‐Current 195
Component Template Selection During Drawing Display Results 245
Construction 88 Displaying device characteristics 234
Component Templates 86 Displaying Quick Results 242
Components Filter 178 Displaying the Graph View 181
Conductors 134, 264 Distribution Board Report 256
Configuring the Revit/ProDesign interface 288 Distribution Board Schedule 257
Connection points 155 Distribution Board. 22
Connections 59 Distribution Boards Settings 120
Construct Toolbar 19, 47 Diversity 228
Consumer Unit Main Dialog Area 126 Diversity at a Final Circuit 97
Consumer Unit Report 259 Diversity at Tap Off 208
Consumer Unit Schedule 260 Diversity Example 228
Consumer Unit Settings 126 Diversity Settings 93, 94
Consumer Unit. 22 Diversity Tab 117, 121, 154
Copy Function 73 Diversity Tab ‐ Consumer Unit 130
Copy/Paste 178 Document Control 252
CPC Cable Equivalent Section 221 Draw Menu 36
CPC Tab 142 Drawing a Single‐line Diagram 13
CPC Tab: 152 Drawing Busbars 62
CPC: Auto Size 199 Drawing Cables 62
CPD: Breaking Capacity 199 Drawing Consumer Units 64
Creating a Report Template 249 Drawing Distribution Boards 63
Cut 72 Drawing Junction Boxes 67
Drawing Loads 64
D Drawing Motor Circuits 65
Data Entry 174 Drawing Power Factor Correction Units 66
Data Table 174 Drawing Size 56
Data Table Sort 176 Drawing Sources of Supply 59
Default Symbols 72 Drawing Street Lighting 66
Define Load at a Board (Switchboard, Distribution Drawing Sub Menu 39
Board, Consumer Unit) 95 Drawing Switchboards 61
Defined Load Threshold 96, 230 Drawing The Network 58
Defining the Component Template for a Cable 86 Drawing Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS) 64
Delete 73
Derating Factors 207 E
Description of Calculation 215, 221
Earth Fault 267
Details Tab 120, 162
Earth Fault Adiabatic Calculation 221
Details Tab ‐ Consumer Unit 126
Earth Fault Calculations 216
Details Tab: 151
Earth Fault Current 216
Determination of required cable size 205
Earth Fault Disconnection 217
Device Selection Filters 145
Earth Fault Disconnection Times (Table 41.1) 236
322  Index Amtech Group

Earth Fault Loop Impedance 216 Generator Load Check 230
Earth Fault Protection 271 Generator Load Rating 196
Earth Fault Protection Propagation 101 Generator Settings 110
Earth Fault: Adiabatic 196 Graph Navigation Tool 188
Earth Fault: Earth Loop Impedance 196 Graphical Tooltip 80
Earth Fault: External Earth Loop Impedance 196 Graphical Tooltip Sub‐menu 42
Grouping Arrangements: Touching/Spaced 203
' Grouping Rating Factor (Cg) 203
Grouping Tab 139
'Earth Fault+Energy/Current' View 185
H
E
Harmonic Assessment 284
Earthing Arrangements 218
Harmonic Current and Neutral Protection 226
Earthing Tab 119, 123, 132, 158
Harmonic Rating Factor (Ch) 203
Edit Menu 37
Harmonics 226
Editing cable references. 24
Help Menu 46
Editing text references 68
Hiding Text Annotation 69
Editing The Drawing 72
Hiding the Logo 76
Electrode Resistance Calculator 112, 236
How can I prevent voltage drop requirements leading
Electrode resistance should be less than or equal to
to cable sizes too large to be terminated? 299
200 Ohms 236
How do I enter the length for a Ring Final Circuit? 297
End Feed Unit 153
How do I find my Amtech Licence number? 295
Energy‐based Discrimination 280
How does Amtech calculate cable sizes for ring final
Energy‐based Discrimination Check 231
socket circuits? 299
Error and Warning messages 190
How is the Cable Equivalent Size of the CPC Size
Error Messages 192 Calculated? 298
Errors and Warning Report 241 How is the check made? 231, 232
Errors and Warnings Dialog 190 How is Zs Calculated? 298
Evaluating time‐current discrimination 232 HV Circuit Protective Device: Primary Rated Current
Example 298 197
Export from Revit 290
Exporting from Revit to ProDesign 290 I
Exporting new circuits from Revit to an existing
I am unable to make connections in a new drawing.
ProDesign project 293
What is wrong? 301
I need to use a range of circuit‐breakers that does not
F appear in ProDesign? 300
Fault Conditions Tab 107, 111 Ics 214
Fault Conditions Tab ‐ Fault Level Calculator 109 Icu / Icn 214
Field Chooser 244 Identical Parallel Supplies 238
File Menu 34 Identifying branches to final circuits 210
Find Function 79, 242 Impedance Matrices 222
Fix Design 85 Importing from Revit into ProDesign 291
Fixing a project design 85 Incomer Details 260
Font Selection 70 Initial voltage drop allocation 210
Free‐form text annotation 70 Input of Distribution System Details 26
Full Reports 251 Installation Methods 202
Fully Rated CPDs 213 Installed in Air 201
Installed in Ground 205
Inverter Tab 157
G
Is it possible to edit ProDesign reports? 301
General 201
Is there a way to make common changes to large
General Methods 205 numbers of components without having to visit
Generator Details 254 all their dialogs? 301

J Network Diversity 200
Junction Box 170 No Protection 149
Non‐compliant Installation 197
Non‐motor Load Settings 162
L
Notes 200, 284
Length Tab 151
Lighting Column Dialog 168
O
Line Conductor Adiabatic Check 197, 215
Load Current and Voltage Drop 266 Open Data Entry on Start‐Up 42
Load Data Entry: Dialogs 160 Operating Modes 155
Load data Entry: Spread Control 172 Optional Data Tab 118, 122
Load Dialog 28 Optional Data Tab ‐ Consumer Unit 132
Loads 22 Optional Data Tab: 152
Loads Analysis 277
Loads Schedule 276 '
Loads Summary 275 'Overcurrent + Energy/Current' View 184
Lock Project 42, 84
Locking and Unlocking Components 178 O
Logo 75
Overcurrent Protection 270
Logo Editor 76
Overload Setting Adjustment 146
Overload Setting Methods 145
M Overload Settings 90
Main Dialog Area 104, 115, 120, 134, 156
Main Dialog Area Settings ‐ Motor and Non‐motor P
loads 160
Main Dialog Area: 150, 154, 170 Pan 56
Manual Diversity at a Board (Switchboard, Paste 73

Distribution Board, Consumer Unit) 94 Peak withstand 216
Maximum Disconnection Time 199 Persistent Connection 74
Maximum Earth Fault Loop Impedance 219 Phase Conductors Sizing 89
Maximum Fault Current 212 Phase Fault 268
Maximum Separate CPC Sizes 99 Phase Fault Calculations 212
Menu Bar 18 Phase Unbalance 198
Minimum Cable sizes 98 Placing Drawing Components 20
Minimum Fault Current 213 Power Factor Correction 170, 284
Motor Circuits 206 Power Factor Correction Tab 171
Motor Details Tab 166 Preferences Menu 39
Motor Load Settings 164 Premises Type 94
Motor Loads 28 Print Note Icons 43
Motor Starter 164 Printing the Drawing 81
Motor Starting Voltage Drop 212 ProDesign Graphical Discrimination 182
Motor Starting Voltage Drop Assessment 284 ProDesign Graphical Energy Let‐through 183
Moving and Aligning Text 69 Producing Reports 248
Moving Components 74 Program Updates dialog 9
Moving the Logo 75 Project Drawing Defaults 57
Moving the Results Box 247 Project Loadings 276
Multi‐core Cables and Busbars 226 Project preferences 93
Multiple Component Edit Warning Message 179 Project Revision 100
Multiple Projects 53 Project Settings 268
Project Templates 83
N Protect Export ‐ Circuit Selector 234
Protection Tab 108, 143
Navigation Tool Functions 188
Protection Tab. 110

Protection Tab: 154 Set‐up Wizard Step 1 ‐ Drawing Orientation 13
Protective Device 264, 273 Short time withstand 215
Protective Device Commissioning 279 Showing and Hiding Components 179
Protective Device Setting Check 233 Simultaneous Overload 205
Protective Device Settings 278 Single‐core cables 227
Protective Devices 270 Sizing Calculations 208
Protective Devices Sub‐menu 42 Source 21
Purpose of Calculation 215, 221 Source Calculations 235
Purpose of Earth Fault Calculations 216 Source Details 253
Source Dialog 26, 88
Q Source of Supply Settings 104
Source. 21
Quick Results 242
Sources of Supply 103
Standard Toolbar 19, 46
R
Starting your project 18, 53
Radial Lighting Circuits 211 Street Lighting Schedule 277
Rating Factors 202, 265, 274 Street Lighting Settings 168
RCD protection for final circuits ≤ 32 A 236 Support Menu 45
REC Supply Fault Level Calculator 235 Switchboard 21
REC Supply Settings 114 Switchboard Report 261
Redo 73 Switchboard Schedule 262
Reduced Neutral Harmonics 198 Switchboard Settings 115
Reference Tab 176 Symbol Library 20, 71
Reopen Last Project at Start‐up 86 System Sub‐Menu 40
Replacing the Logo Image File 77
Reports Menu 44
T
Reports Sub‐menu 42
Table 54.7 221
Reports Wizard 248
Table H2 Diversity at a Board (Switchboard,
Re‐sizing the Logo 76
Distribution Board, Consumer Unit) 95
Returning the ProDesign design to Revit 292
Tap Off 275
Tap Off Unit 153
S Templates 179
Save 24 Text Match 79
Saving a Colour Configuration Template 78 The Drawing Window 53
Sections Tab 116 The Drawing Window Features 54
Selecting Cables 174 Thermal Insulation Factor (Ci) 203
Selecting Drawing Objects 72 Time‐Current Discrimination 280
Selecting Graph Views 181 Time‐Current Discrimination Check 232
Semi‐enclosed Fuse BS 3036 Factor (Cf) 203 Time‐current Discrimination Settings 92
Setting Component Templates as a Default 87 Toolbar 21, 176
Setting Devices 181 Toolbar Tooltips 55
Setting Display Results 245 Toolbars 18
Setting Display Results Properties 246 Total circuits in group 203
Setting Results to be displayed 247 Transformer Details 253
Settings Applied to Multiple Components 175 Transformer Load Check 229
Settings Toolbar 50 Transformer Load Rating 198
Set‐up Wizard ‐ Step 2 ‐ Drawing 14 Transformer Settings 109
Set‐up Wizard ‐ Step 3 ‐ Annotation 15 TT Calculation Requirements 236
Set‐up Wizard ‐ Step 4 ‐ Symbols 15 TT Supply Fault Level Calculator 236
Set‐up Wizard ‐ Step 5 ‐ Colour 16 TT Supply Settings 111
Set‐up Wizard ‐ Step 6 ‐ Diversity 16
Set‐up Wizard ‐ Step 7 ‐ Minimum Cable Sizes 17

U Why is the tabulated rating of a cable the same both
when using a single cable and when parallel
Undo 73 cables? 300
Undo/Redo 176 Why, when using a circuit‐breaker in a motor circuit,
Unfixing a project design 85 is the rating is reported as zero? 300
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) 155 Window Menu 45
UPS as Source of Supply 114 Withstand Data Panel 187
UPS Details (Distribution) Report 255
UPS Details (Source Only) Report 255 Z
UPS Settings 156
Zbus Viewer 223
Use Start‐up Screen 42
Zoom 55
User Defined Diversity at a Board (Switchboard,
Zoom View 80
Distribution Board, Consumer Unit) 95
Zs Measurement 283
User Defined Rating 207
User intervention 211
User Type 51
V
View Menu 38
View Toolbar 19, 48
Viewing and Printing 251
Viewing and Printing Reports 249
Voltage Drop 199, 270
Voltage Drop ‐ Circuits 281
Voltage Drop ‐ Loads 282
Voltage drop assessment 210
Voltage Drop Calculations 208
Voltage Drop Limits 89, 209
Voltage Drop Requirements 208
Voltage Drop Settings 88
Voltage Drop Settings Dialog 88
Voltage Drop Tab 163
Voltage Drop: Upsized Final Circuit 200
Voltage Drop: Upsized Sub‐mains 201
Voltage Tab 105, 109, 156
W
Warning Messages 199
What are the Min & Max fault levels in the report?
297
What is the purpose of 'Length to First Fitting' in the
Lighting, Radial Circuit? 299
Why can't I add any more Boards? 299
Why do I get a message reporting no data when
checking energy‐based discrimination? 300
Why do I get an Energy‐based Discrimination Failure?
297
Why do I get an Icu/Ics Failure? 296
Why do I get 'Earth Fault: Adiabatic' error messages?
295
Why do I get 'Earth Loop Impedance' error messages?
295

ProDesign Amtech

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

ProDesign Amtech

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ProDesign Amtech

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Amtech Group

Amtech System Requirements 1

Activating your Amtech software 5

Menus and Toolbars 33

The Project Drawing 53

Project Settings 83

Distribution System Settings 103

Data Entry Spread Control 173

Graph View 181

Autodesk Revit Interface 287

Frequently Asked Questions 295

Amtech Group Limited End-User Licence Agreement 303

Amtech Training 309

Amtech PremierCare 311

Glossary of Terms 313

Text can be placed at any location on the drawing. Click on the Annotate button or the TextBox button in the Annotate

Can I avoid repeatedly going through a long list of protective device manufacturers to find

Manual Diversity at a Board (Switchboard, Paste 73

You might also like